*DATA HELP,A
This is a temporary help message for the keyword: DATA HELP

*MENU HELP,A
This is a temporary help message for the keyword: MENU HELP

*SCROLL HELP,A
This is a temporary help message for the keyword: SCROLL HELP

*no_additional_help,A
No additional help is available for this screen.

*KEYBOARD,A
      KEY                     KEYBOARD FUNCTION
      ------------------------------------------------------------------
      TAB:                    Advance Cursor to Next Data Field
      ENTER:                  Advance Cursor to Next Row
      Shift TAB:              Backup Cursor to Last Data Field
      UP / DOWN Arrow Keys:   Increment / Decrement Value or Selection
      LEFT / RIGHT Arrow:     Move Cursor Within Data Field
      INSERT:                 Insert Space at Current Cursor Position
      BACKSPACE:              Erase Data Within Field & Move Cursor Left
      DELETE:                 Erase Current Character
      PAGE UP / PAGE DN:      Scroll Displayed Data UP or DOWN
      HOME:                   Move Cursor To Upper Left Data Field
      F1:                     Help
      F2 - F8:                Execute Labeled Function
      F10:                    Return to the PREVIOUS Menu
      ESC:                    Return to the MAIN Menu

*SYSTEM,A
                               SYSTEM HELP
                              -------------

		    Part Number............. RVN5002

		    Manual Number........... 68P81085E35



			    APPLICABLE PRODUCTS
			    -------------------
 Motorola products supported by this RSS software version are as follows:

 +===========+==========+==========+=========+========+==================+
 | Product   |          |          | Family  |        |    Frequency     |
 | Family    |   Band   |  Model   | Options | Power  |      Range       |
 +===========+==========+==========+=========+========+==================+
 | Quantar   |  VHF     |  T5365A  |  X599   |   25W  | R1 (132-154 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |  X999   |  125W  | R2 (150-174 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |  X998   |        |                  |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           |  UHF     |  T5365A  |  X597   |                           |
 |           |          |          |  X598   |                           |
 |           |          |          |  X599   |     25W;R1 (403-433 MHz)  |
 |           |          |          |  X999   |    110W;R2 (438-470 MHz)  |
 |           |          |          |  X998   |    100W;R4 (494-520 MHz)  |
 |           |          |          |  X997   |                           |
 |           |          |          |  X996   |                           |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           |  800 MHz |  T5365A  |  X599   |   20W  | 851-870 MHz (TX) |
 |           |          |          |  X999   |  100W  | 806-825 MHz (RX) |
 |           |          |          |  X998   |        |                  |
 |           |          |          |  X997   |        |                  |
 |           |          |          |  X996   |        |                  |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           |  900 Mhz |  T5365A  |  X599   |  100W  | 935-941 MHz (TX) |
 |           |          |          |  X999   |        | 896-902 MHz (RX) |
 |           |          |          |  X997   |        |                  |
 +-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
 | Quantar   |   VHF    |  T5367A  |  X599   |  n/a   | As listed above  |
 | Satellite |   UHF    |          |         |        | for VHF, UHF,    |
 | Receiver  | 800 MHz  |          |         |        | and 800 MHz      |
 +-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
 | Quantro   |  VHF     |  T5365A  |  X599   |  350W  | R1 (132-154 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |        | R2 (150-174 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           |  UHF     |  T5365A  |  X599   |    6W  | R1 (403-433 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |  X999   |   40W  | R2 (438-470 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |  X998   |100/110W| R3 (470-494 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |  225W  | R4 (494-520 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           |  800 MHz |  T5365A  |  X599   |   35W  | 851-870 MHz (TX) |
 |           |          |          |  X999   |   75W  | 806-825 MHz (RX) |
 |           |          |          |  X998   |  150W  |                  |
 |           |          |          |  X997   |        |                  |
 |           |          |          |  X996   |        |                  |
 +-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
 | DSS-III   | UHF      |  T5541A  |  n/a    |   25W  | R1 (403-433 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |   25W  | R2 (438-470 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |  110W  | R1 (403-433 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |  110W  | R2 (438-470 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |  100W  | R4 (494-520 MHz) |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           | 800 MHz  |  T5541A  |  n/a    |   20W  | 851-870 MHz (TX) |
 |           |          |          |         |  100W  | 806-825 MHz (RX) |
 |           |          |          |         |        |                  |
 |           | 900 MHz  |  T5541A  |  n/a    |  100W  | 935-941 MHz (TX) |
 |           |          |          |         |        | 896-902 MHz (RX) |
 +-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+

  * Family Options:
	X597 Conventional Analog
	X598 Conventional Analog/SECURENET
	X599 Conventional ASTRO/Analog (includes
		  customer-selectable SECURENET operation.)
	X996 6809 Secure Transparent Trunking
	X997 6809 Trunking
	X998 IntelliRepeater w/SECURENET
	X999 IntelliRepeater


	            RSS PROGRAM VERSION COMPATIBILITY
	            ---------------------------------

 RSS RELEASE NUMBERS:

 The release number of each RSS version corresponds to the release number
 for the station firmware.  The release numbering format is RX.XX.XX,
 with each major release resulting in an incremented release number
 (e.g., R1.00.00, R2.00.00, etc.).  Minor releases, i.e., those that
 include minor feature additions, are indicated by incrementing the middle
 set of digits (e.g., R5.01.00).  Internal changes, those that are not
 apparent to the user, are indicated by incrementing the right set of
 digits (e.g. R03.00.01).  The release number of the RSS is printed on
 the RSS diskettes and is displayed on each RSS screen.
 
 RSS PROGRAM, CODEPLUG, AND STATION VERSION COMPATIBILITY:

 Each new version of RSS software is "backwards compatible" with previous
 RSS generated codeplugs.  The current RSS may be used with all previous
 version conventional, 6809 trunking, and IntelliRepeater station firmware
 shown in the following table with the following differences:

 -> Error No. 513, 516, and 533 - "Connected Device Does Not Support This 
    Feature" - when you receive any of these popup messages it means one of 
    two things:

    1. The RSS is connected to the wrong device(i.e. you are running the Base 
       Station RSS and are physically connected to an AstroTAC Comparator).
       In this case, check to see that you are physically connected to the
       proper device type and try again.

    2. The RSS is sending commands that are not understood by the connected
       device.  With the addition of new firmware features, the RSS adds
       functionality to support them.  Older firmware that does not include
       these new features will not understand the new commands. In this case
       the only way to get this functionality is to upgrade your firmware.

 -> Some data fields have been moved to different screens to improve
    logical groupings.

 -> Due to added fields and screens, you may notice these new fields
    with arbitrary values.  Similarly, you may receive error messages
    if you try to access these new fields.  This may happen when a
    codeplug of an older version is read into a newer version of the
    RSS.  Simply ignore the arbitrary values and press F2 to remove
    the error messages.  Operation of the RSS or station will not be
    affected.

 -> Previous versions of the RSS software are not forward compatible
    with station firmware.  Earlier RSS versions cannot read later
    versions of the station codeplug, and will display a warning to
    this effect if attempted.

 The following tables describe the relationships between RSS program
 versions, software versions, station firmware versions, and
 Motorola part numbers.  

 The software version numbers are available through the SERVICE:STATUS
 REPORT screen unless a star (*) follows the number in the table.

        RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP

                Conventional and 6809 Trunking Stations

 +=============+==================+===============+==================+
 |             |                  |    Station    |                  |
 | RSS Version |     Software     |    Firmware   |  Motorola Part   |
 |  Release    |  Version Number  |    Versions   |     Number       |
 +=============+==================+===============+==================+
 |             |                  |     R1.00     |                  |
 |             | R1.00            |(6809 Trunking |                  |
 |             |                  | Not Avail For |                  |
 |             |                  |  R1.00)       |                  |
 |  R1.00      | SC B011.01.009   | SCM U653      | 5191020C41       |
 |(R01.19.17)  |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020C42       |
 |             | WL B011.01.006   | WL  U134      | 5191013H14       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H13       |
 |             | EX B011.01.003*  | EXC U3701     | 5191012L68       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R2.00      | R2.00            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.02.015   | SCM U653      | 5191020C47       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020C48       |
 |             | WL B013.02.007   | WL  U134      | 5191013H18       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H17       |
 |             | EX B013.02.004*  | EXC U3701     | 5191012L71       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R3.00      | R3.00            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.03.007   | SCM U653      | 5191020C49       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020C50       |
 |             | WL B013.03.003   | WL  U134      | 5191013H20       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H19       |
 |             | EX B013.03.003*  | EXC U3701     | 5191012L72       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R3.01      | R3.01            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.03.013   | SCM U653      | 5191020C51       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020C52       |
 |             | WL B013.03.007   | WL  U134      | 5191013H22       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H21       |
 |             | EX B013.03.006*  | EXC U3701     | 5191012L73       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R4.00      | R4.01            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.04.007   | SCM U653      | 5191022C13       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C14       |
 |             | WL B013.04.004   | WL  U134      | 5191013H26       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H25       |
 |             | EX B013.04.004   | EXC U3701     | 5191012L75       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R4.00      | R4.02            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.04.011   | SCM U653      | 5191022C19       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C20       |
 |             | WL B013.04.004   | WL  U134      | 5191013H26       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H25       |
 |             | EX B013.04.004   | EXC U3701     | 5191012L75       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R5.00      | R5.00            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.05.007   | SCM U651      | 5191020H09       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020H10       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020H11       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020H12       |
 |             | WL B013.05.001   | WL  U134      | 5191013H28       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H27       |
 |             | EX B013.05.002   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P13       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R5.01      | R5.01            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B013.05.012   | SCM U651      | 5191020H13       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020H14       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020H15       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020H16       |
 |             | WL B013.05.004   | WL  U134      | 5191013H30       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H29       |
 |             | EX B013.05.002   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P13       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R6.00      | R6.00            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B015.06.009   | SCM U651      | 5191020L01       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L02       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L03       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L04       |
 |             | WL B015.06.004   | WL  U134      | 5191013H66       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H65       |
 |             | EX B013.05.002   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P13       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R6.02            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.018   | SCM U651      | 5191020L05       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L06       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L07       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L08       |
 |             | WL B016.06.013   | WL  U134      | 5191013H70       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H69       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R7.00      | R7.00            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.07.015   | SCM U651      | 5191020L13       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L14       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L15       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L16       |
 |             | WL B016.07.008   | WL  U134      | 5191013H74       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H73       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R7.01            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.07.026   | SCM U651      | 5191020L17       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L18       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L19       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L20       |
 |             | WL B016.07.013   | WL  U134      | 5191013H76       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H75       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 | R7.02.02    | R7.02            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.07.030   | SCM U651      | 5191020L21       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L22       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L23       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L24       |
 |             | WL B016.07.014   | WL  U134      | 5191013H78       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H77       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R7.03            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.07.034   | SCM U651      | 5191020L25       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L26       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L27       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L28       |
 |             | WL B016.07.018   | WL  U134      | 5191013H99       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H98       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+    
 |             | R8.00            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.07.034   | SCM U651      | 5191020L25       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L26       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L27       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L28       |
 |             | WL B016.07.018   | WL  U134      | 5191013H99       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H98       |
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.01            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.08.004   | SCM U651      | 5191020L37       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L38       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L39       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L40       |
 |             | WL B016.08.002   | WL  U134      | 5191013L28       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013L27       |
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.02            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.08.006   | SCM U651      | 5191020L88       |
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      | 5191020L89       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191020L90       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191020L91       |
 |             | WL B016.08.002   | WL  U134      | 5191013L28       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013L27       |
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.03            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC B016.08.008   | SCM U651      |PC5091104000008008|
 |             |    EPIC          | SCM U652      |PC5091204000008008|
 |             |                  | SCM U653      |PC5091304000008008|
 |             |                  | SCM U654      |PC5091404000008008|
 |             | WL B016.08.003   | WL  U134      |PC5095204000008003|
 |             |                  | WL  U135      |PC5095104000008003|
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R9.00      | R9.00            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.017    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009017|
 |             | WL 020.09.015    | WL U134,U135  |PC5095103000009015|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.01            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.028    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009028|
 |             | WL 020.09.022    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 |-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.02.01  | R9.02            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.031    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009031|
 |             | WL 020.09.022    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.02            | Field upgrades|                  |
 |             |                  | only          |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.031    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009031|
 |             | WL 020.09.805    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009805|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009805|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.03.00  | R9.03            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.042    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009042|
 |             | WL 020.09.028    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095001000009028|
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.03            | Field upgrades|                  |
 |             |                  | only          |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.042    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009042|
 |             | WL 020.09.809    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009809|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009809|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.05.00  | R9.05            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.055    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009055|
 |             | WL 020.09.033    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095001000009033|
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.05            | Field upgrades|                  |
 |             |                  | only          |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.055    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009055|
 |             | WL 020.09.812    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009812|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009812|
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.06.01  | R9.06            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.062    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009062|
 |             | WL 020.09.034    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095001000009034|
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.06            | Field upgrades|                  |
 |             |                  | only          |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.062    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009062|
 |             | WL 020.09.813    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.07.00  | R9.07            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.068    | SCM P651      |PC509F103000009068|
 |             | WL 020.09.036    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095001000009036|
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | EX 020.09.005    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009005|
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.07            | Field upgrades|                  |
 |             |                  | only          |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC 020.09.068    | SCM P651      |PC509F103000009068|
 |             | WL 020.09.813    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
 |             | EX 020.09.005    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009005|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+


		  Intellirepeater/Smartzone Stations
 +=============+==================+===============+==================+
 |             |                  | System/Station|                  |
 |RSS Version  | Software Version |   Firmware    | Motorola Part    |
 | Release     |      Number      |   Versions    |    Number        |
 +=============+==================+===============+==================+
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  | System:SZ2.0  |                  |
 |  R1.00      | IR 8.14*         | SCM U653      | 5191022C03       |
 |(R01.19.17)  |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C04       |
 |             | COMB WL 930504*  | WL  U134      | 5191013H12       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H11       |
 |             | EX 7.11*         | EX U3701      | 5191012H98       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             |                  | System:SZ2.3  |                  |
 |  R2.00      | IR 10.26*        | SCM U653      | 5191022C05       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C06       |
 |             | WL B013.02.007   | WL  U134      | 5191013H18       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H17       |
 |             | EX B013.02.004*  | EX U3701      | 5191012L71       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |  R3.00      |                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 +-------------+                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  | System:SZ2.7  |                  |
 |  R3.01      | IR 11.69*        | SCM U653      | 5191022C11       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C12       |
 |             | WL B013.03.007   | WL  U134      | 5191013H22       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H21       |
 |             | EX B013.03.006*  | EX U3701      | 5191012L73       |
 +-------------+                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |  R4.00      |                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 +-------------+                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |  R5.00      |                  |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             |                  | System:SZ2.7E |                  |
 |  R5.01      | IR 13.20         | SCM U651      | 5191022H25       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022H26       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022H27       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022H28       |
 |             | WL B013.05.004   | WL  U134      | 5191013H30       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H29       |
 |             | EX B013.05.002   | EX U3701      | 5191012P13       |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 11.103        | SCM U653      | 5191022C23       |
 |             |    NON EPIC IR   | SCM U654      | 5191022C24       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R6.00      | R6.00            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R015.06.514   | SCM U651      | 5191022C29       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C30       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C31       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C32       |
 |             | WL B015.06.004   | WL  U134      | 5191013H66       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H65       |
 |             | EX B013.05.002   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P13       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R6.01            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.521   | SCM U651      | 5191022C33       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C34       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C35       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C36       |
 |             | WL B013.06.011   | WL  U134      | 5191013H68       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H67       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R6.02            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.521   | SCM U651      | 5191022C33       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C34       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C35       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C36       |
 |             | WL B016.06.013   | WL  U134      | 5191013H70       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H69       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R7.00      | R7.00            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.521   | SCM U651      | 5191022C33       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C34       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C35       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C36       |
 |             | WL B016.07.008   | WL  U134      | 5191013H74       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H73       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R7.01            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.521   | SCM U651      | 5191022C33       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C34       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C35       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C36       |
 |             | WL B016.07.013   | WL  U134      | 5191013H76       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H75       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 | R7.02.02    | R7.02            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.521   | SCM U651      | 5191022C33       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C34       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C35       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C36       |
 |             | WL B016.07.014   | WL  U134      | 5191013H78       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H77       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R7.03            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.06.521   | SCM U651      | 5191022C33       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C34       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C35       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C36       |
 |             | WL B016.07.018   | WL  U134      | 5191013H99       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H98       |
 |             | EX B016.06.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P14       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.00            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.08.503   | SCM U651      | 5191022C37       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C38       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C39       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C41       |
 |             | WL B016.07.018   | WL  U134      | 5191013H99       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013H98       |
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.01            | System:2.0.3/2|                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.08.508   | SCM U651      | 5191022C46       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C47       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C48       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C49       |
 |             | WL B016.08.002   | WL  U134      | 5191013L28       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013L27       |
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.02            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.08.508   | SCM U651      | 5191022C46       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C47       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C48       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C49       |
 |             | WL B016.08.002   | WL  U134      | 5191013L28       |
 |             |                  | WL  U135      | 5191013L27       |
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R8.03            |               |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | SC R016.08.508   | SCM U651      | 5191022C46       |
 |             |    EPIC IR       | SCM U652      | 5191022C47       |
 |             |                  | SCM U653      | 5191022C48       |
 |             |                  | SCM U654      | 5191022C49       |
 |             | WL B016.08.003   | WL  U134      |PC5095204000008003|
 |             |                  | WL  U135      |PC5095104000008003|
 |             | EX B016.07.001   | EXC U3701     | 5191012P15       |
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+       
 |  R09.00.00  | R9.00            | System:3.0    |                  |      
 |             |                  |               |                  |       
 |             | IR 020.09.519    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009519|       
 |             | WL 020.09.015    | WL U134,U135  |PC5095103000009015|       
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|       
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+       
 |             | R9.01            | System:3.0    |                  |       
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.528    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009528|
 |             | WL 020.09.022    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R9.02.01   | R9.02            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.533    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009533|
 |             | WL 020.09.022    | WL  U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.02            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |    only       |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.533    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009533|
 |             | WL 020.09.805    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009805|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009805|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.03.00  | R9.03            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.542    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009542|
 |             | WL 020.09.028    | WL U134,U135  |PC5095001000009028|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.03            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |    only       |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.542    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009542|
 |             | WL 020.09.809    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009809|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009809|
 |             | EX 020.09.001    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009001|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.05.00  | R9.05            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.552    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009552|
 |             | WL 020.09.033    | WL U134,U135  |PC5095001000009033|
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.05            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |    only       |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.552    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009552|
 |             | WL 020.09.812    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009812|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009812|
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.06.01  | R9.06            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.558    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009558|
 |             | WL 020.09.034    | WL U134,U135  |PC5095001000009034|
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.06            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |    only       |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.558    | SCM P651      |PC5091103000009558|
 |             | WL 020.09.813    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
 |             | EX 020.09.004    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009004|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |  R09.07.00  | R9.07            | System:3.0    |                  |
 |             |                  | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.564    | SCM P651      |PC509F104000009564|
 |             | WL 020.09.036    | WL U134,U135  |PC5095001000009036|
 |             | EX 020.09.005    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009005|
 |             +------------------+---------------+------------------+
 |             | R9.07            | System:2.0.3  |                  |
 |             |                  |    only       |                  |
 |             |                  |               |                  |
 |             | IR 020.09.564    | SCM P651      |PC509F104000009564|
 |             | WL 020.09.813    | WL  PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
 |             |                  | WL  PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
 |             | EX 020.09.005    | EXC U3701     |PC5093104000009005|
 +-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+


 Note that conventional and 6809 trunking station firmware both share a
 5 IC set, whereas the IntelliRepeater station firmware is provided by a
 unique 5 IC set.

*OTCSYSTEM,A
                               SYSTEM HELP
                              -------------

		 RSS Part Number............. RVN4154

                 RSS Manual Number........... 68P81098E15



            RSS PROGRAM, CODEPLUG, AND VERSION COMPATIBILITY:
            -------------------------------------------------
         
        This version of the comparator RSS supports the Motorola 
        ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator.  Previous comparator models
        are not supported by this software package.

        The following table describes the relationship between RSS 
        comparator release dates, firmware versions, Motorola part
        numbers and RSS program versions.

 +=============+================+====================+=========+==============+
 |             |                |                    |Codeplug |              |
 |Release Date |  Card Versions |   Part Numbers     | Version |     RSS      |
 +=============+================+====================+=========+==============+
 | 04/15/1998  | OC_R03.03.002  | PC5251101000030300 |   3.3   |  R03.03.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.03.002  | PC5255101000030300 |         |              | 
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
 | 01/15/1998  | OC_R03.02.006  | PC5251101000030200 |   3.3   |  R03.02.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.02.002  | PC5255101000030200 |         |              | 
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
 | 07/18/1997  | OC_R03.01.003  | PC5251101000030100 |   3.1   |  R03.01.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.01.002  | PC5255101000030100 |         |              | 
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
 | 06/20/1997* | OC_R03.00.036  | PC5251101000030003 |   3.1   |  R03.00.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.00.032  | PC5255101000030002 |         |              |
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
 | 04/22/1997  | OC_R03.00.034  | PC5251101000030002 |   3.1   |  R03.00.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.00.032  | PC5255101000030002 |         |              | 
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
 | 03/14/1997  | OC_R03.00.032  | PC5251101000030032 |   3.1   |  R03.00.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.00.028  |  51R91013L39-40    |         |              | 
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
 | 12/06/1996  | OC_R03.00.030  |  51R91020H83-86    |   3.1   |  R03.00.00   | 
 |             | WL_R03.00.028  |  51R91013L39-40    |         |              | 
 +-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+

  *-Limited Release.



                             PROGRAM NOTES
                             -------------

 -> Error No. 513, 516, and 533 - "Connected Device Does Not Support This 
    Feature" - when you receive any of these popup messages it means one of 
    two things:

    1. The RSS is connected to the wrong device(i.e. you are running the 
       AstroTAC RSS and are physically connected to a Quantar Base Station).
       In this case, check to see that you are physically connected to the 
       proper device type and try again.

    2. The RSS is sending commands that are not understood by the connected
       device.  With the addition of new firmware features, the RSS adds
       functionality to support them.  Older firmware that does not include
       these new features will not understand the new commands. In this case
       the only way to get this functionality is to upgrade your firmware.

*ser_modem_help,A
This is a temporary help message for the keyword: ser_modem_help

*dport,A
COMPUTER SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION HELP

SERIAL PORT:

The SERIAL PORT field indicates which Serial Port on the PC that the
Connected Device should be connected to. The four choices COM1,
COM2, COM3 and COM4 are selected by use of the Up/Dn arrow keys. Once
the choice is made, press the COMM TEST (F3) function key to check the
communications with the device.  Once satisfied, press SAVE (F8) to
save this setting to the PC.

The default is COM1.

NOTE: The user must be certain that no other peripheral devices (i.e.,
      mouse, modem, etc.)  are currently using the desired Serial Port.
      If another device is using the desired port, the RSS will not
      operate correctly. The solution to the problem usually requires
      the user to re configure the hardware interrupt jumpers located on
      the modem or mouse interface board.  Refer to your Instruction manual
      for your mouse or modem for further details.
       
BAUD RATE:

The BAUD RATE field is the rate of transmission between the Connected Device
and the computer. Baud Rate is expressed in bits-per-second (bps). The
choices 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 AND 19200 are selected by use of the
Up/Dn arrow keys.  

NOTE: The Quantar/Quantro station and AstroTAC 3000 Comparator do not 
      currently support any baud rate other than 9600 baud.

The default and recommended setting is 9600 bps.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this Help screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - COMM TEST. Quick check of connection between PC and device.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - SAVE Port Configuration to disk file.

     F9  - RESET Serial Port defaults.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

COMM TEST:
Comm test executes a test of the serial communications between the PC and
the device by sending commands to the device and checking for proper
response. An OK response will be displayed in the Status Window if the
system checks OK.

After the computer and the device are connected per the manual, turn the
station on and execute COMM TEST by pressing F3. If the communication test
fails, select COM2 and repeat COMM TEST. If the test fails again, repeat
with COM3. If it fails yet again, repeat the test with COM4.
If all four tries have failed, recheck your system connections.

SAVE CONFIG:
Save the configuration of the RSS to a file. This function key will save the
current port settings for the RSS to use the next time the program is
entered.

RESET DEFAULTS:
Reset serial port configuration to default values.
The settings previously saved to disk will be unchanged.

*file_maint,A
FILE MAINTENANCE HELP

File Maintenance functions allow the user to create new archive directories,
delete codeplug files from the current archive directory, and restore a
backup copy of the current archive directory contents to the current
archive.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Not used.

     F4  - Create new Directory.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Delete File from current directory.

     F7  - Restore Entire backup archive directory.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.


*mprint,A
PRINT CODEPLUG HELP

This screen will print out the current codeplug parameters which are
modifiable by a user.

Follow the directions as noted on the screen. If problems in printing occur,
check your printer setup.

*mprcp_help,A
PRINT CODEPLUG TO PRINTER HELP

This screen will print out the current codeplug parameters which are 
modifiable by a user.  The codeplug will be printed to a printer.

Follow the directions as noted on the screen. If problems in printing occur,
check your printer setup.

*mprintcp_help,A
PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY HELP

Function Key Descriptions: 

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Prints the Codeplug Summary to a Printer

     F3  - Prints the Codeplug Summary to a File on Disk

     F4 through F9 - Not used

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

A summary of all codeplug data will be printed to either the printer
or a disk file.

*mrdsv,A
READ/SAVE CODEPLUG HELP

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - READ Data from Connected Device's Codeplug into the 
           RSS program's memory.

     F3  - GET Codeplug Data from Archive Disk File.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - MERGE WildCard Data from Archive Disk File into Codeplug
           in memory.  This will overwrite any wildcard tables already
           existing in memory. (Not applicable for AstroTAC 3000
           Comparator Codeplugs.)

     F6  - Program firmware into station.  Send executable images to
           different hardware components in the station. (Not applicable
           for AstroTAC 3000 Comparators.)

     F7  - SAVE codeplug Data to Archive Disk File. This will
           overwrite the PC file if it already exists.

     F8  - PROGRAM Data into Connected Device's Codeplug.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.




On F2 - READ from device and F8 PROGRAM to device the RSS will check the
device's EEPROM and determine whether or not it needs to be conditioned.
If it needs conditioning, the RSS will prompt you.

Below is the help text for conditioning:
========================================
Memory EEPROM IC (51-84293T01/T02/T03/T04) used in Quantar/Quantro/Data Base
Stations shipped before April, 1997, has been found susceptible to memory
corruption in unused portions of its memory. (The EEPROM IC is used to
store codeplug data, alignment info, and other operation parameters for
the station.)

When EEPROM memory is corrupted and the station experiences a reset, the 
overall memory IC checksum no longer is its expected value.  This will 
result in the station "Control Fail" red LED lighting, and the station 
will not be operational.  Only RSS communications will be possible. 

The RSS attempts to correct this problem by conditioning the EEPROM.
Conditioning writes a specific pattern to the unused portion of the
EEPROM IC to prevent the memory corruption from occurring.

Whenever the user attempts to read or write codeplug data to or from the
station, the RSS checks the EEPROM to see if the EEPROM has been 
conditioned. If it has NOT been conditioned, the RSS will present the user 
with a screen explaining that the EEPROM needs conditioning. 
The user should attempt to condition the EEPROM at this point.

In most cases, conditioning of the EEPROM will take less than 10 minutes.  
The station will be access disabled during that time.

     NOTE: It is important that there is a current archive of the station's
	   codeplug before continuing with the conditioning procedure!
	   Not having an archive of the codeplug would result in the user
	   having to manually re-enter all the customer codeplug data in the
	   event of a problem occurring while performing the conditioning.

The EEPROM conditioning only needs to be done once. After the EEPROM has
been conditioned, the RSS will no longer present the conditioning screen
to the user.

     NOTE:  When upgrading a station to newer version firmware and codeplug,
            the RSS may inform the user that the codeplug needs to be 
            conditioned again, even though it had been previously 
            conditioned.  This is normal and is required to condition any 
            new codeplug data sections added during the upgrade.

The station EEPROM may only be conditioned when the RSS is connected to the
RS-232 port on the front of the station.  If the RSS is connected to the 
rear port of the station, conditioning will not be attempted.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended that conditioning NOT be done via modem
connection. Phone lines can be unreliable and could cause a failure in
the conditioning process. If the conditioning process is interrupted, 
it will fail and could result in a non-functional station! (See "IF 
CONDITIONING FAILS", below.)

SPECIAL NOTE FOR INTELLIREPEATER STATIONS:
=========================================
Conditioning MUST be done at the site and for each individual station!

Conditioning is only done to the EEPROM of the station connected to the 
RSS PC. Conditioning is not crossloaded to other Ethernet connected
stations in the system. Care must be taken to condition the EEPROMs of 
each of the stations in the system.

IntelliRepeater stations must be put into "RSS_only" mode while the EEPROM
is being conditioned. "RSS_only" mode means that the station will only
communicate with the RSS. No normal station operations are allowed.

To place the IntelliRepeater into "RSS_only" mode:
     1. Reset the Station by pressing the Volume UP, Volume Down and
        Intercom buttons (the top two and the bottom buttons) on the 
        front panel simultaneously.

     2. At the point in the reset sequence when the bottom two Station
        Control LEDs are the only ones lit, press and hold the Volume
        Down and CSQ-PL-OFF buttons (the middle two buttons) on the front 
        panel of the station simultaneously.

     3. Continue to hold these down until 15 seconds after the "Control 
        Fail" and the "PA Fail" red LEDs are both lit.

     4. If these LEDs do not remain lit, repeat steps 1-3.

     5. When these LEDs remain lit, you are ready to condition the 
        EEPROM.

     6. After successfully conditioning the EEPROM, you must reset the 
        station again to exit "RSS_only" mode and return to normal 
        operation.


IF CONDITIONING FAILS (the RSS will inform the user if a failure occurs):
=========================================================================

Reset the station.

If the station comes up "green", the failure occurred during the reading
of the EEPROM and the only step needed is to retry the conditioning when
the RSS requests it.

If the station does not come up "green" after a reset, the user will have
to do all the steps needed for installing a new station: write the archived
codeplug out to the station, attempt conditioning again and, if successful,
re-align the station.

If unable to restore the station to normal operation by repeating these 
steps, contact the Motorola Support Center at 1-800-221-7144,
(International) 1-847-576-7300, FAX 1-847-576-2172.

(End of EEPROM Conditioning Help)
==================================


On either the GET Codeplug Data from File or the SAVE Codeplug Data To
File screens, the first field displays the currently selected directory.
Drive names may be included.

The second field consists of the file name. It may be entered in one of two
fashions. The first is to directly enter in the filename. The second is to
navigate through the files using the following keys:

PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
           on one page.

Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.

Tab:      Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
          If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
          filename.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
          column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
          will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
          directory pathname may be entered.

Enter:    Will read or save using the filename that is displayed on the
          'Enter Filename' line.

*mview,A
CHANGE VIEW CODEPLUG HELP

    This section allows the user to view and change station operating
    parameters.   For DSS-III and Quantar Data Base Stations, only
    F1, F4 (Channel Information), and F10 are available.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

     F2  - Changing and viewing of the Wireline, Secure option, and
           Remote Control configurations. (Required at Station Install)

     F3  - Changing and viewing of the PL, DPL and ASTRO code table.
           (Required at Station Install)

     F4  - Changing and viewing channel information.
           (Required at Station Install)

     F5  - Changing and viewing the TRC Command Table or the DC Remote
           Command Table depending on the Remote Control Type.
           (Required at Station Install)

     F6  - Changing and viewing the RF Configuration Parameters.
           (Required at Station Install)

     F7  - Changing and viewing the 6809 Trunking Parameters.
           (Required at Station Install)

     F8  - Not used.
     
     F9  - Brings up the menu for changing/viewing the WildCard Tables.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

*mdiag,A
DIAGNOSTICS HELP

The Diagnostics screens allow the Service Technician to select which
diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests
should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests
to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start)
or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now).

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

     F2  - Station Control Module Diagnostic tests.

     F3  - Wireline Module Diagnostic tests. 
           (Not available for DSS-III or Quantar Data Base Stations)

     F4  - Exciter Module Diagnostic tests.

     F5  - RF Power Amplifier (PA) Diagnostic tests.

     F6  - Receiver Module Diagnostic tests. A pop-up window will appear
           to allow the selection of Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 diagnostic
           screens.

     F7  - Power Supply Diagnostic tests.

     F8  - HSO/UHSO Diagnostic tests.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Service Menu.

*mcon,A
SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU HELP

These functions are used to configure your RSS to your particular 
application and computer environment.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION is used to select the Asynchronous
           Communications Port (COM 1,COM 2,COM 3,COM 4) to be used for
           Programming purposes.

     F4  - MODEM CONFIGURATION is used to configure the interface between
           the PC and the MODEM to use RSS remotely via a telephone link.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6 -  Changes the password on a password protected Connected Device.  
           Also allows the user to set and disable password protection.

     F7  - SCREEN COLOR CONFIGURATION is used to enable the Color display.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - The REMOTE DIAL-UP facility is used to establish a connection
           to a remote device over a telephone link via modem.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

*mmain,A
MAIN MENU HELP

The MAIN Menu is the top level of the program from which you select 
the type of function that you wish to perform.  All selections are 
made via the "Function Keys", labeled F1 through F10 on your keyboard.

After making a selection, you will be directed to similar menus
and/or data entry screens for codeplug data.

Function Key Descriptions:

F1  - Additional information is available for every menu via the F1(HELP)
      key. Specific help is also available for each field on all data
      entry screens. Keyboard help is available within any HELP screen via
      the F2 key. Version and RVN numbers for this version are available
      via the F9 key. Additionally, the current codeplug size may be cal-
      culated by pressing the F5 key.

F2  - SERVICE: This section allows the user to check the Hardware config-
      uration and Align a new Device. It also allows for viewing 
      Status messages, running Diagnostic Tests, viewing the Status
      Panel, and saving and restoring the current Alignment.

F3  - READ/SAVE Codeplug Data routine gives the user the capability
      to retrieve data for modification. After modifying the data
      the user can program the information into the connected device
      or save it to disk for future reference.

F4  - CHANGE/VIEW Codeplug Data function allows the user to modify all
      editable information in the codeplug.

F5  - PRINT Codeplug Data function allows the user to print a copy of
      the codeplug information or save it to a file.

F6  - FILE MAINTENANCE gives the user the capability of performing certain
      operations with directories and files (i.e. creating directories).
      All of the capabilities offered by the RSS under this menu can be 
      carried out by executing one or more DOS commands.

F7  - Not used.

F8  - Not used.

F9  - SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION is used to configure your RSS Software
      to your particular application. Communication ports, screen colors, 
      modem settings, password settings, and remote phone numbers may be 
      customized to your specific needs.

F10 - Select EXIT to quit the program and return to DOS.  Be sure all
      desired codeplug changes have been programmed back into the connected
      device and that an archive copy has been made. Otherwise all changes 
      will be lost since returning to DOS erases this data from the computer's
      memory.

*mserv_help,A
SERVICE MENU HELP

This section allows the user to check the Hardware Configuration and
Align a new Connected Device. It also allows for viewing Status Messages,
running Diagnostic Tests, viewing the Status Panel, and saving and
restoring the current Alignment.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this help screen.

     F2  - Allows viewing and modification to the Hardware Configuration.

     F3  - The Alignment function prompts the user with a list of allowed
           adjustments. Install/Maintenance alignments must be executed 
           for any new installation. Maintenance alignments may be done 
           any time after installation. User access will only be allowed 
           to alignments existing on the device currently communicating 
           with the PC. For Base Stations, the station should also be 
           access disabled before attempting any alignments to prevent 
           any inadvertent keyups.

     F4  - The Status Report function reports to the user any diagnostic 
           test failure that occurred during startup, reset, diagnostics, 
           or normal operation.

     F5  - The Diagnostics function allows the user to select which
           diagnostic tests are to be run upon device start up, reset,
           or when requested by the service technician. It also allows the
           technician to determine which test failures will cause the 
           device to automatically reset.  (Not applicable for AstroTAC
           3000 Comparators).

     F6  - The Status Panel/Software Version/Set Date and Time function
           brings up a menu that allows the user to monitor and/or modify 
           current operating parameters.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Upgrade Codeplug Version. Allows the user to upgrade the current
           codeplug version to the latest version known to the RSS.
           (Only to be done as part of a firmware upgrade procedure).

     F9  - The Digital Metering function brings up a menu that contains a
           variety of selections which allow the user to monitor device
           operation at internal, predefined measurement points of the
           device hardware. The computer running the RSS must be connected
           to the device under test to enter any of the Metering screens.
           (Not applicable for AstroTAC 3000 Comparators).

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

*do_aln,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT HELP

The ALIGNMENT section enables the user to handle both new installations
and maintenance of existing Stations. Note that the Install/Maintenance
alignments must be executed for any new installations. Maintenance
alignments can be done any time after installation. To execute any
alignments, the RSS MUST be connected to the Station to be aligned.

Move the highlight bar to the desired alignment by pressing the Enter or
Up/Down arrow keys or the Tab/Shift-Tab keys. Then press F2 to select the
highlighted alignment.

NOTE:  A Station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.
  
Note:  When change has been made to the SIMULCAST field on the station
configuration screen, a Reference Modulation Compensation alignment 
should be performed.
  
Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W.  For
higher power stations,  power output is reduced to 100 W.  This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.
  
Please note that the Preselector Install/Maintenance step is band
dependent, and is covered in the Service Manual. No RSS operations
are required to align the Preselector.

General Alignment Notes
-----------------------
During alignment, the station changes the level of a particular 
parameter being aligned to reflect the new value entered by the service 
technician.  This mechanism is used so that the technician can visually 
observe the changes that are being made through some type of external 
measurement.  Thus the technician can determine whether the parameter 
being aligned has reached target or not.  When the target value is reached, 
the technician normally saves the new value for future station operation.

If the technician was changing the level of the parameter just to explore
possibilities without intention of actually saving the altered value, the
technician will use the same RSS screen and procedure as would be done
for an actual alignment.  The intention here is for the technician to
leave the station in the same state as before the exploratory test was
begun.  If the alignment screen is exited without saving the new parameter
value, the station is left with the parameter in the changed mode.  In
order to restore the parameter and station to its normal mode, the station
must be reset.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this help screen.

     F2  - Perform Alignment.  Enters the alignment procedure screen
           that the cursor is currently on.

     F3  - UHSO Enable (Override UHSO warm-up timer.  Key is only
           displayed if frequency reference is set to INTERNAL -
           HIGH STABILITY).

     F4  - Access Disables the station (prevents keyups and normal station
           operations).  The RSS must be connected to the station for this
           key to function.

     F5  - Reset Station.  Allows the user to manually reset the station
           to which the RSS is currently connected.

     F6  - Access Enables the station (restores the station to normal
           operation).  The RSS must be connected to the station for this
           key to function.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not Used.

     F9  - Not Used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.


The UHSO ENABLE function key is used to override the 7.5 minute
UHSO warm-up period.  This may be used to assist in aligning the station.

This override should only be used if the user is certain that the UHSO
is already warm, and will not cause the station to transmit off frequency.
This will be the case if the station was momentarily power cycled after
the UHSO was already active and locked.


*do_otc_aln,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT HELP

The ALIGNMENT section enables the user to handle both new installations
and maintenance of existing Comparators. Note that the Install/Maintenance
alignments must be executed for any new installations. Maintenance
alignments can be done anytime after installation. To execute any
alignments, the RSS MUST be connected to the Comparator to be aligned.

Move the highlight bar to the desired alignment by pressing the Enter or
Up/Down arrow keys or the Tab/Shift-Tab keys. Then press F2 to select the
highlighted alignment.

During alignment, the comparator changes the level of a particular 
parameter being aligned to reflect the new value entered by the service 
technician.  This mechanism is used so that the technician can visually 
observe the changes that are being made through some type of external 
measurement.  Thus the technician can determine whether the parameter 
being aligned has reached target or not.  

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this help screen.

     F2  - Perform Alignment.  Enters the alignment procedure screen
           that the cursor is currently on.

     F3  - Not used.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Reset Comparator.  Allows the user to manually reset the 
           comparator to which the RSS is currently connected.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not Used.

     F9  - Not Used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

*do_preselector,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:PRESELECTOR HELP

The Preselector Install/Maintenance step is band dependent. No RSS
operations are required to align the Preselector.

Following are the Tuning Procedures for the UHF and VHF preselectors.
Please refer to the Quantar Service Manual for more details.

UHF PRESELECTOR TUNING PROCEDURE:

Required Test Equipment:

1) RF Signal Generator - Motorola R2600 Communications Analyzer,
   R2001 Communications Analyzer, or HP8656A Signal Generator
   (or equivalent).
2) Dip/Peak Monitor - HP435B Power Meter (or equivalent) with HP8484A
   sensitive power head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC input, or
   R2001/R2600 using the spectrum analyzer function.
3) Torque driver capable of delivering 6 in-lbs of torque and 10 mm
   deep well socket.
4) Tuning Probe 01-90763D22, part of TRN5525A Tuning Kit.
5) Flat-blade screwdriver.

Procedure:

1) Loosen torque nuts.
2) Turn L3, L4 tuning screws clockwise until they bottom out.
3) Set the signal generator on the tune-up frequency (see below) and connect
to the preselector input. Set level for no more than +5 dBm.
4) Preselector output may be terminated in a 50 Ohm load, or in a powered
up module.
5) Insert tuning probe into U2 and tune L2 out for a PEAK.
6) Tighten torque nut on L2 and fine tune for a PEAK.
7) Tune L3 out for a DIP. Tighten torque nut on L3 and fine tune for a DIP.
8) Move tuning probe to U3.
9) Tune L4 for a DIP. Tighten torque nut on L4 and fine tune for a DIP.

To determine the UHF Tune Up frequency:

1) Locate the midpoint of the customer frequency range:

    freq(mid) = ( freq(highest) + freq(lowest) ) / 2

2) For Range 1, If freq(mid) < 405 Then freq(tune) = 405
                If freq(mid) > 431 Then freq(tune) = 431
                Else  freq(tune) = freq(mid).

3) For Range 2, If freq(mid) < 440 Then freq(tune) = 440
                If freq(mid) > 468 Then freq(tune) = 468
                Else  freq(tune) = freq(mid).


VHF PRESELECTOR TUNING PROCEDURE:

Required Test Equipment:

1) RF Signal Generator - Motorola R2600 Communications Analyzer,
   R2001 Communications Analyzer, or HP8656A Signal Generator
   (or equivalent).
2) Dip/Peak Monitor - HP435B Power Meter (or equivalent) with HP8484A
   sensitive power head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC input, or
   R2001/R2600 using the spectrum analyzer function.
3) Torque driver capable of delivering 6 in-lbs of torque and 10 mm
   deep well socket.
4) Tuning Probe 01-90763D22, part of TRN5525A Tuning Kit.
5) Flat-blade screwdriver.

Tuning Procedure:

Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment frequen-
cy to be generated by the signal generator.

For stations with a SINGLE RECEIVE FREQUENCY, calculate the frequency of
the alignment signal as follows:

1) From the site documentation or the RSS, determine the station receive
frequency.

2) If the frequency is less than or equal to 148 MHz (Range 1), or
less than or equal to 156 MHz (Range 2), subtract 250 KHz. Otherwise, note
the actual frequency.

    Example: If the station receive frequency is 134.575 MHz, subtract
250 KHz since frequency is less than 143 MHz.

    134.575 MHz - 250 KHz = 134.325 MHz

3) If Receiver Module is Range 1, determine the alignment frequency as
follows:

   If frequency (from step 2) is less than 134 MHz, then alignment fre-
quency = 133.75 MHz.

   If frequency (from step 2) is greater than 152 MHz, then alignment
frequency = 152 MHz.

   Otherwise, use actual frequency from step 2.

4) If Receiver Module is Range 2, determine the alignment frequency as
follows:

   If frequency (from step 2) is less than 152 MHz, then alignment fre-
quency = 151.75 MHz.

   If frequency (from step 2) is greater than 172 MHz, then alignment
frequency = 172 MHz.

   Otherwise, use actual frequency from step 2.

For stations with MULTIPLE RECEIVE FREQUENCIES, calculate the frequency
of the alignment signal as follows:

1) From the site documentation or the RSS, note the receive frequency for
each channel supported by the station.

2) Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows:

   F(mid) = ( F(highest) + F(lowest) ) / 2

3) Using F(mid) in place of the station receive frequency, perform
Step 2 through Step 4 above.

Preparing Equipment:

1) Make sure Receiver Module (with Preselector Assembly) is installed
in a functional station cage equipped with a Power Supply Module.

2) Remove the two Torx-head screws from the Receiver Module front panel
and remove the panel.

3) Detune the preselector as follows:
   If the alignment frequency (calculated above) is greater than 148 MHz
(Range 1) or 156 MHz (Range 2), turn the five tuning screws in (CW) until
1/8 inch protrudes past each of the tension nuts. If the alignment fre-
quency is less than or equal to 148 MHz (Range 1) OR 156 MHZ (RANGE 2),
BACK OUT (CCW) the five tuning screws until 3/4 inch protrudes past each
of the tension nuts.

4) Using the torque driver and deep well socket, tighten the five tension
nuts on the adjustment screws to 6 in-lbs.

5) Connect the test equipment as shown in the Service Manual.

Tuning Procedure:

1) Turn the station power supply ON (to provide the active 50 Ohm
termination).

2) Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated from the
procedure above. Set the level to +5 dBm.

3) Insert tuning probe into cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 1 for
a PEAK.

4) Leave tuning probe in cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 2 for a DIP.

5) Insert tuning probe into cavity H2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP.

6) Insert tuning probe into cavity H3 and adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP.

7) Insert tuning probe into cavity H4. Change the level from the signal
generator to -5 dBm.

8) Adjust tuning screw 5 for a DIP. Then turn tuning screw 5 1/4 turn
CCW. (Note that dip will not be as sharp as for screw 5 as it was for
screws 2 through 4).

*rxwi_adjust_help,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RX WIRELINE HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may 
occur due to normal station activity.

The Rx Wireline alignment screen is used to adjust the Rx Wireline
level for both voting and non-voting systems. (Examples of voting
systems are Spectra-TAC, DIGI-TAC, and ASTRO-TAC). Use this screen
to adjust the Rx Wireline Level at 1 kHz, the Spectra-TAC Hi and Lo
Boost levels, and the Status Tone Level.

For each of the four levels, enter the desired level followed
by enter to send the level to the station. After pressing the enter
key press the appropriate function key (F2, F3, F4 or F6 for 1 kHz, LO
Boost, HI Boost and Status Tone Level, respectively) to re-align the 
wireline output for that frequency. The Save Function key may be pressed 
after each individual adjustment, or may be pressed once after all 
adjustments are made, prior to leaving the screen.

While performing Rx Wireline Equalization, make sure that the station
is not receiving any signal on its receive input port. If a signal is
received, it will be mixed in with the test tones that are generated
to the wireline, and it will cause the technician to incorrectly set
up the equalization filters in the station.

The Save Function key may be pressed after each individual
adjustment, or may be pressed once after all adjustments are
made, prior to leaving the screen.

The technician may consider disconnecting the receive antenna cable
to make sure that nothing is being received at the station.

NOTE: The PC running the RSS MUST currently be connected to the
station to be aligned to enter the Rx Wireline adjust screen.

If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become 
active after either Function Key F7 (TONE OFF) is pressed, or the
screen is exited.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be 
aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX 
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).


*rxwi4_adjust_help,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RX WIRELINE HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

The Rx Wireline alignment screen is used to adjust the Rx Wireline
level for both voting and non-voting systems. (Examples of voting
systems are Spectra-TAC, DIGI-TAC, and ASTRO-TAC). Use this screen
to adjust the Rx Wireline Level at 1 kHz, the Spectra-TAC Hi and Lo
Boost levels, and the Status Tone Level.

The technician may consider disconnecting the receive antenna cable
to make sure that nothing is being received at the station.

The Save Function key may be pressed after each individual
adjustment, or may be pressed once after all adjustments are
made, prior to leaving the screen.

NOTE: The PC running the RSS MUST currently be connected to the
station to be aligned to enter the Rx Wireline adjust screen.


*rxwi_1khz_tone_help,A
RX WIRELINE LEVEL (1 kHz) HELP

Enter the desired line level in the field shown on the screen.
This level represents the line level for 60% of full system deviation.
Legal range is -20 to +0 dBm. Press enter to send this value to the
station followed by F2 to re-align the station wireline for this
frequency level. Press F8 to save the value in the station.

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

The level of the 1 kHz tone corresponds to 60% system deviation (i.e.
3 kHz in a 5 kHz system). Enter the desired dBm level into the field.
Note that at full system deviation the line level would be 4.4 dB higher
than this level (Therefore, if the maximum allowable line level is 0 dBm,
enter a number at least 4.4 dB lower, such as -5 dBm).

When installing a Spectra-TAC system, Press the F2 (1 kHz TONE ON)
function key to turn on the 1 kHz tone. Function key F7 (TONE OFF) may
be used to turn off the 1 kHz tone when the alignment is completed.

Measure and record the level received at the input to the
comparator. Once complete, proceed to the HI and LO BOOST ADJUST
alignments.

If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become 
active after either Function Key F7 (TONE OFF) is pressed, or the screen 
is exited.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be 
aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX 
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).


*lo_boost_level_help,A
LO BOOST ADJUST LEVEL HELP

During alignment the level of the boost tones are expressed in dB 
relative to the level of the 1kHz receive wireline test tone 
(independent of the status tone level setting). The dB steps are most 
accurate for a high boost frequency of 2500 Hz.

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may 
occur due to normal station activity.

Low frequency boost adjustment is optional and has no effect on voting
performance (it affects only low frequency "fidelity"). It is 
recommended that the HI Boost Adjust be done BEFORE the Lo Boost 
Adjustment.

A LO Boost tone (400 Hz tone) is generated on the Rx Wireline.
Measure the tone level at the comparator to determine if an adjustment 
is desired. If adjustment is desired, enter the new low boost value in 
dB (relative to the 1 kHz level) and press ENTER followed by F3 to re-
align the station for this frequency level. For example, if the
1 kHz tone is measured as -16 dBm and the 400 Hz tone is measured as
-18.3 dBm, then enter 2.3 dB in the LO BOOST field. Continue adjustment
until the 400 Hz tone level measured at the comparator is equal to the 
level recorded at the comparator for the 1 kHz tone.  Press F8 to save 
this value in the station.

If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become 
active after either Function Key F7 (TONE OFF) is pressed, or the screen 
is exited.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be 
aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX 
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).

*hi_boost_level_help,A
HI BOOST ADJUST LEVEL HELP

The level of the boost tones is expressed in dB relative to the level 
of the 1 kHz receive wireline test tone (independent of the status tone
level setting). The dB steps are most accurate for a high boost 
frequency of 2500 Hz. At other boost frequencies the level of the
alignment tone will vary according to the shape of the boost 
band-pass filter, so the number will not accurately represent dB. 
For this reason, at frequencies other than 2500 Hz the "HI Boost  
Adjust Level" should be viewed as a relative  indication only,
with zero representing no boost and higher values representing more 
boost. Once a desired level is obtained, press ENTER followed by F4 
to re-align the station for this frequency level, and then press F8 t
o save this value in the station.

NOTE: When a Quantar or ASTRO-TAC receiver is used in a voting system 
with MICOR or SPECTRA-TAC receivers, the HI boost value needs to be 
incremented by 1.5 dB in order to further equalize the Quantar or 
ASTRO-TAC receiver so that voting across all receivers will be equal. 
Proceed with the calculations prescribed in the manual for equalizing 
the phone line, then to whatever HI boost value is calculated, add 1.5 dB. 
This additional step will make the Quantar or ASTRO-TAC receiver look a
MICOR or SPECTRA-TAC receiver.

If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become
active after either Function Key F7 (TONE OFF) is pressed, or the 
screen is exited.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to 
be aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that
the wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).

*hi_boost_freq_help,A
HI BOOST FREQUENCY HELP

The high boost frequency adjustment may be used as a diagnostic tool to
measure phone line response at various frequencies. If the phone line
contains a notch or peak at the high boost alignment frequency, the
alignment frequency should be changed to one which is more 
representative of the average level of the phone line response between 
2300 and 2800 Hz. Errors will be introduced if not all receivers are 
aligned at the same high boost frequency (since the boost curves are not 
flat). If an alignment frequency is required that is more than about 100 
Hz from that of any other receiver in the system, then all other 
receivers should have their high boost adjusted at the new frequency.

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may 
occur due to normal station activity.

The initial recommended frequency is 2500 Hz.

Once a desired level is selected, press ENTER followed by F4 to re-align 
the station for this frequency level, and then press F8 to save this 
value in the station.

If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become 
active after either Function Key F7 (TONE OFF) is pressed, or the screen 
is exited.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be 
aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX 
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).


*align_status_tone_help,A
STATUS TONE LEVEL HELP

The status tone level adjustment must be made after Hi Boost is 
adjusted. It is also done when the system is installed or the HI Boost 
level is changed or the Status Tone frequency is changed.

The level of Status Tone shown in the box is approximately the level of
Status Tone at the wireline output relative to full system deviation
(i.e. 5 kHz deviation in a 5 kHz system) before boosting (or at 0 dB 
boost). If HI Boost equalization was able to flatten the end-to-end 
phone line frequency response, the level shown also represents 
approximately the level of Status Tone measured at the comparator 
relative to a 1 kHz tone at full system deviation, and should be close 
to "13 dB" (in a -13 dB Status Tone system) after performing the 
following adjustment.

Enter the desired status tone level in the appropriate box and press 
ENTER followed by F6 to re-align the station for the status tone level. 
This level is temporary and will not be retained through a station reset.  
To make this level permanent, press the SAVE key, F8.

Even though Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, Status Tone will become
disabled during the alignment process as other tones are turned on and 
off. If indeed Status Tone is Enabled, it will become active after 
either Function Key F7 (TONE OFF) is pressed, or the alignment screen is 
exited.

APPLICATION NOTES:

1. For -13 dB Status Tone systems (these are the most common voting 
system configurations), adjust the Status Tone Level up or down until 
its level, measured at the comparator, is 8.6 dB lower than the level 
recorded at the comparator for the 1 kHz tone. This corresponds to -13 
dB below a 1 kHz tone at full system deviation.

2.  0 dB Status Tone system operation is not supported in the Quantar,
Quantro or Quantar Receiver products. For these systems, be sure that 
the Signal Quality Module in the Spectra-TAC comparator which is 
connected to the Quantar, Quantro or Quantar Receiver be issue B or C 
and that it be jumpered for 13 dB operation. The other Signal Quality 
Modules can be configured for 0 dB operation.

3. If other voting receivers in the system do not use guard tone notches
(such as the Micor Spectra-TAC Satellite Receivers), then the Quantar
voting receiver(s) should have their receive wireline guard tone notch
disabled (this is the default). If other voting receivers in the system 
have guard tone notches enabled, then Quantar voting receivers should 
also have their notches enabled. The GUARD TONE NOTCH field is on the
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen.

4. For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone needs to be used to
properly align the Rx Wireline (if present).  Refer to the RSS Manual, 
the RX Wireline Procedure for details.  For analog Intellirepeater 
systems, the Status Tone is used to set the tone level of analog monitor 
tone.

5. For all mixed mode ASTRO systems with hybrid links and Analog
Idle Link Check Enabled (on the CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION
screen), the Status Tone is used to set the level of the analog
link maintenance tone.  The level setting is expressed  in  dBm's. 
It is an absolute level and is not referenced in this case to peak 
audio level.



*do_txwi,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:TX WIRELINE HELP

The TX Wireline Alignment screen displayed is dependent on the value of
the Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen.

Procedure:

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

Supply a 1 KHz tone at the desired reference level to the station. The
station will accept the incoming signal and will reproduce it at 60% rated
system deviation.

For example, on channels with 5 kHz max deviation, a 1 kHz tone
at 0 dbm on the wireline will result in 3 kHz Tx deviation.

In a 2 or 4 wire station:
Once signal is applied, press F4 to calibrate the station to this level.  
The Tx Wireline and Wireline Squelch Alignments will be  performed.
Wireline Squelch Alignment will still be performed if ALC is Enabled in
the Station's Codeplug.

In a 6 or 8 wire station:
Once signal is applied; for line 1 press F4 to calibrate the station to this
level, for line 3 press F5.   The Tx Wireline and Wireline Squelch
Alignments will be performed.  If ALC is enabled on a line and Wireline 
Squelch is disabled, there will be a warning stating ALC is enabled on that 
line and no attempt should be made to calibrate that line.  This is because 
the calibration is done automatically and should not be done manually.

For TRC systems, when ALC is ENABLED, the station will use High Level Guard
tone as a reference and will automatically adjust the line level based on
the measured HLGT level. HLGT will be referenced so that a signal going
into the station 6 dB below HLGT will be transmitted at 60% of rated channel
deviation as entered into the RSS.

For non HLGT systems such as ASTRO systems, CIT, etc., a fixed level
reference such as HLGT does not exist. Therefore, the installer will supply
a nominal reference level to the station, such as "-6 dBm". The station,
via the Alignment:TX Wireline screen, will be told to accept the signal
on the wireline and reproduce it at 60% rated system deviation. The station
will adjust the wireline circuitry gain to optimize the level at which the
signal is being used internally.

To help verify the station TX Wireline calibration,  stations with 
firmware version R3.01 or later support TX Wireline Keyup (KEYUP) and 
TX Wireline Dekey (DEKEY).  These function keys can be used to keyup and
dekey the station and allow the user to measure the TX Wireline audio
levels under the keyed condition.  Older version stations do not support
this feature.

NOTE: Depending on how 'busy' the station is, a communications error may
sometimes be noted on attempting to SAVE the Tx Wireline setting. This
error is not serious and does not indicate a station problem.  If this
error is observed, try to Save the value again.

NOTE: The station will accept HLGT levels in the 0 to -35 dBm range. Two
modes of operation are defined: Automatic Line Control (ALC) ENABLED or
DISABLED.

1.  If the ALC parameter is set to ENABLED, the operational window for the
    HLGT input to the station can vary from 0 to -35 dBm and the station
    will stay keyed for as long as the LLGT is detected.

2.  If the ALC parameter is set to DISABLED then the operational window for
    HLGT and LLGT is limited to a +6/-2 dB range around the alignment level.

    For example, if a station is aligned to -16 dBm, the expected level for
    HLGT is -10 dBm and the expected level for LLGT is -40 dBm.  If the LLGT
    level falls 2 dB below the expected level, the station will lose
    detection of LLGT and dekey.

*do_rssi,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RSSI HELP

RSSI alignment is required in all ASTRO systems. Currently it is not used 
in non-ASTRO systems. The alignment process requires that a calibrated 
signal generator be attached to the station's receiver. The generator is
used to provide the reference RF input level for the calibration.

Stations may be configured with one or two receivers. If a station has two 
receivers, then both receivers must be aligned separately. Only
conventional stations are capable of having two receivers. All trunking 
stations (both Intellirepeater and 6809 Trunking), have only one receiver.

NOTE:

1 - The RSSI setting applies to all channels programmed on each
    receiver. Since RSSI operation is bandwidth dependent, all the
    channels on each receiver must have the same bandwidth.

2 - The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
    alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may 
    occur due to normal station activity.

3 - Once alignments are complete, remember to reset the station before
    returning it to normal operation.

CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE FIRST RECEIVER

1 - If two receivers are present, press F3 to set the current channel in 
    the station to a channel with an active Receiver 1, Otherwise proceed
    to step 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the first receiver's input. For 
    maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - The RSS provides a default setting of -90 dBm as a point at which to 
    perform the RSSI alignment. The user is given the option of changing 
    the alignment point. Set the signal generator to -90 dBm or whatever
    other level the user has selected; just make sure that the signal 
    generator level and the level on the RSS screen match. Also set the 
    generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press the F8 Calibrate key, this action starts the calibration process. 
    A wait message will flash while the station is calibrating. When 
    completed, 'Calibration Complete' will appear in the status window.
5 - Calibration is complete. The value saved will apply to any channel 
    which uses Receiver 1. 

CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE SECOND RECEIVER 
(2 Receiver Conventional Stations Only)

1 - Press F5 to set the current channel in the station to a channel with 
    an active Receiver 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the second receiver's input. For 
    maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - The RSS provides a default setting of -90 dBm as a point at which to 
    perform the RSSI alignment. The user is given the option of changing 
    the alignment point. Set the signal generator to -90 dBm or whatever 
    other level the user has selected; just make sure that the signal 
    generator level and the level on the RSS screen match. Also set the 
    generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press the F8 Calibrate key, this action starts the calibration process. 
    A wait message will flash while the station is calibrating. When 
    completed, 'Calibration Complete' will appear in the status window.
5 - Calibration is complete. The value saved will apply to any channel 
    which uses Receiver 2.

*do_station_pend,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

NOTE:  You must exit the Reference Oscillator screen with the
station communication still intact or else the gating may no longer
be correct until the station is reset.

NOTE:  For Astro-TAC Receivers and Quantar Satellite Receivers, a power
amplifier module does not exist, so you will not be able to key and
dekey the station.  You can only use method 2 (listed below) to align
these station types.

Station output power is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150W.  For
higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W.  This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.

Alignment procedure for INTERNAL - STANDARD:

The user can align the Internal Standard according to either of the
following procedures.

Method 1:

1)  Connect a Communications system analyzer to the transmit output port
of the station. (Make sure proper termination is applied).  Set the Comm
analyzer to Monitor mode and enter the station's transmit frequency.

Key up the station by pressing F7, and measure the transmit frequency
error.  The error is typically displayed as a + or - number.

NOTE:  The INTERNAL STANDARD reference oscillator is designed to
automatically self-compensate for temperature drifts.  When the
compensation occurs, the measured transmit frequency will appear to 'hop'
up or down by as much as 1/2 ppm.  For example, a 150 MHz station could
'hop' approximately 75 Hz.  It is recommended that after first keying the
station the service technician should wait at least 30 seconds for the
system to stabilize BEFORE adjusting the oscillator from the RSS Alignment
screen.  The frequency 'hopping' will not be observable on the alignment
screen bar graph setting.

To fine adjust the frequency, press the Up or Down Arrows to move the
oscillator in individual steps.  To coarse adjust the frequency, press the
Page Up or Down keys to move the oscillator in 10 step jumps.

Use the Up/Down Arrows and or the PgUp/Down keys to adjust the INTERNAL
STANDARD reference oscillator until the transmit frequency error is as
small as possible; usually less than 50 Hz.  Dekey the station (F9), then
press F8 to store the desired reference oscillator frequency.

NOTE:  This method of alignment will provide a station transmit frequency
which is as accurate as the stability of the Comm analyzer.  For example,
if the Comm analyzer is accurate to 1 ppm, then the station will be
accurate to 1 ppm, even though the frequency error was adjusted to zero.

Method 2   (AutoNet feature):

If a stable 5MHz or 10MHz signal is available to the technician then the
station's Auto-Net 5 or Auto-Net 10 feature can be invoked.  The technician
should connect the high stability signal to the Reference Input Connector
(this BNC input is located on either the front of the station or on the
back plane of the station), or insert the INTERNAL HSO/UHSO into the
appropriate slot.

The technician should then select the appropriate Auto-Net function key
(F3 or F4).  The station will automatically align the INTERNAL STANDARD to
the input source.  The time required to successfully Auto-net depends upon
the frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high
stability reference.  During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON  LED
will flash and the receiver and exciter will indicate an OUT OF LOCK
condition.  When Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an
appropriate message.  The technician can then exit from this screen.

NOTE:  This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the highest
accuracy possible.   Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD is from
the high stability source,  the time required for netting could be
significantly greater than this minimum period.

Alignment procedure for EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ or EXTERNAL - 10 MHZ

When the station is configured for an external reference, it is still
necessary to adjust the INTERNAL STANDARD reference in order to ensure
optimal station performance over time.  Therefore, when utilizing an
external reference the alignment procedure should be as follows:

The technician should connect the high stability signal to the Reference
Input Connector (this BNC input is located on either the front of the
station or on the back plane of the station).  The technician should then
select the appropriate Auto-Net function key (F3 or F4 depending upon the
frequency of the reference signal).  The station will automatically align
the INTERNAL STANDARD to the input source.

NOTE:  The time required to successfully Auto-net depends upon the
frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high stability
reference.   This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the
highest accuracy possible.  Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD
is from the high stability source,  the time required for netting could
be significantly greater than this minimum period.

During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON LED will flash and the
receiver and exciter will indicate an OUT OF LOCK condition.  When
Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an appropriate
message.

The technician should then adjust the external high stability reference
according to the manufacturer's recommendations.  Function keys F7 and F9
allow the technician to key/dekey the station to measure the transmit
frequency error.  Once the external reference has been adjusted, the user
can exit from this screen.

*do_otac_pend,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HELP

Alignment procedure for INTERNAL - STANDARD:

If a stable 5MHz or 10MHz signal is available to the technician then the
comparator's Auto-Net 5 or Auto-Net 10 feature can be invoked.  The technician
should connect the high stability signal to the Reference Input Connector
(this BNC input is located on either the front of the comparator or on the
back plane of the comparator).

The technician should then select the appropriate Auto-Net function key
(F3 or F4).  The comparator will automatically align the INTERNAL STANDARD
to the input source.  The time required to successfully Auto-net depends
upon the frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high
stability reference.  During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON  LED
will flash.  When Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an
appropriate message.  The technician can then exit from this screen.

NOTE:  This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the highest
accuracy possible.   Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD is from
the high stability source,  the time required for netting could be
significantly greater than this minimum period.

*do_pwr3,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:POWER OUT HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity. Also, make certain that the station is not
currently keyed via the local PTT (station front panel keyup).  If the
Power Out alignment is attempted with the local PTT active,  the station
local PTT will have to be removed and the station reset before attempting
the Power Out alignment.

If the station is being converted from Conventional operation to either
Intellirepeater or 6809 Trunking operation,  and an internal wattmeter is
present,  the station must be Power Output aligned to ensure proper oper-
ation.

Power Output Alignment Wattmeter Connection:

For Quantar stations, the wattmeter must be connected to the PA output
which is found on the front of the station.

For Quantro stations, the wattmeter must be connected at the output of
the Low Pass Filter.

Connecting to any other point may result in improper level setting of the
PA which in turn will reduce the PA's long term reliability. Connection
to the designated point requires disconnecting the existing cable and
connecting the wattmeter cable. It is preferred that the cable used to
connect to the Wattmeter be of high quality. High loss cables will
result in improper level setting for the PA.

The DESIRED POWER OUT field initially shows the PA Max Power Level, as
selected at the Hardware Configuration screen. The legal range for the
DESIRED POWER field varies per Band.   For reference, the legal ranges
are shown below:


QUANTAR/DSS-III STATIONS:
(DSS-III not available in VHF)

 Station     Station   Displayed     Alignment  Desired Pwr   Desired Pwr
Band/Range   Pwr Lvl.  Field Choice    Level    Lower Limit   Upper Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
VHF R1,R2      25 W        25 W         25 W         5 W          30 W
VHF R1,R2     125 W       125 W        125 W        20 W         135 W

UHF R1,R2      25 W        25 W         25 W         5 W          30 W
UHF R1,R2,R3  110 W       110 W        110 W        20 W         120 W
UHF R4        100 W       100 W        100 W        20 W         110 W

800 MHz        20 W        20 W         20 W         5 W          22 W
800 MHz       100 W       100 W        100 W        20 W         110 W
900 MHz       100 W       100 W        100 W        20 W         110 W


QUANTRO STATIONS:

 Station     Station   Displayed     Alignment  Desired Pwr   Desired Pwr
Band/Range   Pwr Lvl.  Field Choice    Level    Lower Limit   Upper Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
VHF R1,R2     350 W    350 W/No Circ   350 W       170 W         375 W

UHF R1,2,3,4    6 W      6 W/ 1 Circ     6 W         1 W           7 W
UHF R1,2,3,4    4 W      6 W/ 3 Circ     4 W         1 W           5 W
UHF R1,2,3,4   40 W     40 W/ 1 Circ    40 W        15 W          45 W
UHF R1,2,3,4   31 W     40 W/ 3 Circ    31 W        10 W          35 W
UHF R1,2,3,4  100 W    100 W/ 1 Circ   100 W        50 W         110 W
UHF R1,2,3,4   80 W    100 W/ 3 Circ    80 W        40 W          85 W
UHF R1,2,3,4  110 W    110 W/ 1 Circ   110 W        50 W         120 W
UHF R1,2,3,4   80 W    110 W/ 3 Circ    80 W        35 W          90 W
UHF R1,2,3,4  225 W    225 W/ 1 Circ   225 W       105 W         245 W
UHF R1,2,3,4  170 W    225 W/ 3 Circ   170 W        80 W         185 W

800 QUANTRO    35 W     35 W/ 1 Circ    35 W        15 W          40 W
800 QUANTRO    30 W     35 W/ 3 Circ    30 W        12 W          35 W
800 QUANTRO    75 W     75 W/ 1 Circ    75 W        35 W          85 W
800 QUANTRO    65 W     75 W/ 3 Circ    65 W        30 W          75 W
800 QUANTRO   150 W    150 W/ 1 Circ   150 W        70 W         165 W
800 QUANTRO   130 W    150 W/ 3 Circ   130 W        60 W         140 W
900 QUANTRO   150 W    150 W/ 1 Circ   150 W        70 W         165 W
900 QUANTRO   150 W    150 W/ 3 Circ   130 W        60 W         140 W

Quantro Stations may be ordered with Single or Triple Circulators.
The station's codeplug comes configured for the circulatorthat was
ordered with the station. The presence of the circulator is reflected
in the PA Power Rating field description. If circulators are field
installed, the user needs to make sure that the description reflects
the exact configuration of the station. Improper setting of this field
can result in improper operation of the PA which can degrade the
reliability of the PA and the user may not be able to perform the
power output alignment.

The maximum for Actual Power is 999 W (An external Wattmeter will read
whatever the actual maximum for this measurement is).

NOTE:  Stations that have the Limited Power Output option have the upper
range limited by that option (or the normal legal limit, whichever is lower).

Detailed Procedure:

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

1) Connect an external RF Wattmeter to the station Tx port.
2) Press F6 to key up the station on the current channel Tx frequency.
3) Observe the Wattmeter display, and enter the observed value into the
   'Power Read on Wattmeter' field on the Alignment:Power Out screen.
4) Press F7 to adjust the power out of the station. The station has
   completed the adjustment when the 'Station is keyed' message is again 
   displayed.
5) Check the output power on the wattmeter. If the output power is at the
   Desired Power Output level, then proceed with step 6. If the station
   is not at the Desired Power Output level, then go back to step 3.
6) Press F8 to Save the Value in the station's non volatile memory.
   The RSS will display a 'Please Wait...' message while the station is
   saving the power output value. For High Power Quantro stations, the final
   adjustment will key the station up and down five times at five different
   frequencies over the whole band of the station.
7) Press F10 to exit to the Alignment Menu. The RSS will automatically
   dekey the station when the screen is exited.
8) Using either the RSS Status Panel or the station's Front Panel, reset the
   station to activate the updated alignment settings.

THE STATION MUST BE RESET IN ORDER FOR THE SAVED PARAMETERS TO BE UTILIZED.

NOTE 1:
If a PA failure occurred during the adjustment, as indicated by the PA FAIL 
LED on the front of the station, press the PA INIT Function key (F4) to 
restore operating parameters. This action will initialize the operating 
parameters of the PA to a predetermined level. The PA FAIL light will 
go off assuming that all hardware is good. If the PA INIT function was 
not able to place the PA in its initial operating state, a possible 
problem with the hardware exists and the PA fail light will not go off.

There are two cases which require special attention:

Case 1. There may be the possibility that the PA INIT function will not
work. This will be evident to the user when the alignment sequence is
attempted and either the correct power output will not be attained or the
SAVE function will not complete successfully.  If this should happen, exit
the alignment screen and reset the station.  The station can be reset by
pressing the buttons on the front of the station.  After the station is
reset, reenter the alignment screen and then press the PA INIT Function
key (F4) to restore operating parameters.  If the alignment still cannot
be performed after this sequence, then a hardware malfunction exists.
Pursue correction of the hardware before attempting power output alignment.

Case 2. There may be the possibility that a misadjusted Reference
Modulation alignment interferes with Power Output alignment. The result is
that during the SAVE sequence, a PA Fail condition results and an error
message will be displayed by the RSS.  To correct this situation, first go
to the Power Output Alignment screen and press the PA INIT Function key
(F4) to restore nominal operating parameters.  Exit the screen and then go
to the Reference Modulation screen.  Perform Reference Modulation alignment
and SAVE it.  If the PA will not key up properly during this adjustment
and a PA FAIL condition results, there's a hardware problem which needs
correction.  After the Reference Modulation is completed, return to the
Power Output Alignment screen and perform Power Output alignment.

*launch_time_help,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:ASTRO ALIGNMENT AND TEST HELP

This screen allows you to perform ASTRO Launch Time Offset calibration
and allows you to put the station in V.52 transmit mode.


*tdata_deviation_help,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:TDATA DEVIATION HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

Make certain that the Tx Deviation alignment is done before the TDATA
alignment is attempted.

Connect the 6809 Central's TDATA output to the Base Stations TDATA input.
Place the 6809 Central in a mode such that Low Speed Signaling is being
routed on the TDATA line and not control channel signaling.

When the station is access disabled, the 6809 Trunking Central will route
low speed data to the station via the control cable connected. With an
operational 6809 Trunking Central connected, press F8 to Calibrate the
station's TDATA input gain.  This calibration will compensate for any
variations in amplitude of the TDATA input.

Upon completion, press F8 to save value.

*desired_launch_help,A
ASTRO ALIGNMENT AND TEST HELP

ASTRO DEVIATION STANDARDS
=========================

                          ASTRO Deviation                         
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
|         SIGNAL               |  Minimum   |   Nominal  |  Maximum   |
|                              |  Deviation |  Deviation |  Deviation |
=======================================================================
| Low Signal Deviation         |  0.84 kHz  |  0.93 kHz  |  1.02 kHz  |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Low Signal Wide Pulse        |            |  1.00 kHz  |            |
| Deviation                    |            |            |            |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Standard  Deviation          |  2.55 kHz  |  2.83 kHz  |  3.11 kHz  |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Standard Wide Pulse          |            |  3.00 kHz  |            |
| Deviation                    |            |            |            |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| V.52 Deviation               |  2.91 kHz  |  3.23 kHz  |  3.55 kHz  |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| V.52 Wide Pulse Deviation    |            |  3.00 kHz  |            |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| C4FM Deviation               |  2.91 kHz  |  3.23 kHz  |  3.55 kHz  |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| C4FM Wide Pulse              |            |  3.00 kHz  |            |
| Deviation                    |            |            |            |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| GPS Test Pattern -           |            |  3.00 kHz  |            |
| Simulcast                    |            |            |            |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| ASTRO Voice                  |  3.24 kHz  |  3.60 kHz  |  3.96 kHz  |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| ASTRO Wide Pulse             |            |  3.00 kHz  |            |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+


LAUNCH TIME OFFSET CALIBRATION
==============================

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may 
occur due to normal station activity.

This time offset permits a finer adjustment of the GPS Simulcast Timed 
Launch than can be provided by the 20 microseconds granularity of the 
comparator generated launch timestamp. The Stations at one transmitter 
site can be given a different offset value than the Stations at other 
transmitter sites in order to finely skew the synchronization of the 
launch from each site. The new effect will be to modify the simulcast 
coverage performance in overlap areas.

Launch Time Offset can also be used to compensate for different GPS 1 
PPS and transmitter antenna cable lengths and combining delays.

The range is: 0 - 975.2 microseconds.

Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the 
station to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W.  
For higher power stations,  power output is reduced to 100 W.  This is 
true for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, 
which is performed at full power.

GPS Simulcast is only applicable to a station operating on a simulcast 
channel utilizing an ASTRO-TAC simulcast controller/comparator. This 
alignment is not applicable for a delay-line based simulcast channel 
such as those employing a Digital Simulcast Modem (DSM) and Universal 
Simulcast Controller.

On GPS Simulcast channels, time stamps are attached to the digital
information which is to be simulcasted, and these time stamps are used 
to launch the station transmission in synchronization with the stations 
on the common channel at the other simulcasting sites. This alignment 
screen can be used to specify a very fine offset time (60 ns resolution) 
for the simulcast launch event that can be used to slightly alter the 
simulcast coverage performance in overlap areas. This fine offset time 
is added by the station to the coarse launch time (20 microseconds 
resolution) received from the ASTRO-TAC in order to specify the actual 
launch event time.

Upon entering this screen, the RSS displays the current launch offset 
time and a field for entering a new DESIRED LAUNCH OFFSET value. After 
modifying the desired launch offset value, the screen should be exited 
and the station reset in order to activate the new launch offset. This 
alignment is not mandatory, since the station will default to a 
zero-valued offset time. A special simulcast test pattern modulation can 
also be initiated from this screen and can be used to verify that the 
station can successfully simulcast launch. To run this test, the station 
transmitter output should be attached to a communication service 
monitor, with the recovered modulation wave form viewed on the service 
monitor display. The service monitor scope should be triggered by the 1 
pulse per second (PPS) output from the GPS receiver. If the station is 
able to properly simulcast, the zero crossing, observed in the recovered 
modulation, which occurs prior to the consecutive +3 symbol, should be 
delayed from the scope's trigger point precisely by the current launch 
offset time value.



DIGITAL TRANSMITTER TEST MODE SELECTION 
=======================================

NOTES:

1) The SIMUL TEST tone is not defined by Project 25. It is provided on 
this screen to perform ASTRO Launch Time Offset Calibration. This tone is 
initiated by depressing F6 function key and is terminated by exiting the 
ASTRO Alignment and Test screen.

2) The following test tones are defined by Project 25 and are initiated by 
depressing the appropriate function key and are terminated by depressing 
the TONE OFF function key. They are not terminated when leaving the RSS 
screen. The user can switch between the four Test Tone patterns without 
having to first turn them off.

The tones are:

a)V.52 is an industry-standard test pattern that is used to perform bit 
error rate (BER) measurements and coverage testing in digital systems. 
b) Standard Transmitter Symbol Rate (STD_DEV)
c) Standard Transmitter Low Deviation (LOW_DEV) and 
d) Standard Transmitter C4FM Modulation (C4FM) 

These test tone patterns are compliant with TIA document IS-102.CAAA 
Transceiver Measurement methods.

The STD_DEV, LOW_DEV and C4FM test patterns can only be turned on via 
this RSS. They can be transmitted by a Simulcast station, although the 
signal will not be synchronized with the 1PPS signal.

V.52 is the only test pattern that can be initiated either from the 
comparator or the RSS. The only way to simulcast launch the V.52 signal 
is via a comparator command. When the V.52 test pattern is initiated 
from the RSS, the pattern will not be synchronized with the 1PPS signal.

Since these tones are provided as test tones they can only be initiated 
when the station is in access disabled mode. V.52 presents a special case 
since it can be initiated from two different sources. Thus V.52 can only 
be started from the RSS while the station is access disabled but it can 
only be started remotely by the comparator when the station is access 
enabled.

NOTE:
1 - Beginning with Release 9.4, the Quantar station provides Project 25 
    compliant tone generation capability and Bit Error Rate Calculation.

2 - For earlier releases of the station software some of the capabilities 
    provided with Release 9.4 may have been available but may have 
    operated in a slightly different manner. For example:

    a.  The station might not have to be in the access disable mode to 
        transmit the test tones defined in Project 25.

    b.  For a simulcast station, the option of turning on any of the 
        above test tones via the RSS might not have been available. If 
        the user attempts to turn any of those tones on on a station 
        with a release earlier than Release 9.4, this version of RSS 
        may display that the selected test tone is on but the station 
        will not be transmitting.


*do_ber,A
Bit Error Rate Reporting (BER) Help 

The BER Detector reports the  Bit Error Rate (BER) for either the 
V.52 test pattern or the Project 25 Standard Test Tone Pattern for 
the station's receiver. Project 25 uses the V.52 pattern as the Standard 
Transmitter Test Pattern and the Standard Interference Test Pattern. A 
Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is displayed along with the BER
information. The RSSI display shows the received signal's absolute 
value in dBm and the received signal's level above the receiver's noise 
floor in dB. The accuracy depends on the accurate RSSI alignment. The 
RSS continuously updates the RSSI and BER values once a second until 
terminated by the user. The displayed value represents the average of 5 
data samples taken at 200 millisecond intervals. This procedure is 
compliant with Telecommunications Industry  Association, TIA, Document 
IS-102.CAAA which covers the Project 25 BER requirements.

If you receive a popup error stating that a required task has not 
responded, it most likely means that you have not set up the test 
properly. Exit the report screen and follow the setup procedure before 
re-entering the report screen.

The procedure for running these reports is:
 -  Apply the desired test signal to the receiver of the station
 -  Hit the corresponding function key to start the BER test



*do_txgn,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:TX DEVIATION GAIN ADJUST HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

Make certain the Power Output Alignment has been successfully performed
and the station has been reset BEFORE attempting the Tx Deviation
Alignment to prevent any possible damage to your test equipment due to
incorrect Power Output alignments.

The minimum for the first frequency field and third frequency field
is 1.82 kHz. The minimum values for the second frequency field and fourth
frequency field depend on the values entered in the first and third fields
respectively. The maximum frequency for all four fields is 10.00 kHz.

Note that the third and fourth frequency fields will not be displayed if
the PA frequency is 900 MHz.

Procedure:

1) Connect a Communication Analyzer to the Tx port of the station.
Set the Communication Analyzer to read deviation.

WARNING:  The Communication Analyzer is limited to 125 watts of input
power and an external load may be required to limit the power into the
comm analyzer). Make sure that the communication  analyzer (R2000 series)
is set to Wideband mode for these measurements! The comm analyzer is set
to narrow band mode for all other measurements.

2) Press F2 to keyup the station on test frequency #1.
Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the Communication Analyzer,
and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value (or the higher of two
values if a + and - value are displayed) into the '1st Frequency Deviation'
field.

3) Press F3 to keyup the station on test frequency #2.
Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the Communication Analyzer,
and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value (or the higher of two
values if a + and - value are displayed) into the '2nd Frequency Deviation'
field. Note that for proper operation, the frequency entered here MUST be
greater than or equal to 90% of the value entered for Frequency #1 or
1.820 kHz (whichever is greater).

4) If the PA frequency is not 900 MHz, press F4 to keyup the station on test
frequency #3.  Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display.  Observe the
Communication Analyzer, and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value
(or the higher of two values if a + and - value are displayed) into the
'3rd Frequency Deviation' field.

5) If the PA frequency is not 900 MHz, press F5 to keyup the station on test
frequency #4.  Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the
Communication Analyzer, and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value
(or the higher of two values if a + and - value are displayed) into the
'4th Frequency Deviation' field. Note that for proper operation, the
frequency entered here MUST be greater than or equal to 90% of the value
entered for Frequency #3 or 1.820 kHz (whichever is greater).

6) Once all values have been entered, press F8 to save these values to the
   station.

7) Press F9 to dekey the station.

8) Press F10 to exit to the Service:Alignment screen.

Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W.  For
higher power stations,  power output is reduced to 100 W.  This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.

*do_refm,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:REFERENCE MODULATION COMPENSATION HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

NOTE ALSO:  This alignment should be performed whenever change has been 
made to the SIMULCAST field on the Hardware Configuration screen.

Make certain the Power Output Alignment has been successfully performed
and the station has been reset BEFORE attempting the Reference Modulation
Compensation Alignment to prevent any possible damage to your test
equipment due to incorrect Power Output alignments.

This procedure should be done for each REF MOD alignment in the station.
When executing, the station will internally modulate the transmit RF
signal with a 10 Hz +/- 10% square wave.

NOTE: If the PA frequency is set to 900 MHz or the station is Simulcast
but not mixed mode Analog and ASTRO Simulcast, REF MOD2 will not be
required.

NOTE: The Save key (F8) will only save the currently keyed REF MOD setting.
The procedure MUST be followed exactly!

NOTE: Adjust the scope to be able to adequately view the waveform
during the alignment.

Procedure:

1) Connect a Communication analyzer to the station as shown in the manual
and set it to view the modulation.

2) Press F6 to key up the station on the FIRST REF MOD alignment.

3) Observe the recovered audio signal on the oscilloscope. Adjust the
shape of the recovered audio signal by pressing the Up Down Arrow keys
until the observed square wave's horizontal portions are as near a straight
line as possible. A sloped straight line is acceptable. The oscilloscope
must be in DC coupled mode.

4) Press F8 to save this adjustment to the station.

5) Press F7 to key up the station on the SECOND REF MOD alignment (if
   applicable).

NOTE: The next 2 steps only apply if REF MOD2 alignment is required.

6) Observe the recovered audio signal on the oscilloscope. Adjust the
shape of the recovered audio signal by pressing the Up Down Arrow keys
until the observed square wave's horizontal portions are as near a straight
line as possible. A sloped straight line is acceptable.

7) Press F8 to save this adjustment to the station.

8) Once saved, press F9 to dekey the station.

9) Press F10 to exit to the Service:Alignment screen.

Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W.  For
higher power stations,  power output is reduced to 100 W.  This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.


*do_sque,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:SQUELCH ADJUST HELP

SQUELCH alignment is required in all stations which process analog voice. 
It is not required for ASTRO digital only stations. The alignment process 
requires that a calibrated signal generator be attached to the station's 
receiver. 

Stations may be configured with one or two receivers. If a station has two 
receivers, then both receivers must be aligned separately. Only 
conventional stations are capable of having two receivers. All trunking 
stations (both Intellirepeater and 6809 Trunking), have only one receiver.

NOTE:  
1 - The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any 
    alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may 
    occur due to normal station activity.
2 - The Squelch setting applies to all channels programmed on each
    receiver. 
3 - Since Squelch operation is bandwidth dependent, all the
    channels on each receiver must have the same bandwidth.

CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE FIRST RECEIVER

1 - If two receivers are present, press F3 to set the current channel 
    in the station to a channel with an active Receiver 1 otherwise 
    proceed to step 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the first receiver's input. For 
    maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - An unmodulated RF carrier is required to properly perform the squelch 
    alignment. The level of the RF carrier normally corresponds to the RF 
    level which  produces 12 dB SINAD or 20 db Quieting. It is left to the 
    user discretion to select the RF level at which squelch is set. Also 
    set the generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press F2 to set the squelch fully open.
5 - Press the 'PgUp' key repeatedly until the squelch closes.
    Wait at least ONE second between each 'PgUp' keystroke to determine
    squelch closing.
6 - Press the 'PgDn' key repeatedly until the squelch opens.
    Wait at least FIVE seconds between each 'PgDn' keystroke to determine
    squelch opening.
7 - Press F8 to save the squelch setting to the station.
8 - Calibration for Receiver 1 is complete.

CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE SECOND RECEIVER 
(2 Receiver Conventional Stations Only)

1 - Press F5 to set the current channel in the station to a channel with 
    an active Receiver 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the second receiver's input. For 
    maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - An unmodulated RF carrier is required to properly perform the squelch 
    alignment. The level of the RF carrier normally corresponds to the RF 
    level which produces 12 dB SINAD or 20 db Quieting. It is left to the 
    user discretion to select the RF level at which squelch is set. Also 
    set the generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press F2 to set the squelch fully open.
5 - Press the 'PgUp' key repeatedly until the squelch closes.
    Wait at least ONE second between each 'PgUp' keystroke to determine
    squelch closing.
6 - Press the 'PgDn' key repeatedly until the squelch opens.
    Wait at least FIVE seconds between each 'PgDn' keystroke to determine
    squelch opening.
7 - Press F8 to save the squelch setting to the station.
8 - Calibration for Receiver 2 is complete.

OPERATIONAL NOTES:
For all stations with firmware version Rel 3.1 and later:

The Function key F7 is used to force the station's receiver qualifiers
to the speaker and Wireline to be CSQ.  The speaker output or Wireline
may then be used to monitor squelch opening and closing. The Function
key F6 is used to restore the receiver qualifiers to their original,
codeplug programmed state.

For all stations with firmware version  Rel 3.0 and earlier:

The front panel CSQ/PL/OFF switch can be used to force the station's
receiver qualifiers to the speaker to be CSQ. The speaker output may
then be used to monitor squelch opening and closing. The Rx Active LED
or the Rx Wireline output can only be used if the current receiver
channel qualifiers are set to CSQ in the codeplug.

*battery_equ_help,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:BATTERY EQUALIZATION HELP

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

QUANTAR/DSS-III/QUANTAR DATA BASE STATIONS ONLY
===============================================
In order to maintain proper charge and capacity, some batteries require
periodic equalization. The function keys F4 and F6 allow the user to turn
equalization ON and OFF.

When equalization is turned ON, the station will equalize for a period
of time and then it will turn equalization OFF. The user is given the
capability to turn OFF equalization overriding the timer established in
the station. The timer is dependent on the type of battery selected.

Lead Acid Non-Linear : Not Equalized
Lead Acid Linear     : 72 Hours
NICAD                : 48 Hours

QUANTRO Stations Only
=====================
For QUANTRO stations, equalize batteries by flipping FLOAT/EQUALIZE switch
on station power supply to equalize and manually time the battery
equalization process.

*otac_bateq_help,A
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:BATTERY EQUALIZATION HELP

In order to maintain proper charge and capacity, some batteries require
periodic equalization. The function keys F4 and F6 allow the user to turn
equalization ON and OFF.

When equalization is turned ON, the comparator will equalize for a period
of time and then it will turn equalization OFF. The user is given the
capability to turn OFF equalization overriding the timer established in
the comparator. The timer is dependent on the type of battery selected.

Lead Acid Non-Linear : Not Equalized
Lead Acid Linear     : 72 Hours
NICAD                : 48 Hours

*cutback,A
CUTBACK HELP

Cutback voltage for a given battery type.

*serial_number,A
SERIAL NUMBER HELP

The SERIAL NUMBER is the current assigned serial number of the station.
This number should match the back plane serial number. Initially this
field will indicate the number downloaded from the station or codeplug.

The Serial Number may be changed by the user; However, make sure that
the serial number always matches the current station serial number.
Otherwise, upon pressing F8 (Validate Config), the RSS will report
a serial number mismatch.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration,
the RSS must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key
is pressed.

*station_name,A
STATION NAME HELP

The STATION NAME field allows the user to identify a station with a
name up to 21 alphanumeric characters in length and contain no embedded
spaces.

*rx_freq_band,A
RX FREQ BAND 1 HELP

The Rx Frequency Band 1 can be toggled through all currently available
frequency bands. Valid toggle choices are:  UHF Range 1, UHF Range 2,
UHF Range 3, UHF Range 4, VHF Range 1, VHF Range 2, 800 MHz, 900 MHz,
and None.

If changed, the selected RX FREQ BAND 1 may be verified with the station
by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the station
configuration will be reported by the RSS.

If the choice of receiver is NONE, the station will function as a transmit
only station provided that a valid band is selected for the Exciter. This
choice is typically used for paging station applications.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station.
The hardware validation will check that the displayed Rx Freq Band 1 matches
the station hardware. The remaining displayed fields on the screen will be
validated against the codeplug currently programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

*rx_freq_band2,A
RX FREQ BAND 2 HELP

The Rx Frequency Band 2 can be toggled through all currently available
frequency bands. Valid toggle choices are:  UHF Range 1, UHF Range 2,
UHF Range 3, UHF Range 4, VHF Range 1, VHF Range 2, 800 MHz, 900 MHz,
and None.

If changed, the selected RX FREQ BAND 2 may be verified with the station
by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the station
configuration will be reported by the RSS.

If the choice of receiver is NONE, the station will function as a transmit
only station provided that a valid band is selected for the Exciter. This
choice is typically used for paging station applications.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station.
The hardware validation will check that the displayed Rx Freq Band 2 matches
the station hardware. The remaining displayed fields on the screen will be
validated against the codeplug currently programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

*PA_freq_band,A
TX FREQ BAND HELP

The Tx Frequency Band can be toggled through all currently available
frequency bands. Valid toggle choices are:  UHF Range 1, UHF Range 2, 
UHF Range 3, UHF Range 4, VHF Range 1, VHF Range 2, 800 MHz, 900 MHz,
and None.

If None is selected, then the PA Power Rating field will be set to 0
and become non-editable.

If the choice of Tx Band is NONE, the station will function as a receive
only station provided that a valid band is selected for the Receiver. This
application is more commonly known as a satellite receiver configuration.
                                                                         
If changed, the displayed Tx Freq Band may be verified with the
station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station. 
The hardware validation will check that the displayed Tx Frequency
Band and the PA Type match the station hardware. The remaining displayed
fields on the screen will be validated against the codeplug currently
programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

*hw_platform_help,A
HARDWARE PLATFORM HELP

The HARDWARE PLATFORM can be toggled between  QUANTRO, QUANTAR,
QUANTAR SATELLITE RECEIVER, ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER.  If changed, the selected
HARDWARE PLATFORM may be verified with the station by pressing the
F8 (Validate Config) key.  Any mismatch with the hardware configuration
will be reported by the RSS.

When the selected Hardware Platform is QUANTRO, note that the Power Supply
field will also be set to QUANTRO,  and the Battery field will be
set to NONE. The Power Supply field is not editable in Quantro stations.

When the selected Hardware Platform is ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER, the Power Supply
field will be set to AC LOW, and the Battery field will be set to
NONE.

Prior to Release 05.01.00 RSS, the HARDWARE PLATFORM field did not exist.
Instead, the user selected the Hardware Platform indirectly by setting
the PA TYPE field and the PA/EXCITER FREQUENCY BAND fields.  The HARDWARE
PLATFORM field more clearly identifies the hardware choices that exist.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):
The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station.
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the Hardware Platform match the station hardware. The remaining
displayed fields on the screen will be validated against the codeplug
currently programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

NOTE: If the Exciter choice is set to NONE in the currently loaded and
in-use code plug, validation will not work correctly.  When the Exciter
is set to NONE, the station control module does not communicate with the
Exciter and thus the Exciter ID and the PA ID are not available for
validation.

NOTE: The code plug becomes "in-use" after the code plug is loaded to the
station and the station is reset.

*pa_licensed,A
PA POWER RATING HELP

PA POWER RATING is dependent upon the selected PA/EXCITER FREQ BAND
and the PA TYPE according to the following table:

QUANTAR/DSS-III STATIONS:
(DSS-III not available in VHF)

 Station     Station   Displayed     Alignment  Desired Pwr   Desired Pwr
Band/Range   Pwr Lvl.  Field Choice    Level    Lower Limit   Upper Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
VHF R1,R2      25 W        25 W         25 W         5 W          30 W
VHF R1,R2     125 W       125 W        125 W        20 W         135 W

UHF R1,R2      25 W        25 W         25 W         5 W          30 W
UHF R1,R2,R3  110 W       110 W        110 W        20 W         120 W
UHF R4        100 W       100 W        100 W        20 W         110 W

800 MHz        20 W        20 W         20 W         5 W          22 W
800 MHz       100 W       100 W        100 W        20 W         110 W
900 MHz       100 W       100 W        100 W        20 W         110 W


QUANTRO STATIONS:

 Station     Station    Displayed    Alignment  Desired Pwr   Desired Pwr
Band/Range   Pwr Lvl.  Field Choice    Level    Lower Limit   Upper Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
VHF R1,R2     350 W    350 W/No Circ   350 W       170 W         375 W

UHF R1,2        6 W      6 W/ 1 Circ     6 W         1 W           7 W
UHF R1,2        4 W      6 W/ 3 Circ     4 W         1 W           5 W
UHF R1,2       40 W     40 W/ 1 Circ    40 W        15 W          45 W
UHF R1,2       31 W     40 W/ 3 Circ    31 W        10 W          35 W
UHF R4        100 W    100 W/ 1 Circ   100 W        50 W         110 W
UHF R4         80 W    100 W/ 3 Circ    80 W        40 W          85 W
UHF R1,2,3    110 W    110 W/ 1 Circ   110 W        50 W         120 W
UHF R1,2,3     80 W    110 W/ 3 Circ    80 W        35 W          90 W
UHF R1,2      225 W    225 W/ 1 Circ   225 W       105 W         245 W
UHF R1,2      170 W    225 W/ 3 Circ   170 W        80 W         185 W

800 QUANTRO    35 W     35 W/ 1 Circ    35 W        15 W          40 W
800 QUANTRO    30 W     35 W/ 3 Circ    30 W        12 W          35 W
800 QUANTRO    75 W     75 W/ 1 Circ    75 W        35 W          85 W
800 QUANTRO    65 W     75 W/ 3 Circ    65 W        30 W          75 W
800 QUANTRO   150 W    150 W/ 1 Circ   150 W        70 W         165 W
800 QUANTRO   130 W    150 W/ 3 Circ   130 W        60 W         140 W
900 QUANTRO   150 W    150 W/ 1 Circ   150 W        70 W         165 W
900 QUANTRO   150 W    150 W/ 3 Circ   130 W        60 W         140 W

Quantro Stations may be ordered with Single or Triple Circulators.
The station's codeplug comes configured for the circulator that was
ordered with the station. The presence of the circulator is reflected
in the PA Power Rating field description. If circulators are field
installed, the user needs to make sure that the description reflects
the exact configuration of the station. Improper setting of this field
can result in improper operation of the PA which can degrade the
reliability of the PA and the user may not be able to perform the
power output alignment.

If changed, the selected PA POWER RATING may be verified with the
station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station. 
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the PA Type match the station hardware. The remaining displayed
fields on the screen will be validated against the codeplug currently
programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

NOTE:  If the Limited Power Ouptut option is enabled, the actual upper
limit will be determined by this feature and will be displayed next to
the PA Power Rating field.  When aligning the output power, this limit 
will be imposed and you will not be able to align the station with
power greater than this limit, regardless of what is selected in the
choice list.

*wireline,A
WIRELINE HELP

The Wireline may be toggled between 8-Wire, 4-Wire and NONE. Choosing
None will automatically disable the Wireline Operation choices
available at the CHG/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen.

The choice of NONE for this field is used in cases where the station is
configured as a stand-alone repeater. In this configuration, a console
interface is not used.

A wireline board is required for DC Remote, TRC, and WildCard.

If changed, the displayed WIRELINE operation may be verified with the
station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration,
the RSS must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key
is pressed.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station. 
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the HW PLATFORM match the hardware hardware. The remaining fields
displayed on the screen will be validated against the codeplug currently
programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

*power_supply,A
POWER SUPPLY HELP

Quantar/Quantar Satellite Receiver/DSS-III stations only:

The Power Supply may be toggled between AC LOW, AC HIGH, DC LOW, and
DC HIGH.

Power Supply Selections:

AC HIGH - 575 W w/o battery charger   AC LOW - 210 W w/o battery charger
        - 625 W with battery charger         - 265 W with battery charger

DC HIGH - 575 W (21 - 34.5 V or 41 - 72 V Input)     

DC LOW  - 210 W (10.5 - 34.5 V or 41 - 72 V Input)

Once the Power Supply type is changed, the Battery field should also
be inspected.

If changed, the selected POWER SUPPLY TYPE may be verified with the
station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station. 
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the HW PLATFORM match the station hardware. The remaining fields
displayed on the screen will be validated against the codeplug currently
programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

*battery_type,A
BATTERY HELP

For Quantar stations or satellite receivers, the BATTERY field
may be toggled between NONE, LEAD ACID LINEAR, LEAD ACID
NONLINEAR, and NICAD. The station or receiver will utilize the
battery type selected to allow the power supplies' battery
charging circuitry to select the best charging rate for the type
of battery the system is using.

When a battery is selected, the station  will set the
station's transmit output power utilizing the number
programmed in the Battery Backup field, on the Channel
Information Screen, whenever AC power is lost.

For Quantro stations, the BATTERY field may be toggled
between NONE and INSTALLED.  The Quantro station utilizes
this field for selecting the station's transmit output power
from the Battery Backup field whenever AC power is lost.

This field does NOT control the battery charging cicuitry.
Battery charging on a Quantro station is manually set on the
power supply itself.

For high power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the 
PA output power as defined in this field as long as the DC input 
voltage is above 27.5 Volts.  When the DC voltage drops below 
27.5 Volts,  the output power will be derated based upon the input 
DC voltage level, until that level drops to 21 Volts.  At that point, 
the output power will be shut down to protect the batteries.

For low power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output
power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above 
13.8 Volts.  When the DC voltage drops below 13.8 Volts, the output power 
will be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level
drops to 10.5 Volts.  At that point, the output power will be shut down 
to protect the batteries.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):
The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that
the data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the
station hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in
the station. The hardware validation will check that the displayed
PA/Exciter Frequency Band and the HW PLATFORM match the station
hardware. The remaining fields displayed on the screen will be
validated against the codeplug currently programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the
RSS must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is
pressed.

*system_type,A
SYSTEM TYPE HELP

The System Type may be toggled between CONVENTIONAL, TRUNKING (6809
SmartZone), TRUNKING (6809 SMARTNET), INTELLIREPEATER 2.0.3/2.7E,
INTELLIREPEATER 3.0/3.5, DSSIII and QUANTAR DATA BASE STATION.

CONVENTIONAL operation implies either a Base or Conventional Repeater
operation. IntelliRepeater implies a Trunked, system operation.

NOTE: If the station is configured as a 'local channel' (Console and/or
Interconnect interface) in a 6809-SmartZone system this field must be
set to 6809-Smartnet.

If changed, the selected SYSTEM TYPE may be verified with the
station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station. 
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the HW PLATFORM match the station hardware. The remaining fields
displayed on the screen will be validated against the codeplug currently
programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current haradware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

WARNING: When the SYSTEM TYPE is changed, the resulting codeplug will
contain one channel, and any other channel information will be lost.
Other fields throughout the RSS, which are dependent on the SYSTEM TYPE,
may be changed.

NOTE: When changing the Station Type or System Type, the DIGITAL
      IDLE LINK CHECK field on the Wireline Configuration screen,
      Page 2, gets set to a default.

      Before downloading the codeplug, make sure that the field is
      set as needed by the system configuration.

*ir_freq_band,A
INTELLIREPEATER FREQ BAND HELP

Enter the frequency band or range desired.  The selected frequency range
MUST match the currently selected Rx & PA/Ex Frequency bands on the Station
Configuration screen.

*scan_rcvr_help,A
SCANNING RECEIVER HELP

This field must be enabled in order to turn on the Scanning Receiver 
function in the station.

Valid choices for this field are: ENABLED/DISABLED



*modulation_help,A
STATION TYPE HELP

The Station Type field defines the overall signaling capabilities
of the station both over the air and over the wireline link. Valid
choices for this field are ANALOG ONLY, ASTRO CAPABLE, ASTRO CAI CAPABLE,
(SECURENET) SEC XL CAPABLE, and (SECURENET) SEC CFB CAPABLE.

Station Type chosen on the Hardware Configuration screen will affect
the Modulation Types available for each channel on the Chg/View:
Channel Information screen as well as the options for wireline operation.

If changed, the selected Station Type may be verified with the
station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

If ANALOG ONLY is selected, the station will operate in the ANALOG only
mode. The station will be capable of transmitting over the
air signaling such as PL/DPL/CSQ and use wireline protocols such as Tone
Remote Control and DC Control. 

If ASTRO CAPABLE or ASTRO CAI CAPABLE is selected, the station will operate 
in the ASTRO or ASTRO CAI mode.  Station operation can then be further 
defined through the modulation selection field in the Channel Information 
Screen. The station there can be defined to operate in the ANALOG mode only, 
ASTRO or ASTRO CAI mode only, or ANALOG/ASTRO or ANALOG/ASTRO CAI mixed mode. 
In all cases, the wireline operation is ASTRO mode using either an ASTRO 
modem, V.24 or a V.24 Hybrid link.

If ASTRO CAI CAPABLE is selected the station will operate in ASTRO CAI
mode (Astro Common Air Interface as defined by APCO Project 25). ASTRO CAI 
operation and capabilities are similar to those for ASTRO, however ASTRO 
CAI uses different protocols than ASTRO both over the air and over 
the wireline and requires ASTRO CAI capability in other infrastructure and 
subscriber equipment communicating with the station in ASTRO CAI mode.

If SEC CFB/XL CAPABLE (SECURENET) is selected, the station will operate
in SECURENET mode. Station operation can then be further defined through
the modulation selection field in the Channel Information Screen. The
station there can be defined to operate in the ANALOG mode only,
SECURENET mode only, or ANALOG/SECURENET mixed mode. The wireline, if
present, will operate only in TRC mode. The SECURENET choice provides
two further choices: XL, and Cipher Feed Back (CFB). In XL mode, the
station will provide an 80 millisecond buffer for the receive to wireline,
repeat and wireline to transmitter paths and will attempt to never
truncate any SECURENET signal that it receives while it is trying to
establish code detect. In CFB mode, the station will not provide any
buffering and will truncate any input SECURENET signal that it receives
while it is trying to establish code detect. In CFB mode the station
will have approximately 40 milliseconds of throughput delay from Rx to
wireline and Tx, and from wireline to Tx. In previous products (Micor
and MSF), there was no throughput delay in CFB mode.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station. 
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the HW PLATFORM match the station hardware. The remaining fields
displayed on the screen will be validated against the codeplug currently
programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

*antenna_relay,A
ANTENNA RELAY HELP

For Base Station operation where Tx Freq = Rx Freq, an antenna relay
is used. Antenna Relay may be toggled between ENABLED or DISABLED.

Initial default setting is DISABLED.

*station_config,A
SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION HELP

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION: This section allows the user to view and
modify the main operating parameters of the station.

Validate Config Function Key (F8):

The Validate Config Function Key will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station.
The hardware validation will check that the displayed PA/Exciter Frequency
Band and the HW PLATFORM match the station hardware. It will also verify
the Frequency Reference source selected also matches the hardware present
in the station (Release 3 station firmware and later). The remaining
displayed fields on the screen will be validated against the codeplug
currently programmed in the station.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

SERIAL NUMBER is the current assigned serial number of the station.
This number should match the back plane serial number. Initially, this
field will indicate the number downloaded from the station or codeplug.

The Serial Number may be changed by the user; However, make sure that
the serial number always matches the current station serial number.
Otherwise, upon pressing F8 (Validate Config), the RSS will report
a serial number mismatch.

STATION NAME can be used to identify a station.  This field accepts up
to 21 alphanumeric characters.

HARDWARE PLATFORM can be toggled through types QUANTAR, QUANTRO,
ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER, and QUANTAR SATELLITE RECEIVER.

SYSTEM TYPE may be toggled between CONVENTIONAL,
INTELLIREPEATER 2.0.3/2.7E, INTELLIREPEATER 3.0/3.5,
TRUNKING (6809), DSS-III, or QUANTAR DATA BASE STATION.

NOTE: When changing the Station Type or System Type, the DIGITAL
      IDLE LINK CHECK field on the Wireline Configuration screen,
      Page 2, gets set to a default.

      Before downloading the codeplug, make sure that the field is
      set as needed by the system configuration.

RX FREQ BAND 1 can be toggled through all currently available frequency
bands.

Valid choices are:  UHF R1, UHF R2, UHF R3, UHF R4, VHF R1, VHF R2,
800 MHz, & 900 MHz.

RX FREQ BAND 2 can be toggled through all currently available frequency
bands.

Valid choices are:  UHF R1, UHF R2, UHF R3, UHF R4, VHF R1, VHF R2,
800 MHz, & 900 MHz.

If changed, the entered Rx Freq Band 1 and Rx Freq Band 2 may be
verified with the station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key.
Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current station configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

PA/EXCITER FREQ BAND can be toggled through all currently available
frequency bands.

Valid choices are:  UHF R1, UHF R2, VHF R1, VHF R2, 800 MHz, & 900 MHz.

PA POWER RATING is dependent upon the selected PA/EXCITER FREQUENCY
BAND and the HW PLATFORM according to the following table:

  PA/EXCITER FREQ BAND    HW PLATFORM      PA POWER RATING (Watts)
  --------------------------------------------------------------
     VHF R1,R2              QUANTAR          25, 125
     UHF R1,R2              QUANTAR          25
     UHF R1,R2,R3           QUANTAR          110
     UHF R4                 QUANTAR          100
     800 MHz                QUANTAR          20
     900 MHz                QUANTAR          100

     VHF R1,R2              QUANTRO          350
     UHF R1,R2              QUANTRO          6, 40, 110, 225
     UHF R3                 QUANTRO          110
     UHF R4                 QUANTRO          100
     800 MHz                QUANTRO          35, 75, 150

WIRELINE may be toggled between 8-Wire, 4-Wire and NONE.

WILDCARD is only available if a Wireline module is present and may
be toggled between ENHANCED, BASIC and DISABLED if the Wireline is
8-wire and between BASIC and DISABLED if the Wireline is 4-wire.
 

POWER SUPPLY may be toggled between AC LOW, AC HIGH, DC LOW, and DC HIGH.
Once the Power Supply type is changed, the BATTERY field should also
be inspected.

The BATTERY field may be toggled between NONE, LEAD ACID LINEAR,
LEAD ACID NONLINEAR, and NICAD.

STATION TYPE choices may be toggled between ASTRO CAPABLE,
(SECURENET) SEC XL CAPABLE, (SECURENET) SEC CFB CAPABLE and ANALOG ONLY.

Station Type chosen on the Hardware Configuration screen will affect
the Modulation Types available for each channel on the Chg/View:
Channel Information screen.

FREQUENCY REFERENCE selects between INTERNAL - STANDARD, EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ
(External 5 MHz Source), EXTERNAL - 10 MHZ (External 10 MHz Source), and
INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY (Internal High Stability Source UHSO/HSO).

If changed, the entered Frequency Reference choice may be verified with
the station by pressing the F8 (Validate Config) key. Any mismatch with
the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.

NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when the F8 key is pressed.

SIMULCAST OPERATION may be Enabled or Disabled.  To properly enable this
feature the feature option must have been purchased.  Refer to the Price
Pages for more information.

For Simulcast systems,  make certain that the following fields are set
properly if Simulcast is enabled:

Hardware Configuration:Frequency Reference = External - 5 or 10 MHz selected
RF Configuration:Repeater Operation = BASE
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = OFF
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = OFF
Channel Information: Call Sign = blanked (DISABLED)
Channel Information: Alarm Tones over Air = DISABLED
Wireline Configuration:Wireline Operation = 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
Wireline Configuration:Comparator = SPECTRA-TAC or DIGI-TAC or ASTRO-TAC or
                                    ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC
Wireline Configuration:Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat = DISABLED


MRTI INTERFACE may be toggled between Enabled or Disabled. To properly
enable this feature the MRTI option must have been purchased. Refer
to the Price Pages for more information.


*read_cp_file,A
RESTORE ARCHIVE DIRECTORY FROM BACKUP HELP

ENTER ARCHIVE DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory
that you wish to restore. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:),
and all legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by
pressing the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will
be displayed in this field.

If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.

If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.

ENTER BACKUP DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory
that you will retrieve backup files.  Directory validation is handled
in the same manner as the archive directory name.  The files in this
directory will overwrite the files in the target directory.

Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.

Press the ENTER key to copy the files in the backup directory to the
target directory.  Any common files are overwritten by the backup files.
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you wish to perform
the backup; press F2 for yes, F10 for no.

*read_cp_file_from_sr_help,A
GET CODEPLUG FROM FILE SCROLL REGION HELP

Use Up/Down Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a file.

Use PgUp/PgDn to bring up new files to the screen and select one.

Tab:      Moves cursor to filename field.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the directory field.

Enter:    Read selected file.

*view_information,A
VIEW INFORMATION HELP

The View Info function key will recall the comment header of the selected
codeplug file for viewing. Any editing of this header can only be done from
the Save Codeplug to File screen.

*save_cp_file,A
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE DISK FILE HELP

ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all 
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.

If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.

If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.

Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.

ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).

If you desire to add a note to the codeplug file before saving it, press F3
(EDIT INFO) to call up a edit window into which you can add desired notes.
When finished adding notes, press F10 to return to the Read/Save Codeplug
screen. Press ENTER to save the codeplug to the desired file.

If no notes are desired, just press the ENTER key to save the codeplug to
the desired file.

After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the READ/SAVE CODEPLUG
screen.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Will recall this screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - EDIT INFO will recall the comment header of the selected codeplug
           file for editing. Once editing is completed, press F8 to save the
           notes entered to the codeplug file.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - SAVE codeplug (with entered notes) to a file.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

Special Keys:

Tab:      Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
          If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
          file.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous 
          column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor 
          will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
          directory pathname may be entered.

*save_cp_file_from_sr_help,A
SAVE CODEPLUG TO FILE SCROLL REGION HELP

Use Up/Down Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a file.

Use PgUp/PgDn to bring up new files to the screen and select one.

Tab:      Moves cursor to directory field.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the filename field.

Enter:    Overwrite selected file.

*edit_information,A
EDIT INFORMATION HELP

The Edit Info function key will recall the comment header of the selected
codeplug file for editing. Once editing is completed, press F8 to save the
notes entered to the codeplug file.

*edit_user_name,A
USER NAME HELP

Enter the name or other identification of the person to last modify
the codeplug into this field. Once complete, press ENTER or TAB to
move to the next field.

NOTE: Entry is optional in this field.

*edit_date,A
DATE HELP

Enter the date of the modification to the codeplug in this field.

NOTE: The RSS will automatically read the current date from the PC
and will insert it into this field. If desired, the contents of this
field may be changed. Entry must be in the format MM/DD/YY.

NOTE: Entry is optional in this field.

*edit_user_comments,A
COMMENTS HELP

Enter the desired comments about this codeplug into this field. When
completed, press F10 to return to the READ/SAVE:SAVE CODEPLUG TO FILE
screen. When the codeplug is saved, the entered comments will also
be saved automatically.

NOTE: Entry is optional in this field.


*sc_screen,A
STATION CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS HELP

The Station Control Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Station Control
module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the Station Control Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now).

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or 
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.

*sc_bas_dram,A
STATION CONTROL BASIC DRAM TEST HELP

This test may not be selected on a Run Now basis.
It will only be executed at the initial power up or reset of the station.

This test verifies the proper operation of the DRAM memory on the station
control module. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs
on the front panel of the station control module.

A DRAM test failure is indicated by the Rx Fail and Aux LED leds flashing
rapidly back and forth and the Control Fail or Intercom LEDs being
constantly on.  If this test fails the station will not come out of reset.

*sc_ext_dram,A
STATION CONTROL EXTENSIVE DRAM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_rom,A
STATION CONTROL BASIC ROM TEST HELP

This test may not be selected on a Run Now basis.
Will only be executed at the initial power up or reset of the station.

This test verifies proper operation and contents of the ROMs on the 
Station Control board.  If this test fails, the indication will be flashing
LEDs on the front of the station control board.  A ROM test failure is
indicated by the Rx2 Active and Rx Fail LEDs flashing rapidly back and
forth and the Control On LED being continually on.  If this test fails the
station will not operate.

*sc_bas_eeprom,A
STATION CONTROL BASIC EEPROM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_ext_eeprom,A
STATION CONTROL EXTENSIVE EEPROM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_duart,A
STATION CONTROL DUART LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_spi,A
STATION CONTROL SPI TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_asic,A
STATION CONTROL DSP GLUE ASIC TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_audio,A
STATION CONTROL AUDIO LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_hdlc,A
STATION CONTROL HDLC LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_ref_osc,A
STATION CONTROL REFERENCE OSCILLATOR TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_dsp_sram,A
STATION CONTROL DSP RAM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_dsp_sanity,A
STATION CONTROL DSP SANITY TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*sc_tdm,A
STATION CONTROL WIRELINE TDM LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

The DSS-III station does not support this test.

*sc_wl_loop,A
STATION CONTROL WIRELINE LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

The DSS-III station does not support this test.

*sc_flash_help,A
STATION CONTROL FLASH TEST HELP

This test verifies the proper operation of the FLASH memory on the station
control module. This test should not be selected as a Warm Start test, as
the DSS-III station does not support this mode.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*wl_screen,A
WIRELINE TEST HELP

The Wireline  Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Wireline module.
These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the
Wireline Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now).

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.
  
*wlbsram,A
WIRELINE SRAM TEST HELP

This test is always run during a cold start, and never during a warm start.
The user has no control over the execution of this test.

This test verifies proper operation of the SRAM memory on the wireline
board. If the test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the front
of the wireline board. An SRAM test failure is indicated by the LED's
blinking two or three times repetitively.

*wlesram,A
WIRELINE EXTENSIVE SRAM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*wlrom,A
WIRELINE BASIC ROM TEST HELP

This test is always run during a reset. The user has no control over the 
execution of this test.

This test verifies proper operation and contents of the ROM on the Wireline
module. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the
front of the Wireline module. A ROM test failure is indicated by the LED's
blinking once repetitively.


*wlhdlc,A
WIRELINE HDLC LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*wlmodem,A
WIRELINE MODEM LOOPBACK TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*wl96v,A
WIRELINE 9.6V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*wlneg96v,A
WIRELINE -9.6V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*wlcompat,A
WIRELINE COMPATIBILITY TEST

This is a purchasable option.

*wlcom,A
WIRELINE COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP

This test checks for proper communications between the wireline module 
and the station control module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*wla/d,A
WIRELINE A/D TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*rx_screen,A
RECEIVER TEST HELP

The Receiver Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Receiver module.
module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the Receiver Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold 
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). 

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or 
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.

*rxcom,A
RECEIVER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP

This test checks for proper communications between the receiver module
and the station control module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxcompat,A
RECEIVER COMPATIBILITY TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*rx5v,A
RECEIVER 5V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the 5 Volt regulator on the
receiver.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rx10v,A
RECEIVER 10V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the 10 Volt regulator on the
receiver.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.


*rx14v,A
RECEIVER 14V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the 14 Volt regulator on the
receiver.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxpre,A
RECEIVER PREAMP BIAS TEST HELP

This test checks for proper preamp bias on the receiver.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxref,A
RECEIVER 2.1 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL TEST HELP

This test checks for proper 2.1 MHz Reference Level on the receiver.

NOTE: The 2.1 MHZ reference frequency from the reference oscillator
must be present for this test to be valid.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxinj,A
RECEIVER INJECTION TEST HELP

This test checks for proper injection level on the receiver.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxlock,A
RECEIVER SYNTHESIZER TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the synthesizer on the receiver.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxclock,A
RECEIVER ABACUS CLOCK/DATA TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*pa_screen,A
POWER AMPLIFIER TESTS HELP

The Power Amplifier Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Power Amplifier
module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the Power Amplifier Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold 
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). 

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or 
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.

*pacom,A
POWER AMPLIFIER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*pacompat,A
POWER AMPLIFIER COMPATIBILITY TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*paps,A
POWER AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*paheat,A
POWER AMPLIFIER HEATSINK TEMPERATURE TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*pafan,A
POWER AMPLIFIER FAN ALARM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*ex_screen,A
EXCITER DIAGNOSTIC TESTS HELP

The Exciter Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Exciter module.
These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the Exciter Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold 
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). 

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or 
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.

*excom,A
EXCITER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP

This test checks for proper communications between the exciter module and
the station control module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*exbram,A
EXCITER BASIC RAM TEST HELP

This test is always run at powerup or reset.

This test verifies proper operation of the SRAM memory on the Exciter
module. If the test fails, the only indication will be flashing LEDs on
the front of the Exciter module.  An SRAM test failure is indicated by the
PA Low and PA Fail LEDs flashing rapidly back and forth and the PA Full
LED being constantly on. If this test fails the exciter will not function.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*exeram,A
EXCITER EXTENSIVE RAM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*exeprom,A
EXCITER BASIC EPROM TEST HELP

This test is always run during reset.

This test verifies proper operation and contents of the ROM on the
Exciter module. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing
LEDs on the front of the Exciter module. A ROM test failure is indicated
by the PA Low and PA Fail LEDs flashing rapidly back and forth and the
Tx Lock LED being constantly on. If this test fails the exciter will
not operate.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*exbeeprom,A
EXCITER BASIC EEPROM TEST HELP

This test is always run during reset.

This test verifies proper operation and contents of the EEPROMs on the
Exciter Module. If this test fails, an alarm will be logged on the station
control module. If this test fails the exciter will not operate until the
station is re-aligned; minimally, the Tx Deviation and the Reference
Modulation Compensation alignments must be performed.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*exeeeprom,A
EXCITER EXTENSIVE EEPROM TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*exref,A
EXCITER 2.1 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*exlock,A
EXCITER SYNTHESIZER LOCK TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the synthesizer on the Exciter
module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*ps_screen,A
POWER SUPPLY TESTS HELP

The Power Supply Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Power Supply
module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the Power Supply Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold 
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). 

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or 
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.

*pscom,A
POWER SUPPLY COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP

This test checks for proper communications between the Power supply 
module and the station control module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*psmod,A
POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL TEST HELP

This test checks for overall failure of the Power Supply module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*psin,A
POWER SUPPLY INPUT VOLTAGE TEST HELP

This test checks for proper input voltage to the Power Supply module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*ps28v,A
POWER SUPPLY 28V TEST HELP

This test checks the 28 Volt output of the Power Supply module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*ps14v,A
POWER SUPPLY 14V TEST HELP

This test checks the 14 Volt output of the Power Supply module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*ps5v,A
POWER SUPPLY 5V TEST HELP

This test checks the 5 Volt output of the Power Supply module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual
for further actions to be taken.

*psbattt,A
POWER SUPPLY BATTERY TEMPERATURE TEST HELP

This is a purchasable option.

*psheatt,A
POWER SUPPLY HEAT SINK TEMPERATURE TEST HELP

This test checks for an overheated heatsink on the Power Supply module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*psrip,A
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE RIPPLE TEST HELP

This test checks for excessive voltage ripple on the Power Supply module.
This test is not available for certain types of Power Supplies.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*psv,A
POWER SUPPLY BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST HELP

This test checks for proper battery voltage on those Power Supply modules
equipped with battery backup.

Upon failure of this test refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*psfan,A
POWER SUPPLY FAN ALARM TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the fans on the Power Supply
module. This test is only valid for Quantar stations and certain
types of power supplies.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*mfrontp_help,A
STATUS PANEL/SOFTWARE VERSION/SET STATION DATE AND TIME MENU HELP

The Status Panel Display is available only when the RSS is connected
to a station or comparator.

The Status Panel Display screen will allow the user to view and/or modify
connected device's parameters.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

     F2  - Status Panel Display.
           Displays information of the device's different parameters.

     F3  - Device Software Version.
           Displays information of device's software versions.

     F4  - not used.

     F5  - not used.

     F6  - not used.

     F7  - not used.

     F8  - not used.

     F9  - Set Device's Date/Time.

     F10 - Exit to the Service Menu.

*dfp01_help,A
STATUS PANEL DISPLAY HELP

WARNING: The RSS may terminate abnormally if you view the codeplug size
information on the help menu (F5) and the station resets.  Please exit
the Status Panel display before viewing the codeplug size information.

WARNING: Keeping the RSS in Status Panel Mode, particularly for
Intellirepeater stations, may result in the station resetting due
to task overloads.  this reset will occur only if the station is 
sufficiently 'busy'.

The Status Panel Display screen allows the user to view and/or modify
selected station parameters of the station front panel.
The user can change current channel, speaker volume level, speaker
squelch, wireline squelch,  intercom, and disable access to the station
by non-RSS users.

Use the Function Keys and Shift-Function keys to change the current
operating mode of the station. The RSS will send a command to the station
to reflect the desired change on a specific station parameter.

NOTE: The ability to change the station settings for these fields is
      greatly affected by how 'busy' the station currently is. If you
      attempt to change Channels, Speaker Volume Level, Access Disable
      Intercom, Squelch or attempt to Reset the station and the station
      does not accept the change, please try again.

The STATION MODE field displays the station's current operating mode. This
field will display: BOGUS, CONTROL, FAILSOFT, FAILSOFT/ACTIVE MASTER, FORCED 
SIMULCAST, NORMAL SIMULCAST, VOICE/SCANNING, VOICE, or VOICE/ACTIVE MASTER.

The LOCAL SPEAKER VOLUME field displays the current volume level of the
local station speaker as a percentage of Full Volume.
Use the F4/Shift-F4 keys to change the volume of the speaker.

The ACCESS DISABLE field displays the current state of the station.
The access disable can be ON/OFF.
If ACCESS DISABLE is ON, all of the keyups are disabled, except for local
PTT and RSS Diagnostic keyups.
If ACCESS DISABLE is OFF, the station operates on its normal state.
Use the F6/Shift-F6 keys to change the access disable state.

The CHANNEL NUMBER field displays the station's current operating channel.
Use the F2/Shift-F2 to change the current channel.

For Release 3.1 and later station firmware:

The RCVR SQUELCH field displays the station's current speaker and wireline
squelch operating modes. The squelch modes are: CSQ/PL/OFF.
Use the F7 key to change the squelch operating mode.

The INTERCOM field displays the station's current intercom state.
The intercom can be ON/OFF.
Use the F8/Shift-F8 keys to change the intercom state.

NOTE: The RSS Status Panel displays the Tx Frequency associated with the
      currently active receive channel frequency and not the frequency
      of the current channel.  The current channel defines the frequency
      that the station is actually transmitting on.  Since the RSS always
      displays an RX/TX frequency pair as defined in the channel
      configuration screens, it was not possible to display the actual
      receive frequency and transmit frequency.  Thus, the RSS displays the
      RX/TX frequency pair associated with the active receive activity.

Following are the possible states displayed and their meanings:

CONTROL ON   - The control module is fully functional. (Normal Operation)
CONTROL FAIL - The control module is no longer able to handle all
               functional tasks. Service is required.

TX LOCK      - Synthesizer is locked and Exciter Microprocessor
               is functional.
TX UNLOCKED  - Synthesizer is unlocked and not functional.

RX ACTIVE    - A valid received RF signal has been detected.
RX INACTIVE  - The Receiver is currently inactive. (Normal Operation)

RX2 ACTIVE   - A valid received RF signal has been detected on the Second
               Receiver.
RX2 INACTIVE - The Second Receiver is currently inactive. (Normal 
               Operation)
RX2 NOT INST - A Second Receiver module is not installed in the station.

WL ON        - The Wireline module is fully functional. (Normal Operation)
WL FAIL      - The Wireline module has malfunctioned or power is off.

REF ACTIVE   - External reference or UHSO active (if present).
REF INACTIVE - No external reference available or UHSO inactive.

PA INACTIVE  - PA is operational but not keyed. (Normal Operation)
PA FULL      - Station is keyed and at expected power.
PA LOW       - Station is keyed and at reduced power.
PA FAIL      - PA not making minimum forward voltage, or PA fan fail,
               Final PA VSWR alarm, Open Power Loop Alarm, Power Level
               problem, or Overdrive alarm. NOTE: The station will still
               be able to be keyed.

RX LOCK      - Receiver is locked.

RX2 LOCK     - The Second Receiver is locked.
RX2 UNLOCKED - The Second Receiver is unlocked.

RX2 FAIL     - The second receiver is absent or not functioning properly.

AC ON        - Power Supply module is receiving AC Power.
AC FAIL      - Power Supply Malfunction.


UHSO COLD    - UHSO not yet at operating temperature in the station
               (7.5 minute warm-up may be overridden at the SERVICE:
               ALIGNMENT menu)

SITE DISABLED    - site is not trunking and not failsoft, no communication
                   available
SITE LOCAL TRUNK - performing local trunking functionality, no inter-site
                   communication
SITE WIDE TRUNK  - inter-site communication available
SITE FAILSOFT    - site is not trunking, no inter-site communication
SITE TEST        - station is being put through initialization and
                   diagnostic routines, no communication is available

PIB ENABLED       - pib is functional
PIB DISABLED      - pib is not functional
PIB DIAG ENABLED  - running diagnostics
PIB DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while pib is disabled
PIB NO STATE      - hardware is missing or pib failed
PIB MALFUNCTION   - test failed on pib

ANALOG LINK ENABLED       - analog link is functional
ANALOG LINK DISABLED      - analog link is not functional
ANALOG LINK DIAG ENABLED  - running diagnostics
ANALOG LINK DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while analog link is
                            disabled
ANALOG LINK NO STATE      - hardware is missing or analog link failed
ANALOG LINK MALFUNCTION   - test failed on analog link

DIGITAL LINK ENABLED       - digital link is functional
DIGITAL LINK DISABLED      - digital link is not functional
DIGITAL LINK DIAG ENABLED  - running diagnostics
DIGITAL LINK DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while digital link is
                             disabled
DIGITAL LINK NO STATE      - hardware is missing or digital link failed
DIGITAL LINK MALFUNCTION   - test failed on digital link

DLAN1 UP   - station is communicating with other stations at site
DLAN1 DOWN - station is isolated

TRANSMIT ENABLED       - exciter is functional
TRANSMIT DISABLED      - exciter is not functional
TRANSMIT DIAG ENABLED  - running diagnostics
TRANSMIT DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while exciter is disabled
TRANSMIT NO STATE      - hardware is missing or exciter module failed
TRANSMIT MALFUNCTION   - test failed on exciter module

RECEIVE  ENABLED       - receiver is functional
RECEIVE  DISABLED      - receiver is not functional
RECEIVE  DIAG ENABLED  - running diagnostics
RECEIVE  DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while receiver is disabled
RECEIVE  NO STATE      - hardware is missing or receiver module failed
RECEIVE  MALFUNCTION   - test failed on receiver module


STATUS MESSAGES:

The bottom line of the screen will display any Status message
that occurs while the Status Panel screen is visible.
Only the last received status message will be displayed.

To view the entire message use the Left-Arrow and Right-Arrow keys.
Status messages indicate (in order, left to right): First Occurrence of
message, Most Recent Occurrence of message, Number of times message has
occurred, and description.  The user may refer to the RSS manual,
Diagnostics and Status section for the proper action to take if a specific
alarm is seen.

NOTE: The Status messages will also be queued in the station's memory and
      can be recalled from the Service:Status Report Screen.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.
     SF1 - not used.

     F2  - Change to Next Channel.     (Non-Trunked stations only)
     SF2 - Change to Previous Channel. (Non-Trunked stations only)

     F3  - Enable Repeater.
     SF3 - Disable Repeater.

     F4  - Turn Volume Up.
     SF4 - Turn Volume Down.

     F5  - Test Repeater.
     SF5 - Reset the station.

     F6  - Turn Access Disable ON.
     SF6 - Turn Access Disable OFF.

     F7  - Change Squelch Operation (CSQ/PL/OFF).
     SF7 - not used.

     F8  - Turn Intercom ON.
     SF8 - Turn Intercom OFF.

     F9  - Keyup the station.
     SF9 - Dekey the station.

     F10 - Exit to the Status Panel/Set Station Time and Date Menu.


NOTE: "SF#" stand for <SHIFT-F#> key press combination.
      To dekey the station, the user must press the Shift-F9 keys.

*dfp02_help,A
INTELLIREPEATER STATUS PANEL DISPLAY HELP

The Status Panel Display screen allow the user to view and/or modify
selected station parameters of the station front panel.
The user can Enable, Disable, and Test a Repeater.

Use the Function Keys and Shift-Function keys to change the current
operating mode of the repeater. The RSS will send a command to the repeater
to reflect the desired change on a specific repeater parameter/function.

NOTE: The ability to change the repeater settings for these fields is
      greatly affected by how 'busy' the repeater currently is. If you
      attempt to change the functionality of a repeater and the repeater
      does not accept the change, please try again.

The REPEATER NUMBER field displays the repeater number of an IR site.

The REPEATER MODE field displays the repeater's current operating mode.
The repeater mode can be: VOICE,    VOICE/ACTIVE MASTER,
                          CONTROL,  CONTROL/ACTIVE MASTER,
                          FAILSOFT, FAILSOFT/ACTIVE MASTER

Following are the possible states displayed and their meanings:

RECEIVE  - ENABLED, DISABLED, DIAG ENABLED, DIAG DISABLED,
           NO STATE, MALFUNCTION

TRANSMIT - ENABLED, DISABLED, DIAG ENABLED, DIAG DISABLED,
           NO STATE, MALFUNCTION

WIRELINE - ENABLED, DISABLED, DIAG ENABLED, DIAG DISABLED,
           NO STATE, MALFUNCTION

DLAN1    - UP, DOWN

DLAN2    - UP, DOWN

SITE     - DISABLED, LOCAL TRUNK, WIDE TRUNK, FAILSOFT, TEST

STATUS MESSAGES:

The bottom line of the screen will display any Status message
that occurs while the Status Panel screen is visible.
Only the last received status message will be displayed.

To view the entire message use the Left-Arrow and Right-Arrow keys.
Status messages indicate (in order, left to right): First Occurrence of
message, Most Recent Occurrence of message, Number of times message has
occurred, and description.  The user may refer to the RSS manual,
Diagnostics and Status section for the proper action to take if a specific
alarm is seen.

NOTE: The Status messages will also be queued in the station's memory and
      can be recalled from the Service:Status Report Screen.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.
     SF1 - not used.

     F2  - Enable Repeater.
     SF2 - not used.

     F3  - Disable Repeater.
     SF3 - not used.

     F4  - Test Repeater.
     SF4 - not used.

     F5  - Reset the station.
     SF5 - not used.

     F6  - not used.
     SF6 - not used.

     F7  - not used.
     SF7 - not used.

     F8  - not used.
     SF8 - not used.

     F9  - Keyup the station.
     SF9 - Dekey the station.

     F10 - Exit to the Status Panel Menu.


NOTE: "SF#" stand for <SHIFT-F#> key press combination.
      To dekey the station, the user must press the Shift-F9 keys.

*fp_date_help,A
DATE HELP

Enter the current date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY
where: MM   represents the month,
       DD   represents the day of the month,
       YYYY represents the year.

You do not need to type the slashes.

After the date has been entered, press function key F3 to set
the PC's date and time to the date and time displayed on
the screen.  Or press function key F8 to send the new date 
and time to the connected device.

*fp_time_help,A
TIME HELP

Enter the current time in this format: HH:MM:SS
Where HH ranges from 00 through 24 (hours)
      MM ranges from 00 through 59 (minutes)
      SS ranges from 00 through 59 (seconds)

You do not need to type the colons.

After the time has been entered, press function key F3 to set
the PC's date and time to the date and time displayed on
the screen.  Or press function key F8 to send the new date 
and time to the connected device.

*channel_data,A
CHANGE/VIEW:CHANNEL INFORMATION HELP

This screen is used to Modify channel-specific parameters for the 
single channel in the station. 

*channel_screen,A
CHANGE/VIEW:CHANNEL INFORMATION HELP

This two page screen is used to Add, Delete, and Modify channel-specific
parameters for all channels desired in the station. Values entered will
only apply to the currently selected channel.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this help screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Add New Channel to end of Channel List. 
           (Conventional, non-MCS stations Only)

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Display the previous Channel Data. 
           (Conventional, non-MCS stations Only)

     F6  - Display the next Channel Data.
           (Conventional, non-MCS stations Only)

     F7  - Not Used.

     F8  - Delete Currently Displayed Channel. 
           (Conventional, non-MCS stations Only)

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

WARNING: When deleting a channel,  make sure that any references to that
	 channel number in TRC, DC, or WildCard tables are changed to
	 another defined channel number.  Inconsistent station operation
	 may result if the TRC, DC, or WildCard tables attempt to reference
	 an undefined channel number.

NOTE: When adding a channel, the parameters of the currently displayed
channel will be copied to the new channel automatically. The added channel
will always be added to the end of the current channel list.

Audio Filters: There may be special applications where the station is used
as an RF modem and not for analog voice applications.   There are three
filters which are used in analog voice applications which can be bypassed
to improve the RF modem application.  These three filters are: Pre-
emphasis, De-emphasis, and Rx Hi-Pass Filter.  The removal of these
filters enables the analog audio signal to be transmitted and received 
by the station without it being altered by the filters and, in essence, 
provides a flat audio path through the station.

*channel,A
CHANNEL NUMBER HELP

Enter the desired channel in this field. Press Enter or Tab to accept and
to display the channel information for the new channel. Legal range is 1
to the current number of channels programmed, up to absolute maximum of 28,
except in 6809 Trunking systems, and DSS-III data stations,  where only one
channel is allowed.

NOTE: Adding or deleting channels will not be allowed while the cursor is
in this field. First move to another field then attempt adding or deleting
channels.

*rx_freq,A
RX FREQUENCY HELP

Enter the desired receive frequency, (in MHz), into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the next
field.

If the station is equipped with two receivers, only one receiver can
be active at any given time. The user specifies which receiver is
inactive for that channel by setting its receive frequency to zero.

NOTE: If frequencies are defined for both Rx1 and Rx2, only Rx1 will
be used.

NOTE: If a frequency not divisible by 6.25, 5.00 or 2.5 KHz is entered,
a warning will be displayed to the user; However, the frequency may
be still accepted if the user desires.

It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or PA/Exciter Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.

*rx2_freq,A
RX2 FREQUENCY HELP

The Rx2 Frequency field is not editable when the Rx Freq Band 2 field 
on the Hardware Configuration screen is set to NONE.

Enter the desired receive frequency, (in MHz), into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the next
field.

If the station is equipped with two receivers, only one receiver can
be active at any given time. The user specifies which receiver is
inactive for that channel by setting its receive frequency to zero.

NOTE: If frequencies are defined for both Rx1 and Rx2, only Rx1 will
be used.

NOTE: If a frequency not divisible by 6.25,5.00 or 2.5 KHz is entered,
a warning will be displayed to the user; However, the frequency may
be still accepted if the user desires.

It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or PA/Exciter Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.

*tx_freq,A
TX FREQUENCY HELP

Enter the desired transmit frequency, (in MHz), into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the next
field.

NOTE: If a frequency that is not divisible by 6.25, 5.00 or 2.5 KHz is 
entered, a warning will be displayed to the user; however, the frequency 
may be still accepted if the user desires.

It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or PA/Exciter Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.

NOTE: The Tx Idle Frequency must be set to a non-zero value regardless
of the Tx Frequency value.   For DBS Stations, the Tx Idle Frequency
will be automatically set to match the Tx Frequency.

The actual channel keyup time (i.e. time for the station to switch
from the Idle frequency to the channel transmit frequency) will be directly
proportional to the frequency difference between the Tx Frequency and the
Tx Idle Frequency.  Certain applications (Trunking and Data) require minimal 
delay when switching between TX IDLE and TX Frequencies in order to maximize
system throughput.  In these configurations, the TX IDLE Frequency
should be set to match the Tx Frequency.

*tx_idle_freq,A
TX IDLE FREQUENCY HELP

Enter the desired transmit idle frequency (in MHz) into this field.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the
next field.

NOTE: If a frequency which is not divisible by 6.25, 5.00 or 2.5 KHz is 
entered,a warning will be displayed to the user; however, the frequency 
may be still accepted if the user desires. If the RX and TX frequencies
are different, the TX IDLE frequency should be set equal to the TX
frequency.

It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or PA/Exciter Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.

NOTE: The actual channel keyup time (i.e. time for the station to switch
from the Idle frequency to the channel transmit frequency) will be directly
proportional to the frequency difference between the Tx Frequency and the
Tx Idle Frequency.  Certain applications (Trunking) require minimal delay
between switching between these states.  In Trunking configurations, make 
the Tx Idle frequency the same as the Tx Frequency.

NOTE:  In order for the station to work properly, the Tx Idle Frequency 
must be set to a non-zero value even if the transmitter is disabled by 
setting the Tx Freq to zero unless it the station's hardware platform
is QUANTAR SATELLITE RECEIVER or ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER.

*chn_spacing,A
RECEIVE CHANNEL BANDWIDTH HELP

Press the Up/Down Arrows to select between the four toggle choices for
this field.  Allowed choices are WIDE 25 - 30 kHz, NPSPAC 25 kHz
NARROW 12.5 - 15 kHz, and NARROW 12.5 kHz.

Typically, NPSPAC 25 KHz should be selected for 821-824 MHz
installations within the U.S.

Typicial installations:
          Receive Channel Bandwidth    Tx Rated Deviation
          -------------------------    ------------------
                  25 kHz                    5.0 kHz
                  NPSPAC                    4.0 kHz
                  12.5 - 15 kHz             2.5 kHz
                  12.5 kHz                  2.5 kHz

Press Enter or Tab to validate the selection and to move to the next
field.

NOTES:
Uses for the various types of receive bandwidth filters -

- 25 kHz -  Typically used in 25 kHz channels for VHF, UHF and 800 MHz.
  This filter is used for SECURENET applications.  ASTRO may be used on
  this channel with this bandwidth selected.

- NPSPAC - Only used in the US for 821-824 MHz band for Public Safety
  installations where 25 kHz channels are used but are geographically
  planned for 12.5 kHz separation.  ASTRO may be used on this channel
  with this bandwidth selected.

- 12.5 - 15 kHz - Typically used for European 12.5 kHz channels and for
  the US in the 900 MHz band.  This filter provides 40 dB ACIPR in a 12.5
  kHz channel.  ASTRO may be used on this channel with this bandwidth
  selected.

- 12.5 kHz Narrow - This filter is used for 12.5 kHz channels where
  ASTRO operation is desired.  Operation on these channels is either
  digital (ASTRO) only or mixed mode digital/analog.  This filter provides
  60 dB ACIPR in a 12.5 kHz channel.


*rated_dev,A
TX RATED DEVIATION HELP

Use the Up/Down Arrow keys to toggle between legal choices for this
channel. Possible choices are: 2.500, 4.000, and 5.000 kHz.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the selection and to move to the next field.

Typicial installations: 
          Receive Channel Bandwidth    Tx Rated Deviation
          -------------------------    ------------------
                  12.5 KHz                  2.5 KHz 
                  25 KHz                    5.0 KHz
                  NPSPAC                    4.0 KHz 

Default Rated Deviation is 5.000 KHz.

*callsign,A
CALL SIGN HELP

Enter the assigned Call Sign for the site into this field. Press Enter
or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field.

The station will transmit the Call Sign only if the station was keyed up
at least once during the time specified in the Call Sign Interval timer
field (On the MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:RF CONFIGURATION screen).

NOTE:  Entry in this field is optional - no Call Sign is required
for normal station operation. If this field is completely blanked, then no
Call Sign will be transmitted by the station.

*callsign_wl,A
CALL SIGN OVER WIRELINE HELP

If this field is ENABLED, the entered call sign (see CALL SIGN help)
will be transmitted over the wireline. Use the Up/Down Arrows to
toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED. Press Enter or TAB
to validate the entry and to move to the next field.

Note: ENABLED is not allowed in Spectra-TAC systems.

Also, If Status Tone is enabled at the MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIG
screen, then Call Sign Over Wireline should be disabled.

*acc_tbl_num,A
ACCESS CODE TABLE HELP

This field will display the currently assigned Access Code Table for
the current channel. Access Code Tables are used to track the PL,
DPL, and ASTRO codes to be used by each channel.

Legal values are 0 to the number of Access Code Tables currently
programmed, up to a maximum of 16. Selecting '0' indicates that
no Access Code Table is desired for the current channel.

NOTE: More than one channel may use the same Access Code Table,
and any channel may use any Access Code Table, or no table at all.

Access Code Tables may only be added or deleted from the CHANGE/
VIEW:ACCESS CODE TABLE screen.

*mod_type,A
MODULATION TYPE HELP

This field is dependent on the Station Type selected at the
SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.

Depending on the Station type, this field may be toggled through 
a subset of the following legal choices:
   ASTRO
   SECURENET
   ANALOG/ASTRO
   ANALOG/SECURENET
   ANALOG
   ASTRO RX WIDE DEV

Press Enter or TAB to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.

NOTE: If ASTRO RX WIDE DEV is selected it is highly recommended that
the Tx Rated Deviation be set to 5.00 kHz and Receive Channel BW be 
set to WIDE 25-30 kHz Channel Spacing.

*rx_active,A
RX ACTIVATION HELP

Press the Up/Down Arrow keys to toggle through the allowed choices
of ON, OFF, S=Carrier Squelch (Rx carrier detected), C=PL/DPL,
(Legal PL detected), or SC=Carrier and PL/DPL (Both Rx Carrier
and legal PL detected).

If ON=Unsquelched is selected, the Receiver will always be unsquelched.
If OFF is selected, the Receiver will always be fully squelched.

Initial Default setting is 'S=Carrier Squelch'.

If 'Carrier Squelch' or 'Carrier Squelch and PL/DPL' is selected be certain
that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Access Code
Table for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not
work. (In this case, CSQ is not a valid choice in the PL field in the
Access Code Table screen).

NOTE: In MCS applications,  only SC=Carrier and PL/DPL and C=PL/DPL
      are valid choices.

*rptr_active,A
REPEATER ACTIVATION HELP

Press the Up/Down Arrow keys to toggle through the allowed choices
of ON, OFF, S=Carrier Squelch (Rx carrier detected), C=PL/DPL,
(Legal PL detected), or SC=Carrier and PL/DPL (Both Rx Carrier
and legal PL detected).

If ON=Unsquelched is selected, the Repeater will always be unsquelched.
If OFF is selected, the Repeater will always be fully squelched.

Initial default setting is 'S=Carrier Squelch'.

If 'Carrier Squelch' or 'Carrier Squelch and PL/DPL' is selected be certain
that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Access Code
Table for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not
work. (In this case, CSQ is not a valid choice in the PL field in the
Access Code Table screen).

NOTE: In MCS applications,  only SC=Carrier and PL/DPL and C=PL/DPL
      are valid choices.

*rptr_holdin,A
REPEATER HOLD_IN HELP

Press the Up/Down Arrow keys to toggle through the allowed choices
of ON, OFF, S=Carrier Squelch (Rx carrier detected), C=PL/DPL,
(Legal PL detected), or SC=Carrier and PL/DPL (Both Rx Carrier
and legal PL detected).

If ON is selected, the Repeater will always be On.
If OFF is selected, the Repeater will always be Off.

Initial default setting is 'S=Carrier Squelch'.

If 'Carrier Squelch' or 'Carrier Squelch and PL/DPL' is selected be certain
that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Access Code
Table for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not
work. (In this case, CSQ is not a valid choice in the PL field in the
Access Code Table screen).

NOTE: In MCS applications,  only SC=Carrier and PL/DPL and C=PL/DPL
      are valid choices.

*rf_repeater_acc,A
ANALOG RPTR ACCESS HELP

For systems where this parameter is set to NONE, the station will repeat
on carrier detect and/or PL/DPL detect.

For systems in which the subscriber units utilize MDC preamble or DTMF or
Singletone to access the repeater, then this field must be set to MDC/TONE.
For these systems, the station will require not only the carrier squelch
and PL/DPL conditions described above, but also an MDC or DTMF or Singletone
preample to enable the repeat function.

This field is normally set to NONE.

*tx_pwr_out,A
TX POWER OUT HELP

Use the digit keys to enter the desired Tx output power for this
channel into the field. Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and
to move to the next field.

NOTE:  Enter the desired power level,  within the limits as displayed in
the top right status window when help is exited.  If the Limited Power 
Ouptut option is enabled, the upper limit will be determined by that 
option or the normal upper limit, which ever is lower. 

*tx_pwr_out_batt,A
TX POWER OUT-BATTERY BACKUP HELP

Use the digit keys to enter the desired Tx output power for this
channel when operating from the Backup Battery power supply.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.

For high power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output
power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above
27 Volts.  When the DC voltage drops below 27 Volts,  the output power will
be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level drops
to 21 Volts.  At that point, the output power will be shut down to protect
the batteries.

For low power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output
power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above 
13.5 Volts.  When the DC voltage drops below 13.5 Volts, the output power 
will be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level
drops to 10.5 Volts.  At that point, the output power will be shut down 
to protect the batteries.

NOTE:  Enter the desired power level,  within the limits as displayed in
the top right status window when help is exited. If the Limited Power 
Ouptut option is enabled, the upper limit will be determined by that 
option or the normal upper limit, which ever is lower. 


*line_tot,A
LINE PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP

Enter the desired PTT Time Out Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates no TOT (infinite).

NOTE:  In voting systems, the Wireline Time Out Timer should normally be 
       set to 0; that is, disabled.

       When subscribers talk back and forth, the comparator adds 
       a drop out delay to each transmission making the session 
       between susbscribers look like a long single WL transmission.  
       Thus the station may easily time out on the wireline 
       transmission.

       In ASTRO CAI systems, the comparator also adds a drop out 
       delay to the console transmission, thus making subscriber 
       to console sessions also look like a single long wireline 
       transmission to the station. For voting systems, both the 
       repeater time out timer and the wirelinetimeout timer should 
       be programmed in the comparator, not the station.

NOTE:  The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments. However,
       the station will truncate the entry to the 10 second increment.

Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.

*local_tot,A
LOCAL PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP

Enter the desired LOCAL Time Out Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates no TOT (infinite).

Default value is 0 seconds (No Time Out).

NOTE: The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments. However,
the station will truncate the entry to the 10 second increment.

Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.

*rptr_tot,A
REPEATER PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP

Enter the desired REPEATER Time Out Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates no TOT (infinite).

Default value is 60 seconds.

NOTE: The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments. However,
the station will truncate the entry to the 10 second increment.

Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.

*mrti_tot,A
MRTI PUSH TO TALK TIMEOUT TIMER HELP

Use this field to set the default push to talk timeout for MRTI.

(See the field MRTI Interface under the Hardware Configuration screen before
setting this field.) The value entered in this field defines the maximum
time in seconds a user may retain the MRTI Interface by holding the Push
to Talk button before the system cuts off the transmission. A value of 0
disables the timer and allows users to retain the channel indefinitely and
is the default value for the timer as set in the factory. This field is
only accessible if MRTI Interface is enabled under the Hardware Configuration
screen and has a valid range of 0 - 2550 seconds.


*mrti_operation,A
MRTI OPERATION HELP

Use this field to Select whether MRTI Operation is ENABLED or DISABLED.

(See the field MRTI Interface under the Hardware Configuration screen before
setting this field.) When MRTI Interface under the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to enabled, each channel is by default set to be MRTI
operational. Using this field each channel can be individually configured
to utilize the MRTI Interface by selecting either ENABLED or DISABLED
(Also see the field MRTI Timeout Timer on this screen. Note the field
MRTI Timeout Timer is blanked and set to 0 when System Type is SmartNet).

*rptr_dod,A
REPEATER DROP OUT DELAY TIMER HELP

Enter the desired REPEATER DROP OUT DELAY Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates zero seconds
delay.

Default value is 2 seconds.

NOTE: Unlike other TOTs, no 'infinite' timeout is available. Setting the
      timer to 0 seconds will result in basically no delay before drop out.

Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.

*rptr_holdoff_help,A
RPTR HOLDOFF HELP

This parameter will delay the receive audio signal to the transmit path for
repeaters. Enabling this parameter will truncate the received signal at the
beginning of the reception for the amount of time specified. The station
will key up, optionally with PL/DPL if selected, as soon as the receive
qualifiers have been met; and after the holdoff timer expires, receive audio
is gated to the transmitter.

This parameter is typically used in systems with subscriber MDC ID.
This feature will prevent the MDC ID from being repeated.

Allowed range is 0 to 2550 milliseconds.  Default value is 0 msec.

*compander_help,A
COMPANDER HELP

The Compander field is used to selectively enable or disable the compander
function in the Base Station.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.

Default is DISABLED.

*noise_canceller_help,A
NOISE CANCELLER HELP

The Noise Canceller field is used to selectively enable or disable the
Flutter Fighter function in the Base Station.

For Multi-Coded Squelch systems, the Noise Canceller field will be 
set to DISABLED and cannot be set to ENABLED.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.

Default is DISABLED.

*ptt_priority,A
PTT PRIORITY HELP

Five types of PTT's exist: wireline(W), repeater(R), local(L), MRTI(M),
and fast_key_up(D).  Fast_key_up is typically used for data.
The PTT's and their priority order are entered by the user.
'>' (greater than) and '=' (equals) may be used to indicate priority
precedence and equal levels of priority.

Only the letters W R L M and D plus the symbols '>' and '=' may be
entered. If any other letter or symbol is entered, the user will
be forced to change it.

If only a subset of the allowed letters is entered, the RSS will
assume the default order for the remaining PTT types.

The default configuration is W>R>M>D>L.

NOTE: If desired, the default configuration may be restored by blanking
the current PTT PRIORITY field completely. When the cursor is moved to
the next field, the default configuration will again be displayed.

*data_polarity,A
RCV (Receive) SIGNAL INVERSION HELP

This field determines if the DSP will invert the phase of the
recovered modulation (data).

The standard operating mode is to configure the receiver audio path to
be non-inverting. The user is given the ability to change this status
on a per channel basis if necessary for specialized system operation.
The inversion status must be correct for the proper operation with
signals using asymmetrical data such as DPL, selective signaling,
trunking low speed data and most other data systems.

This field may be toggled between ENABLED and DISABLED.
Default setting is DISABLED.

*repeater_boost,A
ANALOG REPEATER BOOST HELP

Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys.

When ENABLED (default state), an incoming 40% rated system deviation
signal will be boosted to 60% rated system deviation for re-transmission.
For example, in a 5KHz maximum deviation channel, a signal coming in at
2 KHz deviation will be transmitted at 3 KHz deviation.

When DISABLED, the transmitted signal will be at the same deviation as
the incoming signal.

*alarm_air,A
ALARM TONE OVER AIR HELP

Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys.

When Enabled, any Alarm Tones will be transmitted over the air.Default state is ENABLED.

- When ENABLED on the Channel screen, tone beeps are transmitted over
     the air and are mixed with an analog voice transmission. The beeps
     are also transmitted during analog hang time.
- The tones are transmitted every 10 seconds
- The tones are sent out in analog mode only in conventional systems.
- The tones are NOT sent out during ASTRO calls nor during ASTRO hang time
- The tones are sent to the local speaker all the time and are heard
     provided the speaker is turned on

The number of beeps generated identifies a specific alarm:

1 beep  = battery revert/AC lost
2 beeps = PA failure or PA low
3 beeps = TX or Rx synthesizer out of lock
4 beeps = battery over voltage

*alarm_wireline,A
ALARM TONE OVER WL HELP

Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys.

When enabled, any Alarm Tones will be transmitted over the wireline.

Default state is ENABLED.

- When ENABLED on the Channel screen, tone beeps are sent out over the
     wireline and are mixed with a received analog call
- The tones are sent out in analog mode only in conventional systems
- The tones are transmitted every 10 seconds
- The tones are NOT sent out during ASTRO calls
- The tones are sent to the local speaker all the time and are heard
     provided the speaker is turned on.

The number of beeps generated identifies a specific alarm:

1 beep  = battery revert
2 beeps = PA failure or PA low
3 beeps = TX or Rx synthesizer out of lock
4 beeps = battery over voltage

*max_code_detect,A
MAX CODE DETECT WINDOW HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired Max Code Detect Window time in this field. Value may
range between 0 and 120 milliseconds.

Default value is 80 milliseconds.

*takeover_EOM_l,A
TAKEOVER EOM LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired Takeover EOM Length time in this field. Value may
range between 0 and 255 milliseconds.

Default value is 80 milliseconds.

*fade_timer,A
TX CODE DETECT FADE TIMER HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired TX Code Detect Fade Timer value in this field. Value may
range between 0 and 255 milliseconds.

Default value is 10 milliseconds.

*DC_glitch_len,A
DC GLITCH LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired DC Glitch Length value in this field. Value may range
between 0 and 50 milliseconds.

Default value is 34 milliseconds.

*min_EOM_len,A
MINIMUM EOM LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired Minimum EOM Length value in this field. Value may range
between 0 and 255 milliseconds.

Default value is 80 milliseconds.

*clr_ptt_delay,A
CLEAR PTT DELAY HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired Clear PTT Delay value in this field. Value may range
between 0 and 255 milliseconds.

Default value is 90 milliseconds.

*clr_rcv_delay,A
CLEAR RECEIVER DELAY HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Enter the desired Clear Receiver Delay value in this field. Value may
range between 0 and 255 milliseconds.

Default value is 90 milliseconds.

*advanced_info_gen_help,A
CHANGE/VIEW:RF CONFIGURATION HELP

The parameters listed on this screen normally are not required to be
adjusted for proper system operation. However, for more complete
flexibility of configuration, they may be adjusted as required.

NOTE: The SECURENET-related parameters may be changed even if the
station is not currently enabled for Secure operation (See the
SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen). If SECURENET is not enabled,
the user will be warned that normal station operation will not
be affected by the changes.

*monitor_type,A
MONITOR TYPE HELP

The Monitor Type may be selected between COLOR and MONO. If the RSS is
installed on a computer which is not color capable, the RSS will not
allow COLOR to be selected. If in MONO mode, no color selections for
the various text lines will be visible.

NOTE: If operating in COLOR mode on a laptop and the highlighted cursor
contrast is not acceptable, select MONO mode.

Once all color settings have been completed, press F8 to Save these
settings to disk. If desired, F9 will restore the default color values.

*text_color,A
TEXT COLOR HELP

Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done to move to the next field.

*status_ln_color,A
STATUS LINE COLOR HELP

Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done to move to the next field.

*msg_ln_color,A
MESSAGE LINE COLOR HELP

Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done to move to the next field.

*highlight_color,A
HIGHLIGHT COLOR HELP

Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done to move to the next field.

*outline_color,A
SCREEN OUTLINE COLOR HELP

Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done to move to the next field.

*bkgnd_color,A
BACKGROUND COLOR HELP

Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press
ENTER when done to move to the next field.

*color_help,A
SCREEN COLOR CONFIGURATION HELP

Set the desired display colors on this screen. If operating on a computer
which is not color capable, the RSS will default to Monitor Type MONO and
will not allow COLOR to be selected. NOTE:  Most laptop computers are
color capable - if operating a laptop in COLOR mode and the highlighted
cursor contrast is not acceptable, select MONO mode.

Once all color settings have been completed, press F8 to Save these
settings to disk. If desired, F9 will restore the default color values.

Function Keys Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this help screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Not used.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - SAVE color settings to disk file.

     F9  - RESET DEFAULT color settings.

     F10 - Exit to Computer Configuration Menu.

*codeplug_directory,A
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP

Enter the desired directory pathname where the codeplug is stored into
this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.

Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.

When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.

Pressing the F5 key will restore the directory name to the default
archive path name for the current version of the RSS.

*codeplug_filename,A
ENTER FILENAME HELP

Enter the desired filename in this field. Any legal MS-DOS filename
characters are allowed. (To select an existing file, the filename
highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).

Press Enter or TAB to select the file.

*dir_contents_sr_read_help,A
SELECT CODEPLUG FILE FROM LIST HELP

Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a codeplug file from the
given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME field.
To Read the file press the ENTER key.

Press the TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.

Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.

Press ESC or F10 to exit the READ CODEPLUG FILE screen without reading a
codeplug from a file.

*dir_contents_sr_write_help,A
OVERWRITE CODEPLUG FILE FROM LIST HELP

Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a codeplug file from the
given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME field.
To Overwrite the file press the ENTER key.

Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.

Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.

Press ESC or F10 to exit the WRITE CODEPLUG FILE screen without writing a
codeplug to a file.

*meter_menu,A
SERVICE:METERING MENU HELP

This menu contains selections for monitoring the station operation at
internal, predefined measurement points. The computer running the RSS
must be connected to the station under test to enter any of the
following Metering screens.

Once entered, the station will continually update the RSS display with
the values of the various measurements.

NOTE: Depending on how 'busy' the station is, an communications error may
sometimes be noted on attempting to exit the RSS metering screens. This
error is not serious and does not indicate a station problem.  If this
error is observed, try to exit the screen again.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Select Wireline Metering measurements.
           (Not available for DSS-III or Quantar Data Base Stations)

     F3  - Select Exciter/PA Metering measurements.

     F4  - Select Receiver Metering measurements. A pop-up window will
           appear to allow the selection of Receiver 1 or Receiver 2
           metering screens.

     F5  - Select Power Supply Metering measurements.

     F6  - Selects HSO/UHSO Metering measurements.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to the Service menu.

*meter_wireline,A
METER WIRELINE HELP

The Wireline Metering screen displays the type of Wireline Module present
in the station and the measured voltages of the power supplies to the 
Wireline Module.

*meter_exciter,A
METERING EXCITER HELP

The Exciter Metering screen displays the type of Exciter Module present
in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Exciter Module.

When the 'PA TEST MODE is ACTIVE' the PA will not act on any alarms that
it receives. Use PA TEST ON to turn test mode on.  PA TEST OFF turns the
test mode off again.

CAUTION: The station will still generate (report) alarms of the PA, but
         the built-in circuitry that protects the PA will be disabled
         (the protection built-in circuitry will not operate!).

Do NOT leave the station running on the 'PA TEST MODE' longer than it
is required!.

Exiting the screen will automatically order the station to exit the PA
TEST MODE.

*meter_pa,A
METERING POWER AMPLIFIER HELP

The Wattmeter readings are not accurate unless the station's Power Output 
has been properly aligned using the Alignment for Power Output which is 
available in the Alignment Menu. Stations shipping from the factory are 
properly aligned for Power Output.

The Power Amplifier Metering screen displays the type of PA Module present
in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the PA Module.

When the 'PA TEST MODE is ACTIVE' the PA will not act on any alarms that
it receives. Use PA TEST ON to turn test mode on.  PA TEST OFF turns the
test mode off again.

CAUTION: The station will still generate (report) alarms of the PA, but
         the built-in circuitry that protects the PA will be disabled
         (the protection built-in circuitry will not operate!).

Do NOT leave the station running on the 'PA TEST MODE' longer than it
is required!.

Exiting the screen will automatically order the station to exit the PA
TEST MODE.

*meter_receiver,A
METER RECEIVER HELP

The Receiver Metering screen displays the type of Receiver Module present
in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Receiver Module.

*meter_receiver2,A
METER RECEIVER 2 HELP

The Second Receiver Metering screen displays the type of Receiver Module
present as the second receiver in the station and the measured parameters
relevant to the Receiver Module.

*meter_power_supply,A
METER POWER SUPPLY HELP

The Power Supply Metering screen displays the type of Power Supply Module
present in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Power
Supply Module.

NOTE:  The Power Supply metering screen is only relevant for Quantar
stations. "N/A" (Not Applicable) will be displayed for all fields if the
station is a Quantro.

*access_code_table_number_help,A
ACCESS CODE TABLE NUMBER HELP

Enter the desired Access Code Table number in this field. To be accepted,
the Access Code table must exist. To the right of this field will be
displayed the current legal range of access code tables.

NOTE: To add or delete Access Code Tables, move to the next field before
pressing Add or Delete.

*squelch_type_help,A
SQUELCH TYPE HELP

Use the Up/Dn arrow keys to change the selection between CSQ, PL, and DPL.
Press Enter or TAB to move to the next field.

The Rx Squelch Type selected must match the values chosen at the Change/View
:Channel Information screen for the Rx Activation, Repeater Activation, and
Repeater Hold-In fields. If C or SC is selected for any of the above fields,
make certain that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the 
Rx PL/DPL Code field for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, 
this function will not work. (In this case, CSQ would not be a valid choice 
in the PL field in the Access Code Table screen).

*pl_dpl_code_help,A
PL/DPL CODE HELP

Enter the desired code value here to match the type chosen in the previous
field. Acceptable values are defined below. When PL is selected, either the
Code or the Frequency may be entered. The RSS will automatically display the
equivalent value in the field next to the value entered.

VALID PL CODES:

 CODE   FREQ (Hz)    CODE   FREQ (Hz)   CODE   FREQ (Hz)
  WA    74.4          WB    79.7         WZ    69.3
  XA    71.9          XB    77.0         XZ    67.0
  YA    85.4          YB    88.5         YZ    82.5
  ZA    94.8          ZB    97.4         ZZ    91.5
  M1    203.5         M2    210.7        M3    218.1
  M4    225.7         M5    233.6        M6    241.8
  M7    250.3         1A    103.5        1B    107.2
  1Z    100.0         2A    114.8        2B    118.8
  2Z    110.9         3A    127.3        3B    131.8
  3Z    123.0         4A    141.3        4B    146.2
  4Z    136.5         5A    156.7        5B    162.2
  5Z    151.4         6A    173.8        6B    179.9
  6Z    167.9         7A    192.8        7Z    186.2
  8Z    206.5         9Z    229.1        

VALID DPL CODES:

   023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 054, 065,
   071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 125, 131, 132,
   134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 165, 172, 174, 205,
   223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 251, 261, 263, 265, 271,
   306, 311, 315, 331, 343, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371,
   411, 412, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466,
   503, 506, 516, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627,
   631, 632, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732,
   734, 743, 754

UNSUPPORTED DPL CODES:
These are for special applications and are not 
part of the standard Quantar product offering.

053, 122, 212, 225, 246, 252, 266, 325, 425, 446, 
452, 455, 521, 525, 552, 564, 645, 652, 725, 726

*astro_carrier_squelch,A
Digital Carrier Squelch


Digital Carrier Squelch is a field used to enable or disable digital 
carrier squelch in a conventional station.  When this field is ENABLED,
the station will be capable of receiving any RX ASTRO Access Code
(between 000 and FFF), qualifying it as a valid ASTRO Network ID,
and will repeat the signal with the default transmit ASTRO Access 
Code of 293.  

When this field is ENABLED, both the RX and TX ASTRO Access Code Fields
are not editable.

When this field is DISABLED, the station will receive the RX ASTRO
Access Code specified by the user in the RX ASTRO Access Code Field,
qualifying it as a valid ASTRO Network ID and will repeat the 
signal with the TX ASTRO Access Code specified by the user.


*astro_voice_help,A
RX/TX ASTRO VOICE HELP

Enter the desired ASTRO codes into the RX and TX ASTRO VOICE fields
via the keyboard. Any hexadecimal value, range 000 to FFF may be entered.

NOTE: If the Modulation Type selected at the Service:Hardware Configuration
screen is not 'ASTRO CAPABLE', the RSS will not allow the user to edit
the RX or TX ASTRO VOICE FIELDS.

*channels_using_help,A
CHANNELS USING THIS TABLE HELP

NOTE: This field is view only. To change the channels using this table,
go to the Chg/View:Channel Information screen for that channel.

This field displays the current channels using this Access Code Table. 
Up to 16 channels may be displayed here. Use the Left/Right Arrow keys
to scroll through the displayed channels, or use the HOME and END keys to
move to the beginning or the end of the list.

If 16 or more channels are currently using this table, the message
"16+ CHANNELS ARE USING THIS ACCESS CODE TABLE" will be displayed.

*connect_tone_1_help,A
CONNECT TONE # 1 HELP

This is the System Connect Tone. Select one of the tones from the available
list. The Station requires that tone be received in order to provide repeat
function in analog systems.

The connect tone is a subaudible (below 300 Hz) tone that is transmitted
by a subscriber radio to the system, any time the unit is keyed. The site
and the radio unit MUST be programmed with the same value for the connect
tone.

NOTE:
For ASTRO CAI systems this field is used not only as the Analog Mode
Connect Tone, but it is also used to calculate the ASTRO Network ID.

The Connect Tones are 0 - 7 and they have the corresponding Frequency
(in Hz) next to the Connect Tone number.

Legal Choices are:  0 : 105.9 Hz
                    1 :  76.6 Hz
                    2 :  83.7 Hz
                    3 :  90.0 Hz
                    4 :  97.3 Hz
                    5 : 116.1 Hz
                    6 : 128.6 Hz
                    7 : 138.5 Hz

Default is '0 : 105.9 Hz'. (Connect Tone 0).


*connect_tone_2_help,A
CONNECT TONE # 2 HELP

This is a second programmable Connect Tone that is available when the DUAL 
CT option is selected for the RSTAT MODE field. Please refer to the RSTAT 
MODE help screen for more information on the use of this field.

Default value is: DISABLED

The connect tone is a subaudible (below 300 Hz) tone that is transmitted by 
a subscriber radio to the system, any time the unit is keyed. The site and 
the radio unit MUST be programmed with the same value for the connect tone.

The Connect Tones are 0 - 7 and they have the corresponding Frequency (in 
Hz) next to the Connect Tone number.

Legal Choices are:  0 : 105.9 Hz
                    1 :  76.6 Hz
                    2 :  83.7 Hz
                    3 :  90.0 Hz
                    4 :  97.3 Hz
                    5 : 116.1 Hz
                    6 : 128.6 Hz
                    7 : 138.5 Hz
                    DISABLED




*astro_access_code_help,A
Rx/Tx ASTRO ACCESS CODE HELP

When ASTRO operation is enabled, the Station will require a Network ID to
be defined. This Network ID is entered in this field, and it is composed
of three hex characters.

NOTE:
Both Rx ASTRO Access Code and Tx ASTRO Access Code MUST be the same in ASTRO
Trunked systems.

NOTE:
When the system is ASTRO CAI this field is calculated for the system
utilizing the Connect Tone number and the System ID and the field is not
editable.  Make sure that the correct System ID has been entered.  For 6809
systems the System ID is located on the 6809 Trunking Interface screen.

Valid Range for Network ID: 000 - FFF

*trunking_access_code_table_help,A
TRUNKING ACCESS CODE TABLE FORM HELP

This screen contains the Connect Tone fields and the Rx/Tx ASTRO Access Code
fields. The connect tones are used to provide repeat functionality when a
tone is received. The ASTRO Access Codes are used as Network IDs. A Network
ID is composed of three hex characters. ASTRO Access Codes are available
only if the Station is an ASTRO capable Station.

*wireline_config_gen_help,A
WIRELINE CONFIGURATION HELP

The Wireline Configuration screen allows the user to configure station
parameters related to the Wireline.  If Wireline is disabled at the Station
Configuration screen,  this screen will not be accessible.

See this individual field helps for more information.

*wireline_oper_help,A
WIRELINE OPERATION HELP

If Wireline is enabled at the Service:Hardware Configuration screen, this
field is editable and may be toggled between a subset of the following 
choices:

       2 WIRE HALF DUPLEX
       4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
       4 WIRE HALF DUPLEX
       6 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
       8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX

The subset displayed are the valid choices based on the configuration
of the station.

The initial default value is 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

If 2 Wire Half Duplex is selected, and the Station Type on the Station
Configuration screen has been set to Secure Capable, then make certain
that the SECURENET to Wireline field on the Wireline Configuration
screen is Disabled. Otherwise, improper station operation will result.

Hardware Jumper Changes (2 Wire/4 Wire):

NOTE: When changed between the 2 wire and the 4 wire configurations,
a jumper on the Wireline module MUST also be changed. For 2 wire,
jumper JU1010 should be moved to the upper position. For 4 wire,
jumper JU1010 should be moved to the lower position.
(The lower position is also marked by the white jumper symbol on the
PC board).

For further information, refer to the Wireline Interface Board Theory
of Operation section in the Station Installation Manual.

*simulcast_oper_help,A
SIMULCAST OPERATION HELP

This field should be ENABLED when the Station is used in a simulcast system.

Note:  When making a change to this field, a Reference Modulation 
Compensation alignment should be performed.

For Simulcast systems,  make certain that the following fields are set
properly if Simulcast is enabled:

Hardware Configuration:Frequency Reference = External - 5 or 10 MHz selected
RF Configuration:Repeater Operation = BASE
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = OFF (or user choice for Fall Back
						 In-Cabinet Repeat)
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = OFF (or user choice for Fall Back
						 In-Cabinet Repeat)
Channel Information: Call Sign = User Optional
Channel Information: Alarm Tones over Air = DISABLED
Wireline Configuration:Wireline Operation = 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
Wireline Configuration:Comparator = SPECTRA-TAC or DIGI-TAC or ASTRO-TAC or
				    ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC
Wireline Configuration:Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat = DISABLED (or user
						 choice of ENABLED)

When station is configured as Conventional and ASTRO, SELECT will be an
additional choice.  It allows non-Simulcast Analog Wireline transmissions.

*mrti_interface_help,A
MRTI INTERFACE HELP

Use this field to Select whether MRTI Interface is ENABLED or DISABLED.

The Microprocessor Radio Telephone Interface (or MRTI) is a hardware option
which bridges the base station with conventional telephone equipment to
allow subscribers to place telephone calls. MRTI can be operational only
for system types Conventional and 6809 SmartNet and is not compatible with
Simulcast. If MRTI interface is enabled, the base station will be
configured to be MRTI operational for every channel. (See the fields MRTI
Operation and MRTI Timeout Timer under the second page of the Channel
Information screen).

*main_standby_help,A
MAIN/STANDBY HELP

Choices are MAIN/STANDBY/DISABLED

This field can only be configured when the station is set as a Conventional,
Non-ASTRO, ENHANCED WildCard station.  When the station does not meet this
criteria, MAIN/STANDBY is DISABLED.

Setting this field to MAIN will delete any currently existing STANDBY 
tables in the WildCard Tables and insert the default MAIN tables at the
beginning of the WildCard Tables.

Setting this field to STANDBY will delete any currently existing MAIN 
tables in the WildCard Tables and insert the default STANDBY tables at 
the beginning of the WildCard Tables.

When this field is DISABLED, all MAIN/STANDBY tables will be deleted from
the WildCard Tables.

It is highly recommended NOT to alter the description in the MAIN/STANDBY 
tables as they may not be automatically deleted then.


*rt_rt_config_help,A
RT/RT CONFIGURATION HELP

The RT/RT CONFIGURATION indicates if the ASTRO Base Station is to be
connected to another ASTRO Base Station via the Wireline connection.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.

Initial default value is DISABLED.

*astro_spectra_help,A
COMPARATOR HELP

This field will allow you to select ASTRO-TAC, SPECTRA-TAC, DIGI-TAC,
ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC, or NONE.  The choices reflect the type of
comparator to which the station is connected.  The selection is provided
so that the station can make minor adjustments that allow operation
with each of these comparator configurations.  Other items affected are:
how the ASTRO and analog links are tested, and the setting of the
Status Tone Mute Timer. (For SPECTRA-TAC, this internal timer will be set to
20 msec; for DIGI-TAC, this internal timer will automatically be set to 0.)

This field also enables two RSS parameters: the Fall Back In-Cabinet
Repeat field and the Fall Back Timer field on the 6809 Trunking screen.

This field must be set to NONE in 2-wire systems.

NOTE:  In voting systems, the Wireline Time Out Timer (on page 2 of the
       Channel Screen) should normally be set to 0; that is, disabled.

       When subscribers talk back and forth, the comparator adds 
       a drop out delay to each transmission making the session 
       between susbscribers look like a long single WL transmission.  
       Thus the station may easily time out on the wireline 
       transmission.

       In ASTRO CAI systems, the comparator also adds a drop out 
       delay to the console transmission, thus making subscriber 
       to console sessions also look like a single long wireline 
       transmission to the station. For voting systems, both the 
       repeater time out timer and the wirelinetimeout timer should 
       be programmed in the comparator, not the station.


Voting Receivers and ASTRO capable stations:

For ASTRO-capable stations, if the COMPARATOR field is not set to
ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC and the Wireline Interface field is set to
V.24 HYBRID, then Analog Idle Link Check should be ENABLED.
(The Wireline Interface field and the Analog Idle Link Check field
are found on page 2 of the Wireline Configuration screen.)

For ASTRO-TAC Comparator hardware configurations, Status Tone will
be disabled and blanked.

For ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC comparators, Status Tone must be manually 
enabled.

Voting Receivers and non-ASTRO capable stations:

For Non-ASTRO hardware configurations, when COMPARATOR is SPECTRA-TAC or
DIGI-TAC alone, then Status Tone must also be manually ENABLED.

The Status Tone field is found on page 1 of the Wireline Configuration
screen. (In some systems the Status Tone field doesn't apply, therefore
it will not be shown on the screen).

Voting Receivers and Rx Notch Filter:

The Rx Notch Filter field should also be checked on page two of the 
MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen.  (This field only appears
for non-ASTRO systems). The Rx Notch Filter should be DISABLED (bypassed) 
unless all other voting receivers in the system are using a receive
wireline notch filter.

When COMPARATOR is not set to NONE, the Repeater Operation field on
the Change/View:RF Configuration screen will be set to BASE.

*fallback_cabin_help,A
FALLBACK IN-CABINET REPEAT HELP

A Quantar station configured as a BASE has two methods to enable
in cabinet repeat.  The first is the automatic mode which is configured
using the RSS in this screen.  This mode addresses automatic detection 
of a comparator failure to repeat.  The second mode is an external input
designed to be used manually to place the station into in-cabinet repeat
mode. This input is found on external connector 17, the 50 Pin TELCO
connector.

The use of these two modes is exclusive; that is, only one method can be
selected.  If the station is configured to use both modes simultaneously,
the station will not work properly.  The station will work correctly 
only when one of the methods is selected.

When Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is ENABLED, the Station will automatically 
fall back to in-cabinet repeat mode if the Spectra-TAC or DIGI-TAC or 
ASTRO-TAC comparator should fail to respond to a receive session.  When
receive activity is detected and meets the programmed criteria specified 
by the RX ACTIVATION paramters, the station starts the FALLBACK IN-
CABINET REPEAT timer. If the timer expires and a key up command has 
not been received by the station, the station will go into in-cabinet 
repeat mode. The station will then use the REPEATER ACTIVATION and the 
REPEATER HOLD IN paramters to gate the repeat function.

NOTE: This feature can be enabled in SIMULCAST systems. When this mode 
is enabled in simulcast systems, synchronization of transmitted audio, 
analog or digital from multiple stations is not possible. The system 
designer must take this into account so that only a few selected 
stations have this feature enabled to provide back up coverage and 
minimize the creation of overlap areas where the transmitted audio may 
not be able to be picked up by the subscribers.

NOTE: This feature does not work for SIMULCAST ASTRO 1.7 stations.


*fallback_timer_help,A
FALLBACK TIMER HELP

When Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is ENABLED, the Station waits the specified
time entered in this field, before starting a repeat session. The Station
starts the timer after a valid receive session is declared. The receive
session is declared when the receive qualifiers specified in the channel
information screen are met. As soon as a key up request is received from
the wireline, the timer is cancelled. If the  timer expires, that is, a key
up request has not been received on the wireline, then the Station will
enable the repeat function provided that the repeat qualifiers specified in
the channel information screen are met.

NOTE: For all Station Types except ASTRO CAI, setting the Fallback Timer 
set to 0 will disable the Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat function.

NOTE: For ASTRO or ASTRO CAI systems that utilize modems for connecting 
a station to a comparator, it is recommended that the fallback timer be 
set to a minimum of 500 msec.

NOTE: For SIMULCAST ASTRO_CAI 3.0 systems the fallback timer must be 
set to a minimum of 800 msec.
 
NOTE: Setting the fallback timer to 0 in ASTRO_CAI systems forces the
Fall Back mode to be entered only when the link between the station and
the comparator fails.  Normally the timer is utilized to wait for a
key up command from the comparator after a valid receive sequence is 
forwarded to the comparator.  The timer must be set to 0 in systems
where data or voice site steering is utilized.  If the timer is set
to a value other than 0 in a site-steered data or voice system, a non-
steered station will go into in-cabinet repeat mode after the timer
expires, creating an undesirable transmission.


*status_tone_help,A
WIRELINE STATUS TONE HELP

When ENABLED, the Wireline Status Tone will be set to 13db below
peak audio level as shown on the Alignment:Rx Wireline screen.

NOTE: Wireline Status Tone should only be enabled for Secure, SPECTRA-TAC,
DIGI-TAC, and ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC systems. Also, if Status
Tone is enabled, the Call Sign over Wireline field at the
Main:Change/View:Channel Information screen should be disabled.

This field is never enabled in 2-wire systems.

Initial default is DISABLED.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be 
aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX 
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).

*status_tone_frq_help,A
STATUS TONE FREQUENCY HELP

When Status Tone is Enabled via the Status Tone field,  Status tone will
be generated by the station at the frequency entered by the user in the
Status Tone Frequency field.

Initial default value is 2175 Hz.

Programmable range for Status Tone Frequency is 300 to 3400 Hz.

When ENABLED, the Wireline Status Tone will be set to 13db below
the Rx Wireline Level set at the SERVICE:ALIGN:RX WIRELINE screen.
(This value is typical only and may be changed at the Service:Rx Wireline
Alignment screen).

NOTE: Wireline Status Tone should only be enabled for Secure and Spectra-TAC
systems. Also, if Status Tone is enabled, the Call Sign over Wireline field
at the Main:Change/View:Channel Information screen should be disabled.

When DISABLED, no Wireline Status Tone will be used.

This field is never enabled in 2-wire systems.

Initial default is DISABLED.

NOTE: For Intellirepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be 
aligned.  Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established.  Refer to the RSS Manual,  the RX 
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details.  For Hybrid Links, Status Tone 
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).

*equalization_help,A
EQUALIZATION HELP

This field determines if equalization is performed on the station's analog
receive wireline output. Equalization is performed in analog voting sys-
tems to compensate for phone line frequency response differences of the
links between the station receivers and the voting comparator. If this
equalization field is ENABLED, equalization adjustment can be performed
using the Rx Wireline alignment screen.  If this field is DISABLED, the
Rx Wireline alignment screen will be non-functional.

Allowed selections for this field are ENABLED and DISABLED.

*rx_secure_to_wl_help,A
RX SECURENET TO WIRELINE HELP (SECURE ONLY)

Use the Up/Down arrow keys to toggle through the choices.

This field controls whether ASTRO or SECURENET signals are passed to the
wireline for ASTRO or SECURENET Systems respectfully.  When ENABLED, the 
received Rx SECURENET or ASTRO signals will be passed to the wireline. 
When DISABLED, the Wireline will not receive the SECURENET or ASTRO
Rx signal.

Initial default state is ENABLED.

If at the Option Configuration:Analog Wireline Operation field the
selected operation is 2 Wire Half Duplex, make certain that the SECURENET
to Wireline is Disabled. Otherwise, improper station operation will result.

*remote_control_gen_help,A
WIRELINE CONFIGURATION TRC/ASTRO HELP

Fields visible on this screen will change depending on the current system
configuration.  If the station is not ASTRO Capable, and the Wireline is
set to 4 WIRE on the Hardware Configuration screen,  this screen will
display the HLGT Frequency,  Automatic Level Control, and Tx and Rx Notch
Filter settings.  Please see the help for each of these fields for more
information.

If the station is ASTRO Capable, this screen will display the ASTRO Wire-
line Interface, Transmit Clock, Modem Input and Modem Output Levels, and
RT/RT Configuration fields.  Please see the help for each of these fields
for more information.

*remote_control_help,A
REMOTE CONTROL TYPE HELP

The Remote Control Type field shows the type of wireline protocol
used to control the station. The field is normally non-editable
and reflects the type of remote control required of other system
parameters including System Type and Modulation Type. For a 
Conventional system with Analog modulation the field may be used
to select between TRC and DC remote control. Otherwise the field
displays NONE, TRC or ASTRO depending on other system settings. 


*hlgt_frequency_help,A
HLGT FREQUENCY HELP

Enter the desired High Level Guard Tone Frequency in this field.

Value may range from 1900 Hz to 3000 Hz in 5 Hz increments.  When the 
System Type or Station Type changes on the Hardware Configuration screen,
the High Level Guard Tone Frequency will be set to the default, which
is 2175 Hz.

Due to a potential conflict, if the HLGT set is within 40 Hz of a
TRC Tone, ALL commands for that TRC Tone will be deleted.

*llgt_undetect_help,A
LLGT UNDETECT TIME HELP

Enter the desired Low Level Guard Tone Undetect Time in this field.

Value may range from 60 to 2000 milliseconds in 5 millisecond intervals.
(The station will round the entry to the nearest 5 millisecond interval).

Default value is 150 msec.

The Low Level Guard Tone Undetect Time is the time from the moment the
station no longer detects LLGT to the moment it will dekey. Delay
is provided to allow for dropouts on the wireline.

*auto_level_ctrl_help,A
AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) HELP

When ENABLED, the Station will automatically align the Wireline Input level
so that average voice will result in 60% of Max Deviation. In a typical
5 kHz Max Deviation System, this level will be 3 kHz. Average voice is a
level which is 6 dB below the High Level Guard Tone level.

NOTE: When ALC is ENABLED, the Tx Wireline alignment is NOT required.
      When ALC is DISABLED, the Tx Wireline alignment is highly recommended.

For IntelliRepeater systems, ALC should always be DISABLED.

*wl_tx_notch_filter_help,A
WIRELINE TX NOTCH FILTER HELP

This field is only applicable for Wireline Equipped stations. Changing
its setting on non-wireline equipped stations will have no effect on
station operation.

The Tx Notch filter setting may be selected between ENABLED and DISABLED.
When ENABLED, the Tx Notch filter will notch out High Level Guard Tone
and Low Level Guard Tone from the Tx audio path to prevent the guard
tone from being audible along with voice audio. The proper setting of
the Tx Notch filter is determined by your specific system equipment
and configuration.

*wl_rx_notch_filter_help,A
WIRELINE RX NOTCH FILTER HELP

This field is only applicable for Wireline Equipped stations. Changing
its setting on non-wireline equipped stations will have no effect on
station operation.

The Rx Notch filter setting may be selected between ENABLED and DISABLED.
When ENABLED, the Rx Notch filter will notch out voice at the guard tone
frequency to prevent station false detection of HLGT in 2 Wire Half
Duplex phone line systems. If this is not a problem for your installation
disabling the Rx Notch filter will improve voice audio quality.

There may be Spectra-TAC systems where the Rx Notch filter is needed in
the station.  The use of the filter is based on system design requirements.
For typical Spectra-TAC systems, the filter is usually ENABLED.  If it is
set to DISABLED, you could encounter falsing due to interference of 2175 Hz
components.

*astro_wl_interf_help,A
ASTRO WIRELINE INTERFACE HELP

In an ASTRO System, an external ASTRO link connection is established either
with an ASTRO modem or a V.24 interface. Each interface requires that a
unique module be installed as a daughter board on the wireline module and
the user needs to define which module is installed.

If the Wireline Interface field is set to V.24 HYBRID and the Comparator
field is not ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC, then Analog Idle Link Check
should be ENABLED.

For Trunked 6809 Astro-Only Simulcast systems that have Control Channel
capability, the Wireline Interface needs to be set to "Hybrid Link".
The Control Channel uses the analog path, and the Voice channel uses
the digital path.


*ir_wl_interf_help,A
ASTRO WIRELINE INTERFACE HELP

In an ASTRO System, an external ASTRO link connection is established either
with an ASTRO modem or a V.24 interface. Each interface requires that a
unique module be installed as a daughter board on the wireline module and
the user needs to define which module is installed.

*ext_tx_clock_help,A
EXTERNAL TRANSMIT CLOCK HELP

This field requires that the ASTRO Wireline Interface be V.24 and provides
the user with the option to select an external source for the transmit
clock. This feature is useful for Stations that are connected through micro-
wave channel banks where clock synchronization is best sourced from the 
channel bank.

*modem_rx_level_help,A
MODEM INPUT LEVEL HELP

The MODEM INPUT LEVEL which is the signal which comes from the Tx Wireline
is the desired receive level of the ASTRO Wireline modem.
This signal is received by the station, via the phone line, from the
connecting infrastructure equipment.

Valid choices are: 0  To -28 dBm
                   -9 To -37 dBm

Before starting the level optimization procedures, it is necessary to
know the parameters and specifications of each device related to the 
wireline levels and modem sensitivity.  Given below is the information 
related to each device. 

   Quantar/Quantro Station/Receiver & AstroTAC Receiver
 
   1.  Modem input sensitivity:  In the RSS use High 0 to -28 dBm
 
       The modem input level will be in the middle of the range -14 for
       unity gain and -21 for phone lines

   2.  Wireline output Levels:  QAM:     0 to -20 dBm in steps of 2 dB
                                Analog:  0 to -20 dBm in steps of 1 dB
                                
       NOTE:  The output of QAM and analog levels are independently set 
       through the RSS.  Refer to the current RSS manual for level 
       setting procedure.
       
Refer to "System Upgrade Manual for ASTRO Conventional System Release 1.5.1"
for more information.


       
*modem_tx_level_help,A
MODEM OUTPUT LEVEL HELP

The MODEM OUTPUT LEVEL is the signal which is sent to the Rx Wireline and
is the desired output level of the ASTRO Wireline modem.  This signal is
driven out of the station, down the phone line, to the connecting 
infrastructure equipment.

Valid range is 0 to -20 dBm.  Initial default is -11 dBm.

Before starting the level optimization procedures, it is necessary to
know the parameters and specifications of each device related to the 
wireline levels and modem sensitivity.  Given below is the information 
related to each device. 
 
   Quantar/Quantro Station/Receiver & AstroTAC Receiver
 
   1.  Modem input sensitivity:  In the RSS use High 0 to -28 dBm
 
       The modem input level will be in the middle of the range -14 for
       unity gain and -21 for phone lines

   2.  Wireline output Levels:  QAM:     0 to -20 dBm in steps of 2 dB
                                Analog:  0 to -20 dBm in steps of 1 dB
                                
       NOTE:  The output of QAM and analog levels are independently set 
       through the RSS.  Refer to the current RSS manual for level 
       setting procedure.
       
Refer to "System Upgrade Manual for ASTRO Conventional System Release 1.5.1"
for more information.


*rf_config_gen_help,A
RF CONFIGURATION HELP

The RF Configuration screen all the user to configure parameters that will
affect the RF being transmitted by the station.  Please see the individual
field helps for more information.  Actual fields editable on this screen
will vary depending on the station system configuration.

*call_sign_inter_help,A
CALL SIGN INTERVAL HELP

Enter the desired time interval between automatic transmissions
of the stations programmed call sign.

Value may range from 1 to 60 minutes.
Initial default value is 15 minutes.

NOTE: The station will transmit the call sign only if the station was
keyed up at least once during the time specified in the interval.

*max_deviation_help,A
MAX DEVIATION HELP

Enter the desired maximum deviation in percent for the current channel.

Although the RSS makes no restrictions on the percentage entered, the
station imposes a limit at about 94% to avoid exceeding the maximum
system deviation over tolerance and temperature.

Value may range from 0 % to 100 %.
Initial default value is 92%.

*ant_relay_delay_help,A
ANTENNA RELAY DELAY HELP

This field allows customization for a particular antenna
relay response time before keying the station.

Enter the desired antenna relay delay time in milliseconds.

Value may range from 30 to 900 milliseconds.
Initial default is 30 milliseconds.

*repeater_oper_help,A
REPEATER OPERATION HELP

The Repeater Operation may be toggled between REPEATER and BASE.

Repeater Operation is selected for Standalone Repeater systems. For Wide
Area Spectra/ASTRO-TAC operation, BASE operation should be selected.

*start_last_active_chn_help,A
STARTUP ON LAST ACTIVE CHANNEL HELP

When the station cycles through a Cold Reset or Warm Start, the startup 
channel will be the last active channel when this field is set to ENABLED. 
When DISABLED, the station will start up on the Startup channel as 
programmed on the MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:RF CONFIGURATION screen.

Use Up/Down arrow keys to toggle through the choices.

*startup_chn_help,A
STARTUP CHANNEL HELP

The Startup Channel is the channel that the station will select after Reset.

The Startup Channel has a legal range of 1 to the maximum number of channels
present in the station, up to 16.

Default is Channel 1.

*ir_startup_chn_help,A
IR STARTUP CHANNEL HELP

The Startup Channel is the channel that the station will select after Reset.

The Startup Channel has a legal range of 1 to the maximum number of 
repeaters present at the IR Site.

NOTE: The Startup Channel is the Repeater Number at the Site.

*rdlap_repeat_help,A
RDLAP REPEAT HELP

The RDLAP (Radio Data Link Access Protocol) REPEAT field is used to 
selectively enable or disable repeating ASTRO RDLAP data in an ASTRO
Repeater system configuration.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.

Initial default is DISABLED.

*rdlap_wl_dod_help,A
ASTRO RDLAP WIRELINE DROP OUT DELAY HELP

The ASTRO RDLAP Wireline Drop Out Delay field indicates the amount of hang
time added to the end of an RDLAP and Astro CAI WL transmission. 

Value may range from 0 to 255 seconds.
Initial default value is 0 sec.

*rx_code_timer_help,A
SECURE RX CODE DETECT FADE TIMER HELP

Enter the desired Rx Code Detect Fade Timer value in this field. 

NOTE: This field should only be edited if a Secure Capable Modulation Type
is selected at the MAIN:SERVICE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.

The legal range is 0 to 9999 msec.

Initial default value is 80 msec.

*fade_eom_timer_help,A
SECURE FADE EOM TIMER HELP (EOM TIME AT END OF FADE TIME)

Enter the desired Tx EOM Time at End of Fade Time value in this field.

NOTE: This field should only be edited if a Secure Capable Modulation Type
is selected at the MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.

The legal range is 0 to 9999 msec.

Initial default value is 80 msec.

*fast_keyup_help,A
FAST KEY-UP HELP

Fast Key-Up brings the transmitter to at least 90% programmed power
output from an external input, and routes either wideband (Gen Tx Data +/-)
or Aux Tx (Aux Tx) audio.  In wideband routing, the transmitter will be at
90% programmed power output in 10 milliseconds or less.  In Aux Tx routing,
the transmitter will be at 90% within 20 milliseconds.

This feature guarantees key-up times of 10 milliseconds (Wideband routing)
and 20 milliseconds (Aux Tx) for the following station types:

    900 MHz Quantar
    800 MHz Quantar and Quantro
    UHF Quantar
    VHF Quantro

VHF Quantar and UHF Quantro stations currently guarantee key-up times of 12
milliseconds (Wideband routing) and 20 milliseconds (Aux Tx routing).

This feature can only be enabled for Conventional Analog Non-Simulcast
systems with Enhanced WildCard only.

The choices for Fast Key-Up is DISABLED, WIDEBAND, and AUX TX.
The default for Fast Key-Up is DISABLED.

If wideband receive audio is required, a Wildcard table must be configured
to route discriminator audio to the Aux Rx port.  The Wildcard choice for
this option is "RXDSC-AUXRX ON."  Enabling Fast Key-up will not
automatically configure this table entry.

In order to ensure Fast Key-up times, the station must be dekeyed for at
least 30 milliseconds before asserting a Fast Key-up.  A Fast Key PTT
must remained keyed for at least 30 milliseconds to preserve normal
operation of the station.



*trunking_6809_gen_help,A
TRUNKING 6809 HELP

This screen allows the user to configure system parameters related to 6809
Trunking systems.  This screen is not editable in non-6809 Trunking systems.

*trunk_sys_type_help,A
TRUNKED SYSTEM TYPE HELP

The TRUNKED SYSTEM TYPE field indicates the type of trunked system the Base
Station is being used in.

Legal choices are: SMARTNET
                   SmartZone

Default is SMARTNET.

*rstat_mode_help,A
RSTAT MODE HELP

The RSTAT MODE field indicates if RSTAT should be toggled according to
normal RSTAT criteria, or if it should be toggled only according to the
state of connect tone detection.

This field affects the operation of the RSTAT control signal 
that the station provides to the 6809 Central Controller. 

There are two options for this field:
                   NORMAL
                   DUAL CT

Default is NORMAL.


NORMAL - (default) In this mode RSTAT is used to indicate the presence of a 
carrier frequency, on the specific channel, to the Central Controller.

DUAL CT - In this mode RSTAT will be used to indicate the presence of a 
second connect tone frequency to the Central Controller. When this option is 
selected a second connect tone field will be available for use on the ACCESS 
CODE table screen. Special firmware must be installed in the 6809 Central 
Controller in conjunction with this mode of operation. When this option is 
selected DUAL CT FAILSOFT ONLY mode cannot be enabled.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS RESERVED FOR USE BY MOTOROLA SERVICE PERSONNEL TO AID 
IN CONNECT TONE MIGRATION ON EXISTING SYSTEMS. THIS MODE IS NOT INTENDED FOR 
PERMANENT OR LONG TERM OPERATION.


*failsoft_help,A
FAILSOFT HELP

The FAILSOFT field indicates if the Base Station should enter failsoft mode
if the failsoft criteria is met.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value: ENABLED.

*line_trc_encode_help,A
FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE HELP

FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE is used to determine if a HLGT/LLGT TRC sequence is
sent down when the Base Station is in Failsoft.

If CONSOLE PRIORITY is set to ENABLED (on the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen)
and the STATION TYPE field is ANALOG ONLY (on the MAIN:SERVICE:STATION 
CONFIGURATION screen), then FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE must be set to ENABLED.
Otherwise, it must be set to DISABLED.

If FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE is ENABLED, then the STATUS TONE field (on the
CHANGE/VIEW:WIRELINE CONFIGURATION SCREEN) must be set to DISABLED.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value: DISABLED.

*trk_tickle_tot_help,A
TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE TIME OUT TIME HELP

The TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE TIME OUT TIME field indicates the amount of
time that activity has not been detected from the Failsoft source before
entering Failsoft.

Value may range from 1 to 72 seconds.

Initial default value is  1 sec and this value is normally used with a
Trunking Tickle Source of TX DATA LINE. If the Trunking Tickle Source 
is changed to the MUTE LINE, this field should be changed to 72 seconds.

*carrier_squelch_help,A
FAILSOFT CARRIER SQUELCH HELP

The FAILSOFT CARRIER SQUELCH field is used to indicate if the Base Stations
Rx and RPTR activation parameters should revert to S (Carrier Squelch Only)
when in Failsoft.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value: DISABLED

*dual_ct_only_help,A
FAILSOFT DUAL CT FAILSOFT ONLY HELP

The DUAL CT FAILSOFT ONLY field allows the station to respond to one or two 
connect tones when in failsoft.

The two options for this field are:
ENABLED
DISABLED

DISABLED - (default) This selection will cause the station to accept and 
respond to the connect tone value entered in the ACCESS CODE TABLE: CONNECT 
TONE #1 during failsoft operation.

ENABLED - This selection will cause the station to accept the selectable
connect tone value entered in the ACCESS CODE TABLE:CONNECT TONE #1 and 
in addition, the station will, by default, accept connect tone zero 
(0 : 105.9 HZ). This feature must be enabled to accommodate subscriber 
units that default (unselectable) to connect tone zero during failsoft.

NOTE:  When RSTAT MODE is set to DUAL CT this field is DISABLED.

*trk_tickle_src_help,A
TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE HELP

The TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE field indicates which 6809 input, MUTE LINE 
or TX DATA LINE, that is monitored to determine if the Base Station 
should enter failsoft. For Privacy Plus Systems, the TICKLE SOURCE is
normally set to MUTE LINE thus providing for SLOW FAILSOFT determination.
For Smartnet Systems, the TICKLE SOURCE is normally set to TX DATA LINE
thus providing for FAST FAILSOFT determination.

Legal choices are: MUTE LINE and TX DATA LINE.

Default is TX DATA LINE.

*pl_ct_disable_help,A
SMART CONNECT TONE DECODER HELP

The SMART CONNECT TONE DECODER field allows the trunked repeater to enter
repeat mode before connect tone is actually detected.  The trunked repeater
will remain in the repeat mode without detecting connect tone for the time
specified in the Smart Connect Tone Disable Delay Timer field.
 
Once connect tone is detected, the trunked repeater will terminate the
Smart Connect Tone Decoder function and remain in repeat mode until the 
Connect Tone is no longer detected, or Disconnect Tone is detected.

Smart Connect Tone Decoder function can be started by either detecting 
carrier (UNSQUELCH) or by detecting the mute line tickle pulse (MUTE 
TICKLE).

The Smart Connect Tone Decoder is NOT just for Repeatqualifiers.  It is 
actually for Receive qualifiers.  Meaning, that when "Mute Tickle" is 
selected, the "Analog Rx Activation" and  "Analog Rptr Activation" fields  
are made "S" (Carrier Squelch) for the first 700ms (or the SCT Disable 
Delay) instead of SC (default Carrier Sq. plus Connect Tone).

The function can be totally disabled by selecting DISABLED.

Legal choices are: DISABLED
                   MUTE TICKLE
                   UNSQUELCH

Default is MUTE TICKLE.

*disable_delay_help,A
SMART CONNECT TONE DISABLE DELAY HELP

The SMART CONNECT TONE DISABLE DELAY field indicates the time the trunked 
repeater will remain in the repeat mode without detecting connect tone.

Value may range from 0 to 1000 msec.
Initial default value: 700 msec.

*low_speed_data_help,A
LOW SPEED DATA DEVIATION HELP

The LOW SPEED DATA DEVIATION indicates the percentage of Full System
Deviation that is set for Low Speed TDATA.

Value may range from 0 to 25.0%.

Initial default value for 25 kHz channels: 17.0% or 850 Hz
Initial default value for 12.5 kHz channels: 18.0% or 450 Hz

*con_priority_help,A
CONSOLE PRIORITY HELP

The CONSOLE PRIORITY field indicates the presence of a console in a trunked
SMARTNET system.  This field applies to ANALOG, SECURENET and ASTRO systems.

Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value is DISABLED.

Console Priority and PTT Priorities:

Setting CONSOLE PRIORITY to ENABLED will also change the PTT Priorities to
change to W>R>L.  When DISABLED, the PTT Priorities will revert to R>W>L.


FOR ANALOG AND SECURENET SYSTEMS:
=================================
Console Priority and Failsoft:

If CONSOLE PRIORITY is ENABLED and the STATION TYPE field is set to ANALOG
ONLY (on the MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen), then the 6809
TRUNKING:FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE field must be set to ENABLED.

If CONSOLE PRIORITY is DISABLED, then the 6809 TRUNKING:FAILSOFT LINE TRC
ENCODE field must also be set to DISABLED.


Console Priority and TRC:

When CONSOLE PRIORITY is DISABLED, the TRC table is cleared.  When CONSOLE
PRIORITY is ENABLED, the TRC table is cleared and the guard tone frequency
is assigned the KEY command.  Note that the TRC table is non-editable for
6809 Trunking systems.


*frequency_ref_gen_help,A
FREQUENCY REFERENCE HELP

temporary help for FORM

*ref_selection_help,A
FREQUENCY REFERENCE HELP

The FREQUENCY REFERENCE indicates whether the Base Station is to utilize
the internal reference that comes standard with most products, or if a
higher stability reference is to be used.  The allowed choices for most
systems are:

INTERNAL - STANDARD
INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY
EXTERNAL - 10 MHZ
EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ

The default for most systems is INTERNAL - STANDARD.

NOTE:  For 900 MHz systems, the INTERNAL - STANDARD selection  is not a
valid selection.  The default selection for this case is EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ.

The INTERNAL HIGH selection requires an internal HSO/UHSO hardware card to
be installed in the station.

*rx_carrier_timer_help,A
RX CARRIER DETECT FADE TIMER HELP (ASTRO)

The Rx Carrier Detect Fade Timer will maintain the carrier detect qualifier
for the specified time value after losing carrier detect at the receiver.
This will help prevent the wireline modems from lost framing during brief
Rx fades of an analog receive call.

The legal range is 0 to 9999 msec.

Initial default value is 80 msec.

*rxline1,A
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR STEERING LINE 1 TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of Local Oscillator 1 on the
Receiver module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*rxline2,A
RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR STEERING LINE 2 TEST HELP

This test checks for proper operation of Local Oscillator 2 on the
Receiver module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*trc_commands,A
TRC COMMANDS HELP

For each Function Tone (FT) listed, enter the desired command sequence for
the station to execute when the tone is decoded. Up to eight separate
commands may be entered for each FT. Use the ENTER or TAB keys to move to
the next field,  or the Shift TAB key to move to the previous field.  The
Up/Dn arrow keys will move to the field directly above or below the current
field,  and the Page Up/Dn keys will move between TRC COMMAND pages. See
sample of TRC commands after the TRC Command List.

If the HLGT is set to within 40 Hz of a TRC Function Tone, that Function
Tone is not allowed to have any commands associated with it.

WARNING: Make sure all CHN XXX commands reference valid channel numbers.
	 If an undefined channel number is referenced from the TRC table,
	 inconsistent station operation may result.

NOTE: The station provides for three methods of keying up from the 
console, TRC, DC or EXT PTT.  In all cases the console audio is 
connected to Line 1. The three methods are exclusive and cannot be 
used at the same time.  To key up from the console use either 
TRC or DC or EXT PTT. Only one method should be used.

NOTE: There are two commands that were designed to handle changes in
station operation while maintaining proper control of a station which
is scanning.  These commands are SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME.  If an
external input causes the station to change any of its operating modes,
then the TRC, DC or WildCard action table that contains these
commands must also include the SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME commands.
Scan operation must be stopped, the change invoked in the station and
then SCAN can commence.  An example is as follows:

        EXAMPLE: SCAN SUSPEND    CHN 3     SCAN RESUME

                      COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS: 

   ALARM ON     This command will enable the alarm beeps to be routed as
		defined in the codeplug.  This command would normally
		follow an ALARM OFF command.

   ALARM OFF    This command will disable the alarms from being set to
                both the RF and the wireline as selected in the codeplug.
                Alarm beeps can be turned on again using the ALARM ON
                command.

   CHN XXX      Commands station to tune transmitter and receiver to the
                specified channel; channel must exist on the Channel
                Information table.
  
                Example:  CHN 002

   GATEACC ON   Enable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's to repeat.

   GATEACC OFF  Disable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's from
                repeating.

   KEY          Commands station to key transmitter and remain keyed as
                long as low level guard tone is received.

   KEY ON       Commands station to key transmitter indefinitely; trans-
                mitter may be de-keyed by the KEY OFF command.

   KEY OFF      Commands station to de-key transmitter.

   MORE         Commands station to look for next function tone.
                The MORE Command is not required for the Quantar/Quantro
                Station to look for the next function.  The Station will
		do this automatically.  The MORE Command is only provided
                to allow for complete compatibility with older Stations
                that did require this command.
                
   MONITOR      Commands station to turn on receiver-to-wireline audio
                path; overrides all squelch requirements, if any.
                
   MRTI ON      This command enables MRTI operation after it was disabled
                by a MRTI OFF command.

   MRTI OFF     This command will disable MRTI operation.  MRTI operation
                is always enabled at startup (RESET).

   RXPL ON      Commands station to turn on appropriate receiver squelch
                (as programmed in Channel Information table for affected
                channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

   RXPL OFF     Commands station to turn off appropriate squelch (as pro-
                grammed in Channel Information table for affected channel);
                includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

   RPT ON       Enables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will
                repeat when qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr Activation
                field in Channel Information table) are met.

   RPT OFF      Disables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will
                not repeat regardless of qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr
                Activation field in Channel Information table).

   SCAN ON      If the Scanning Receiver Option has been purchased, the
                station begins the scanning operation.  Scanning continues
                until it is turned off or suspended.  The scan begins on
                the first channel in the Scan List.

   SCAN OFF     Turns scanning off and the stations returns to the CURRENT
                channel.

   SCAN RESUME  If the scanning function has been suspended by the
                SCAN SUSPEND command and the scanning function is on,
                the station will restart the scan function on the SCAN
                channel.  SCAN RESUME restarts the scan timers.

   SCAN SUSPEND If the scanning function is on, the station will stop
                scanning and place the station on the CURRENT channel.
                If the scanning function is off, the station will ignore
                this command.

   SELALARM ON  This command will negate the effect of the SELALARM OFF
                command.  If an alarm condition exists and the beeps had
                been turned off by the SELALARM OFF command, this command
                will turn the alarm beeps back on.

   SELALARM OFF This command will turn off the alarm beeps to both the
                RF and wireline.  However, if a new alarm condition is
                established, then those beeps will be sent to either or
                both the RF and wireline depending on codeplug configuration.

   TXPL ON      Commands station to turn on appropriate transmitter squelch
                code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the
                affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

   TXPL OFF     Commands station to turn off appropriate transmitter squelch
                code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the
                affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

   WAIT xxxx    Commands station to wait certain amount of time before
                executing the next command. The units of the time for this
                command are milliseconds (ms) and the value will be 
		rounded to the nearest 10 milliseconds.

                Example: WAIT 1000
                (This command tells the station to wait for 1000 ms).


Sample TRC Commands
The following shows the typical TRC commands for a station programmed for
4 channel operation, and controlled by a 4 channel tone remote console:

GUARD TONE:  MORE
  2175 Hz

F TONE  01:  MON

F TONE  02:  CHN 001     KEY

F TONE  03:  CHN 002     KEY

F TONE  04:

F TONE  05:

F TONE  06:

F TONE  07:

F TONE  08:  CHN 003     KEY

F TONE  09:  CHN 004     KEY

F TONE  10:  MORE

F TONE  11:  MORE

F TONE  12:

F TONE  13:

F TONE  14:

F TONE  15:

*dc_commands
DC COMMANDS HELP

The DC Command Table defines for each DC current used in DC Remote
Control a series of commands the station should perform upon activation
of the current (DETECT) and deactivation of the current (UNDETECT). Up
to eight separate commands may be entered for each current DETECT and
UNDETECT state. Use the ENTER or TAB keys to move to the next field,
or the Shift TAB key to move to the previous field. The Up/Dn arrow
keys will move to the field directly above or below the current field,
and the Page Up/Dn keys will move between DC COMMAND pages.

WARNING: Make sure all CHN XXX commands reference valid channel numbers.
	 If an undefined channel number is referenced from the DC Command
	 Table, inconsistent station operation may result.


NOTE: The station provides for three methods of keying up from the 
console, TRC, DC or EXT PTT.  In all cases the console audio is 
connected to Line 1. The three methods are exclusive and cannot be 
used at the same time.  To key up from the console use either 
TRC or DC or EXT PTT. Only one method should be used.

NOTE: There are two commands that were designed to handle changes in
station operation while maintaining proper control of a station which
is scanning.  These commands are SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME.  If an
external input causes the station to change any of its operating modes,
then the TRC, DC or WildCard action table that contains these
commands must also include the SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME commands.
Scan operation must be stopped, the change invoked in the station and
then SCAN can commence.  An example is as follows:

        EXAMPLE: SCAN SUSPEND    CHN 3     SCAN RESUME

COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS:
ALARM ON This command will enable the alarm beeps to be routed as defined
in the codeplug. This command would normally follow an ALARM OFF command.

ALARM OFF This command will disable the alarms from being set to both
the RF and the wireline as selected in the codeplug. Alarm beeps can be
turned on again using the ALARM ON command.

CHN XXX Commands station to tune transmitter and receiver to the
specified channel; channel must exist on the Channel
Information table.  Example: CHN 002

GATEACC ON Enable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's to repeat.

GATEACC OFF Disable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's from
repeating.

KEY ON Commands station to key transmitter indefinitely; transmitter may
be de-keyed by the KEY OFF command. KEY OFF Commands station to de-key
transmitter.

MONITOR Commands station to turn on receiver-to-wireline audio path;
overrides all squelch requirements, if any.  

MRTI ON This command enables MRTI operation after it was disabled by 
a MRTI OFF command.

MRTI OFF This command will disable MRTI operation. MRTI operation is
always enabled at startup (RESET). RXPL ON Commands station to turn on
appropriate receiver squelch (as programmed in Channel Information
table for affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

RXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate squelch (as programmed
in Channel Information table for affected channel); includes CSQ, PL,
and DPL.

RPT ON Enables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will 	
repeat when qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr Activation field in
Channel Information table) are met.

RPT OFF Disables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will not
repeat regardless of qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr Activation field
in Channel Information table).

SCAN ON If the Scanning Receiver Option has been purchased, the
station begins the scanning operation.  Scanning continues until it is
turned off or suspended.  The scan begins on the first channel in the
Scan List.

SCAN OFF Turns scanning off and the stations returns to the CURRENT
channel.

SCAN RESUME  If the scanning function has been suspended by the SCAN
SUSPEND command and the scanning function is on, the station will
restart the scan function on the SCAN channel.  SCAN RESUME restarts
the scan timers.

SCAN SUSPEND If the scanning function is on, the station will stop
scanning and place the station on the CURRENT channel.  If the scanning
function is off, the station will ignore this command.
SELALARM ON This command will negate the effect of the SELALARM OFF
command. If an alarm condition exists and the beeps had been turned
off by the SELALARM OFF command, this command will turn the alarm
beeps back on.

SELALARM OFF This command will turn off the alarm beeps to both the
RF and wireline. However, if a new alarm condition is established,
then those beeps will be sent to either or both the RF and wireline
depending on codeplug configuration.

TXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate transmitter squelch
code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the affected
channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

TXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate transmitter squelch
code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the affected
channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.

WAIT xxxx Commands station to wait certain amount of time before
executing the next command. The units of the time for this command
are milliseconds (ms). Legal range is 1 to 2550 ms.
Example: WAIT 1000 (This command tells the station to wait for 1000 ms).

Sample DC Commands:

The following shows a typical DC command set for a station
programmed for 4 channel operation and controlled by a 4
channel DC remote console:

+12.5 ma  detect            CHN 2         KEY ON
          undetect          KEY OFF

+5.5 ma   detect            CHN 1         KEY ON
          undetect          KEY OFF

+2.5 ma   detect
          undetect

-2.5 ma   detect            MON
          undetect

-5.5 ma   detect            CHN 3         KEY ON
          undetect          KEY OFF

-12.5 ma  detect            CHN 4         KEY ON
          undetect          KEY OFF

*alarm_screen_help,A
STATUS REPORT SCREEN HELP

The RSS displays all of the status messages that the Connected Device has 
previously logged. Messages will be displayed in sets (groups) of 10 per 
screen.

To view the entire message use the Left-Arrow and Right-Arrow keys.
Status messages indicate (in order, left to right): First Occurrence of
message, Most Recent Occurrence of message, Number of times message has 
occurred, and description.  The user may refer to the RSS manual, 
Diagnostics and Status section for the proper action to take if a specific
alarm is seen.

The message text message may be too long to display on the screen.  Use the
Left/Right Arrow keys to scroll the display to view the entire message.

NOTE: The Status Message Report will only display messages that have already 
occurred. It will not display status messages as they occur.  For this 
ability, use the Service:Status Panel screen.

The Status Report Screen will also indicate the versions of Firmware present
in the device and the current codeplug version. This information will be
important for possible analysis of the Status Messages.

When connected to older version devices, some of the firmware version
fields may be blank.  This will also occur if the device does not have
the hardware installed, i.e., no Wireline module is present.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Save all status messages to a file.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - View the PREVIOUS set (group) of status messages.

     F6  - View the NEXT set (group) of status messages.

     F7  - Clear all the status messages.

     F8  - Save Alerts to File (for AstroTAC 3000 Comparator only)

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to the Service Menu.

Note: For the AstroTAC 3000 Comparator, the Save Alerts function is
provided.  This function will save the debug alert messages from the
comparator to a file.  However, this should only be done at the request
of Schaumburg Engineering.  Downloading the Alerts might take quite a
while and the channel performance of the comparator might be degraded
by this process.

*save_alarm_file,A
SAVE STATUS REPORT HELP

The Save Status Report function allows the user to save the current
Device's Status Report to a disk file that can be printed later. 

On the Save Status Report to File screen, the Directory Name field 
displays the current selected directory. Drive names and wildcards may 
be included.

The Filename field consists of a filename entered by the user.
A filename may be entered in one of two fashions. The first one is to type
the filename directly in the field. The second one is to navigate through
the files using the following keys in the section that lists all of the
files.

PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
           on one page.

Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.

Tab:      Moves cursor to the next field.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the previous field.

Right Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
             If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
             filename.

Left Arrow:  Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
             column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
             will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
             directory pathname may be entered.

Enter:    Will save the file that is displayed on the 'Enter Filename' line.
          If a file already exists, the user will be asked if he wants to
          overwrite it. Overwriting a file will create a '.bak' version of
          the original file.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Not used.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to the Status Report Screen.


*alarm_directory,A
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP

Enter the desired directory pathname where the status report is stored 
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.

Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.

When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.

*alarm_filename,A
ENTER FILENAME HELP

Enter the desired filename in this field. Any legal MS-DOS filename
characters are allowed. (To select an existing file, the filename
highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).

Press Enter or TAB to select the file.

*alarm_dir_contents_help,A
OVERWRITE STATUS REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP

Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a status report file from 
the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME 
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.

Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.

Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.

Press ESC or F10 to exit the WRITE STATUS REPORT FILE screen without 
writing the status report to a file.

*access_screen_help,A
CHANGE/VIEW:ACCESS CODE TABLE INFORMATION HELP

This screen is used to Add, Delete, and Modify access code table 
information.  Values entered will only apply to the currently selected 
access code table.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Add New Access Code Table to end of the List.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Will display previous Access Code Table in the List.

     F6  - Will display next Access Code Table in the List.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Delete Currently Displayed Access Code Table.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

NOTE: The added Access Code Table will always be added to the end of the
current channel list.

*option_screen_help,A
OPTIONS HELP

The Option Screen allows the user to configure the currently enabled
station features such as Wireline, Simulcast, and ASTRO operations. These
features are enabled at the MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.

Refer to the help for each individual field for specific information.

*read_codeplug_file,A
READ/MERGE FILE HELP

The Directory Name field displays the current selected directory. Drive
names and wildcards may be included.

The Filename field consists of a filename entered by the user.
A filename may be entered in one of two fashions. The first one is to type
the filename directly in the field. The second one is to navigate through
the files using the following keys in the section that lists all of the
files.

If the archive directory pathname was changed,  the Function Key F5 may
be used to restore the default pathname for the archive directory.

PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
           on one page.

Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.

Tab:      Moves cursor to the next field.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the previous field.

Right Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
             If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
             filename.

Left Arrow:  Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
             column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
             will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
             directory pathname may be entered.

Enter:    Will read the file that is displayed on the 'Enter Filename' line.


Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - View File Info.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Restore Archive Directory To Default Path Name.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to the Read/Save Codeplug Menu.

*save_codeplug_file,A
SAVE CODEPLUG HELP

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - Edit File Info.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Restore Archive Directory To Default Path Name.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to the Read/Save Codeplug Menu.

On the Save Codeplug to File screen, the Directory Name field displays
the current selected directory. Drive names and wildcards may be included.

The Filename field consists of a filename entered by the user.
A filename may be entered in one of two fashions. The first one is to type
the filename directly in the field. The second one is to navigate through
the files using the following keys in the section that lists all of the
files.

PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
           on one page.

Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.

Tab:      Moves cursor to the next field.

ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the previous field.

Right Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
             If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
             filename.

Left Arrow:  Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
             column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
             will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
             directory pathname may be entered.

Enter:    Will save the file that is displayed on the 'Enter Filename' line.
          If a file already exists, the user will be asked if he wants to
          overwrite it. Overwriting a file will create a '.bak' version of
          the original file.

*intellimenu_help,A
INTELLIREPEATER MENU HELP

This screen is the main menu used to program IntelliRepeaters.
Access each of the selections, program the necessary screens,
and proceed to the next menu selection until all screens required
at install have been accessed and programmed.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Site Frequency - Modify or view the Assigned Channel blocks,
                            and Channel spacing (VHF and UHF ONLY).

     F3  - Site General - Changing and viewing of general Site information.

     F4  - Site Timer   - Changing and viewing Site Time Out Timers.

     F5  - Radio ID Partitioning - Partition ID's for frequency band and
                                   modulation capabilities.

     F6  - Repeater General - Change/View individual repeater information.

     F7  - Repeater Summary - Viewing and reordering repeaters.

     F8  - Changing and viewing the RF Configuration information.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Main Menu.

*intellirepeater_gen,A
INTELLIREPEATER REPEATER INFORMATION HELP

This is screen help for the IntelliRepeater Repeater Operation screen.

This screen allows the user to setup channel-specific parameters for each
Intellirepeater in the system.  Refer to the individual field helps for
more information.

*repeater_number,A
REPEATER NUMBER HELP

This field indicates the number of the repeater whose data is currently
displayed. Repeater Number is used to uniquely identify each repeater
in the trunked system. Duplicate numbers are not allowed, and the assigned
number may range from 1 to the number of repeaters that exist for this site,
up to an absolute maximum of 28.

If Voice On Control is enabled at the Site General Screen,  only 4 repeaters
will be allowed to be programmed.

Enter the number of the repeater to be viewed. Press Enter or Tab to
display the repeater data.

NOTE:

Active Master Rank is no longer user-programmable!

RSS versions prior to Release 5.00.00 had a field on the Repeater 
Information screen called Active Master Rank that was set by the 
user to determine the order that Repeaters would become the Active 
Master for the purpose of assigning calls in a stand-alone Trunking 
system.

In RSS versions 5.00.00 and later,  this field is still present in 
the codeplug, but is no longer set directly by the user.  Instead, 
the RSS will automatically set the Active Master Rank to be the same 
as the Repeater Number.

No user programming of this field will be required in the future.

*active_master,A
ACTIVE MASTER RANK HELP

Sets the rank for the channel to become the ACTIVE MASTER.
The first repeater to power up will become the AM, so the only
time this enters in is if the AM fails and a new AM comes up.

Legal range is 1 through 99. 1 is the highest priority and 99 the lowest.

WARNING: Each repeater MUST be assigned a unique priority ranking.
If the user does not not configure all the repeater rankings properly,
the RSS will assign the next available ACTIVE MASTER RANK with the lowest
priority when the user exits the screen.

Changing the number to a lower value will increase the possibility that
this repeater will become the active master. Increase the value to
decrease the possibility of this repeater becoming the active master.

Enter the desired ranking in this field. Press Enter or Tab to move
to the next field.

*ir_serial_number,A
SERIAL NUMBER HELP

This field will indicate the serial number of the repeater that is assigned
the current repeater number. This field MUST have a serial number displayed
to be legal. When a new repeater is added to the site, a unique serial
number must be supplied or no more repeaters may be added to the list.

Enter the desired serial number in this field. Press Enter or Tab to
move to the next field.

*ir_rx_freq,A
IR RX FREQUENCY HELP

Receive frequency in MHz for the selected repeater.

Enter the desired Rx channel frequency for the Intellirepeater into this
field. The frequency range depends on the band selected.
Either digit keys, or the Up/Down arrow keys may be used to scroll
through the legal channel frequencies for this field.

For VHF or UHF ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently
legal block frequency ranges as entered at the MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:SITE
FREQUENCY screen.

For 800 Mhz ranges, This field is non-editable and will be automatically
calculated based on the entered Tx Channel Frequency.

The Rx Freq has an Rx Channel Number associated with it as designated
by the FCC.

*ir_tx_freq,A
IR TX FREQUENCY HELP

Transmit frequency in MHz for the selected repeater.

Enter the desired Tx channel frequency for the Intellirepeater into this
field. The frequency range depends on the band selected.
Either digit keys, or the Up/Down arrow keys may be used to scroll
through the legal channel frequencies for this field.

For VHF or UHF ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently
legal block frequency ranges as entered at the MAIN:CHANGE/VIEW:SITE
FREQUENCY screen.

For 800 Mhz ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently 
legal frequency range as determined at the Hardware Configuration:
Intellirepeater Frequency Band field.

The Tx Freq has a Tx Channel Number associated with it as designated
by the FCC.

*base_station_id,A
IR BASE STATION ID HELP

Enter the assigned Base Station ID for the site into this field. Press 
Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field.

If this field is completely blanked, then no Base Station ID will be
transmitted by the station. However, in this case, the Change/View:Repeater
Operation:BSI Capability Field must also be set to DISABLED, or improper
operation will result.

*ctrl_chan_cap,A
CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether the station is capable of operating as a CONTROL
CHANNEL station.

Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED. Only four channels may
have CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABILITY enabled.

If set DISABLED, the PREFERRED CONTROL CHANNEL RANK field is
set to 0 and skipped. If set ENABLED, the PREFERRED CONTROL
CHANNEL RANK field is set to 4 and may be edited.

Default is DISABLED.

Note: Control Channel Capability and Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB)
are incompatible. If either is ENABLED, the other may not be ENABLED.
Also Control Channel Capability and BSI Capability are similarly
incompatible when the site is not Voice on Control capable.

*pref_chn_cap,A
PREFERRED CONTROL CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether the repeater is the PREFERRED CONTROL CHANNEL station.

If the CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABLE field is DISABLED, this field is set to 
DISABLED and is non-editable.

Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Default is FALSE.

*pccr,A
PREFERRED CONTROL CHANNEL RANK HELP

Use this field to assign a preference level for the channel's
use as the control channel. The field may only be accessed if the
repeater is control channel capable and is set to 0 and skipped if
if CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABILITY is DISABLED. Values range from 1 to 4
with a value of 1 representing the most preferred control channel
and a value of 4 representing the least preferred. Multiple
control channel capable repeaters may carry the same preference
level. Note only four channels may be selected as control channel
capable.

This field obsoletes the Preferred Control Capability field.
If an earlier version codeplug is used with this RSS, the
codeplug entry for this obsolete field is used in determining the
value for the Preferred Control Channel Rank. The value entered in
the Preferred Control Channel Rank field is used to assign the
appropriate value for this field in the codeplug.

NOTE:

Active Master Rank is no longer user-programmable!

RSS versions prior to Release 5.00.00 had a field on the Repeater
Information screen called Active Master Rank that was set by the
user to determine the order that Repeaters would become the Active
Master for the purpose of assigning calls in a stand-alone Trunking
system.

In RSS versions 5.00.00 and later,  this field is still present in
the codeplug, but is no longer set directly by the user.  Instead,
the RSS will automatically set the Active Master Rank to be the same
as the Repeater Number.

No user programming of this field will be required in the future.

Possible choices are 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Default value is 4.

*dispatch_cap,A
DISPATCH CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether or not the station can make dispatch calls.

Possible choices are DISABLED, ANALOG, ASTRO, and ANALOG/ASTRO.
If the station is not ASTRO CAPABLE, then the ASTRO and ANALOG/ASTRO
choices are not available.

If not DISABLED, the Intellirepeater channel is capable of being used as a
Dispatch (voice) channel.

If DISABLED, the channel may not be configured for Dispatch operation.

Default is ANALOG.

*failsoft_capable,A
FAILSOFT CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether the repeater can operate in failsoft mode.

Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.

If ENABLED, the IntelliRepeater channel is capable of Failsoft operation.
If DISABLED, the IntelliRepeater may not be selected for Failsoft operation.

Default is DISABLED.

Note Failsoft Capability and Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB) are
mutually exclusive. If either is ENABLED, the other may not be ENABLED.

*bsi_capable,A
BSI (BASE STATION IDENTIFICATION) CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether the repeater can operate in the BSI operating mode.

Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.

If ENABLED, the Intellirepeater channel is capable of sending BSI, and
the BSI field cannot be blank.

If DISABLED, the Intellirepeater may not be selected to send BSI.

Default is DISABLED.

NOTE: BSI and Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB) are mutually exclusive.
If either is ENABLED, the other may not be ENABLED. Also BSI Capability
and Control Channel Capability are similarly incompatible when the site
is not Voice on Control capable.


*dfb_capable,A
DYNAMIC FREQUENCY BLOCKING CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether the repeater is capable of Dynamic Frequency
Blocking. When set ENABLED the channel may not be used to
transmit control, voice, BSI or Failsoft information when the
site is operating in site trunking mode. However, if the site
is operating in wide trunking mode the channel will be used to
transmit voice information only at the discretion of the
site controller.

NOTE: DFB Capability is incompatible with the following
repeater configurations:

   Control Channel Capability.
   BSI Capability.
   Failsoft Capability.

If DFB is ENABLED, none of the three fields may be ENABLED.
If any of the three fields are ENABLED, DFB cannot be ENABLED.

Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Default is DISABLED.

*secure_capable,A
SECURE CAPABILITY HELP

Indicates whether the repeater is capable of operating in Secure mode.

Possible choices are DISABLED, 12 KBIT, and ASTRO SECURE.
If the station is ASTRO CAPABLE, then the 12 KBIT choice is not available.
If the station is not ASTRO CAPABLE, then the ASTRO SECURE choice is not
available.

Default is DISABLED.

*protect_capable_help,A
PROTECT CAPABILITY HELP

Will protect this repeater from being assigned to a dispatch call
unless it is the only repeater available.

Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Default is DISABLED.

*illegal_car_lvl_help,A
ILLEGAL CARRIER SIGNAL LEVEL HELP

This field defines in dBm the level for this repeater above which
the received signal is considered to be illegal carrier if this
repeater is not assigned to a call.

*subband_capable_help,A
SUBBAND CAPABILITY HELP

Determines if this repeater is capable of being configured to handle the
subscriber subband mapping, as entered in the Change/View:Full/Subband
Partition Screen.



*manager_ip_addr_1_help,A
MANAGER IP ADDRESS 1 HELP

This is the IP address of the first permanent manager registered.



Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255

NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.



*port_one_help,A
MANAGER 1 PORT NUMBER HELP

This is the primary port number where traps are to be sent.




*manager_ip_addr_2_help,A
MANAGER IP ADDRESS 2 HELP

This is the IP address of the second permanent manager registered.



Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255

NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.


*port_two_help,A
MANAGER 2 PORT NUMBER HELP

This is the port number of the second manager where traps are to be sent.



*ip_address_def_help,A
ZONE CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS HELP

This screen allows the user to enter Zone Controller IP Addresses.
These IP addresses allow the station to communicate with the
Zone Controllers.


*zc_ip_addr_1_help,A
ZONE CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS 1 HELP

This field defines the first IP address of the Zone Controller.



Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255

NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.



*zc_ip_addr_2_help,A
ZONE CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS 2 HELP

This field defines the second IP address of the Zone Controller.



Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255

NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.

*site_general_help,A
SITE GENERAL HELP

    This screen allows the user to view and change IntelliRepeater
    Site operating parameters.

*system_id_50_help,A
SYSTEM ID HELP

This is an address assigned to a system within the domain of the network.

Legal range is 001 to FFE (hexadecimal).  The default is 1.


*network_id_help,A
NETWORK ID HELP

This is an address assigned to the Wide Area Commuication Network.

Legal range is 0001 to FFFE (hexadecimal).  The default is 1


*rfss_id_help,A
RF SYBSYSTEM ID HELP

This is an address field that indicates the identity of the RF Subsystem.
The RF Subsystem ID must be unique within a system.

Legal range is 1 to 7.  The default is 1.

*lra_id_help,A
LOCATION REGISTRATION AREA ID HELP

This is an address assigned to the region of a Registration area in which
a sucscriber unit may roam without the need to indicate a location update.

This is a fixed value and is not editable.


*control_channel_slot_size_help,A
CONTROL CHANNEL SLOT SIZE HELP

Each control channel message is called a packet which is an integral
multiples of micro slots.  This field defines the number of micro slots
required per packet. Selecting SMALL sets the number of micro slots
per frame to 5 (37.5 ms), selecting LARGE sets the micro slots per frame
to 6 (45 ms).

Legal choices are SMALL and LARGE.  Default is SMALL.

*access_code_index_help,A
ACCESS CODE INDEX HELP

This field is also to calculate the ASTRO Access Code

Legal Choices are HEX 0 - F
Default is 0

*access_code_50_help
ACCESS CODE HELP


This field is calculated for the system utilizing the Access Code Index
and the System ID.

This field is not editable.

Make sure that the correct System ID has been entered.



*system_id_help,A
SYSTEM ID HELP

Enter the assigned system ID into this field.

Valid range is 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal).

No default value exists for this field.

*site_id_help,A
SITE ID HELP

This is a two-digit field for entry of the repeater SITE ID number
used to inform the Zone Controller of the site identity.
Distinguishes one site in a SmartZone system from the others.

Legal range is 1 to 64.  The default is 1.


*site_type_help,A
SITE TYPE HELP

Denotes whether the site is part of a SmartZone (Remote) system or is a
STANDALONE system which operates by itself as part of its normal operation.

Legal choices are REMOTE and STANDALONE. 
Default is REMOTE.

*min_rptr_trunk_help,A
MINIMUM REPEATERS TO TRUNK HELP

Minimum number of repeaters which the site needs when its in standalone
mode before the site can commence trunking operations. This parameter is
only used if the site is supposed to be standalone, or if it gets temp-
orarily disconnected from the Zone Controller in a SmartZone system.

The default value is 2, unless there is only 1 repeater. In this case,
the default will be 1 (and the legal range will begin at 1).
This field will automatically be decremented by the RSS if the user deletes
repeaters from the Repeater General screen (only after the number of
repeaters drops below the MTT).

*token_rptr_help,A
IR TOKEN REPEATER HELP

The repeater number which decides which side of a site should trunk if
the MINIMUM REPEATERS TO TRUNK field has been set to half the repeaters
at the site and the site is split into two equal sites.

Legal range is 1 to Number of Repeaters.
Default is 1.
This field will automatically be decremented by the RSS if the user deletes
repeaters from the Repeater General screen (only after the number of
repeaters drops below the TOKEN REPEATER NUMBER).

*connect_tone_help,A
CONNECT TONE HELP

The connect tone is a subaudible (below 300 Hz) tone that is transmitted
by a subscriber radio to the system, any time the unit is keyed. The site
and the radio unit MUST be programmed with the same value for the connect
tone.

NOTE:
For ASTRO CAI systems this field is used not only as the Analog Mode
Connect Tone, but is also used to calculate the ASTRO Network ID.

The Connect Tones are 0 - 7 and they have the corresponding Frequency
(in Hz) next to the Connect Tone number.

Legal Choices are:  0 : 105.9 Hz
                    1 :  76.6 Hz
                    2 :  83.7 Hz
                    3 :  90.0 Hz
                    4 :  97.3 Hz
                    5 : 116.1 Hz
                    6 : 128.6 Hz
                    7 : 138.5 Hz

Default is '0 : 105.9 Hz'. (Connect Tone 0).

*cc_tod_rollover_help,A
CONTROL CHANNEL TIME OF DAY ROLLOVER HELP

Specifies the time in HH:MM:SS format when the CONTROL CHANNEL ROLLOVER
occurs. An entry of 00:00:00 indicates no rollover.

The time at which every day the control channel duties will get switched 
from the current control channel to another control capable repeater.
This parameter is used to ensure equal wear and tear amongst all control
capable repeaters. It is recommended that the rollover time chosen be
during a period of little or no call traffic in order to minimize system 
disruption. A setting of 0 disables the rolling over of the control channel.

Important Note: A new value for this parameter will not take effect until
after the expiration of the timer which contains the old value. For example,
let's say the current time is 1:00am and the CC Time of Day Rollover value
is set to 3:00am. If the value of CC Time of Day Rollover is changed to
2:00am, the Control Channel Rollover will occur at 3:00am and will occur
at 2:00am the following day and every day thereafter until it is changed
again.

Similarly, if the current time is 1:00am and the CC Time of Day Rollover
value is 2:00am and it gets changed to 3:00am, the Control Channel Rollover
will occur at 2:00am and at 3:00am, and then at 3:00am every day thereafter.

Enter the time in the HH:MM:SS format.
Where HH ranges from 00 through 24 (hours)
      MM ranges from 00 through 59 (minutes)
      SS ranges from 00 through 59 (seconds)

Examples:
      00:00:00 means No rollover.
      12:00:00 means rollover at Noon.
      24:00:00 means rollover at Midnight.

The default is 00:00:00 (no rollover).

*secure_type_help,A
SECURE TYPE HELP

The secure method under which the site operates when processing
all secure calls.

Legal choices are: NONE
                   ANALOG
                   ASTRO

Default is NONE.

*site_timers_help,A
SITE TIMER HELP

The Site Timer screen allows the user to program all of the timers
for the IntelliRepeater Site.

*recovery_tot_help,A
LINK RECOVERY TIME OUT TIMER HELP

Sets the delay time before noting the loss or recovery of the data
link between the station and zone controller and the time before
exiting failsoft operation after a link recovery.

This time out value is used for three different timers:

1) Minimum Failsoft time, which is the time period the site stays in 
failsoft after all conditions have been met for Trunking.

2) Link Timeout time, which is the time period the link repeater waits
after losing communication with the Zone Controller before declaring the
link to be down.

3) Site Recovery time, which is how long the active master repeater waits
after the conditions for wide area trunking are met before it begins the
process which hands over control of the site to the Zone Controller.

Legal range is 15 to 99 seconds.
Default is 15 seconds.

*carrier_malf_tot_help,A
CARRIER MALFUNCTION TIME OUT TIMER HELP

The time period which determines how long an interfering carrier must 
be present on a deassigned channel before that channel is removed from
system use. An entry of 254 seconds disables the timeout.

Legal range is 1 to 254 seconds. 
Default is 50 seconds.

*carrier_tot_help,A
CARRIER/GRANT TIME OUT TIMER HELP

The time period for which an assigned voice channel remains unmuted and
active, receiving only carrier and no handshake connect tones. After the
timeout expires, the channel assumes the disconnect phase.

Legal range is 200 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 500 ms.

*message_trunk_tot_help,A
MESSAGE TRUNK TIME OUT TIMER HELP

The time period for which a voice channel remains active after receiving
disconnect from the subscriber unit (repeater dropout time). After the
timeout expires, the channel is deassigned.

Legal range is 100 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 1000 ms.

*fade_tot_help,A
FADE TIME OUT TIMER HELP

The time period for which an assigned voice channel remains active with
no tones or carrier received. After the timeout expires, the channel is 
deassigned. Timer is activated after call processing fails to detect 
disconnect tone after loss of the low speed connect tone.

Legal range is 100 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 1200 ms.

*intellirepeater_freq,A
IR FREQUENCY HELP

This is screen provides a block of Base Frequencies to be used by
Repeaters which have VHF or UHF bands.

*rx_base_freq,A
IR RX BASE FREQUENCY HELP

Base Frequency is the beginning frequency for each block of channels.
Default is 0.000000 MHz.

*tx_base_freq,A
IR TX BASE FREQUENCY HELP

Base Frequency is the beginning frequency for each block of channels.
Default is 0.000000 MHz.

*channel_spacing,A
IR CHANNEL SPACING HELP

User programmable for the FCC allocated channel spacing.
Legal values are: 5, 6.25, 10, 12.5, 15, 18.75, 20.25, 
                 30, 31.25, 35, 37.5, 40, 43.75, or 50 kHz.
Default is 5 kHz.

*number_of_channels,A
IR NUMBER OF CHANNELS HELP

VHF and UHF trunking spectrum is divided by FCC into 380 possible
Rx channels and 380 possible Tx channels (per band).

Default is 380.

*desired_rpt_pos_help,A
DESIRED REPEATER POSITION HELP

Enter a New Repeater Number in this column for any repeater that needs to
be repositioned at the site.

If the position of a Repeater does not match the physical location of the
Repeater at the site, then reorder the Repeater site data by entering the
right position of the Repeater in the New Rptr # column.

If a Repeater does not need to be reorder/repositioned you may leave its
New Rptr # field blank (the RSS will default blank fields to the value
stored in the Current Rptr # field).

The Up/Dn Arrow keys will move the cursor to any desired Repeater that 
needs to be renumbered.

*repeater_sum_help,A
REPEATER SUMMARY HELP

This is an overview of the Repeaters at the site.
It shows the Repeaters Positions at the site, along with the Repeaters
Serial Numbers, and the Receive and Transmit Frequencies.

The RSS can display up to 10 Repeaters at any time.

Use Up/Dn arrow keys, Tab/Shift Tab, and Enter keys to view more Repeaters
or to select a repeater that is not visible.

All the Repeaters can be reordered or repositioned by entering the desired
position in the New Rptr # column.

*delete_archive_file,A
DELETE ARCHIVE FILE HELP

Enter the filename of the file to be deleted.  Filename may be either typed
or press Tab to move the cursor to the filename fields, and use the arrow
keys to move to the desired file.  Press Enter to select the file for
deletion.  (The RSS will ask you if this file should be deleted).

*archive_dir,A
ARCHIVE DIRECTORY HELP

Enter the name of the archive directory where you desire to delete or
restore files.  Press Enter or Tab when done to move to the Filename
selection field.

*filename,A
FILENAME HELP

Indicate the desired file by moving the cursor by means of the arrow keys.
Select the file by pressing Enter.

*create_directory_path,A
FILE MAINTENANCE:CREATE DIRECTORY PATH HELP

This screen allows the user to create a new directory from within the RSS.
Directories to be created can be on any currently legal drive.

*pathname_help,A
DIRECTORY PATHNAME HELP

Any and all directories indicated in the path that currently do not exist
will be created.

*backup_pathname,A
BACKUP DIRECTORY NAME HELP

Enter the name of the directory that the files should be backed up
(restored) from. Note that all the files in the backup directory will be
transferred to the current archive directory, overwriting files that already
exist with the same name.

*upgrade_codeplug_help,A
UPGRADE CODEPLUG HELP

Because of feature enhancements and modifications, the codeplug stored in
the station will periodically be upgraded to a new version.  This typically
will be caused by internal configuration parameters being modified for
improved station operation. The latest RSS program will know what features
have been added or modified. To prevent the user from having to manually
re-enter all the station data into a new default codeplug, the Upgrade
utility was created. The utility allows the user to upgrade any previous
codeplug version to the latest known codeplug version without having to 
re-type any customer data.

WARNING:  Upgrading codeplugs should only be done when the user is upgrading
the station firmware.  Upgrading codeplugs without also replacing the
firmware may result in improper station operation.

NOTE: This procedure will only upgrade the image of the codeplug stored in
the RSS.  The new upgraded codeplug still needs to be downloaded to the
station to take affect.

This screen displays two items:
1) The current version of the codeplug being used by the RSS.
2) Latest version of the codeplug to which the RSS can upgrade.

To upgrade a Codeplug, load the codeplug into the RSS from the station or 
from the archive file and then proceed to the Service:Upgrade Codeplug
screen. Type Enter or Tab and the RSS will upgrade your Codeplug Data to
the latest known version.  By default, the RSS displays the latest version 
of Codeplug Data to which it can upgrade.

Once the codeplug has been upgraded, archived, and programmed to the station, 
the station should be powered down, and the firmware replaced before 
attempting to return the station to normal service.


*next_cp_ver_help,A
UPGRADE TO CODEPLUG VERSION HELP

To Upgrade press <ENTER> or <TAB>.
To cancel Upgrade operation press <ESC> or <F10>.

For further information, press F1 to view the screen help.

*voice_on_cntrl_help,A
VOICE ON CONTROL HELP

Voice on Control (VOC) is a method of assigning the Intellirepeater control
channel as a voice channel when all the existing voice channels are busy.
As soon as a voice channel is idle, the freed voice channel will become the
controlling channel to handle any pending alarms and emergencies and to 
assume all control channel responsibilities.

Initial default value is DISABLED.

When changing the value from DISABLED to ENABLED, the Minimum Repeaters to 
Trunk will be set to 1, the VOC Activation Timer on the INTELLIREPEATER:SITE
TIMER screen will be set to 2 seconds, and the Pended Emergency Request 
Timer on the INTELLIREPEATER:SITE TIMER screen will be set to 0.5 seconds.

When changing the value from ENABLED to DISABLED, Minimum Repeaters to Trunk
will be set to 2, unless there is only one repeater which will keep it at 1.
The VOC Activation Timer and the Pended Emergency Request Timer on the
INTELLIREPEATER:SITE TIMER screen will be set to zero, and will not be
displayed on the screen. Note Voice on Control cannot be set DISABLED if
any repeater is both Control Channel Capable and BSI Capable, and a warning
is displayed if this is attempted. To disable Voice On Control, ensure
no repeater is both Control Channel Capable and BSI Capable via the
Repeater Information screen.

*voc_act_time_help,A
VOC ACTIVATION TIME HELP

This field sets the maximum amount of time that call processing will wait
before deciding to convert the site to voice on control mode.

When the Voice on Control field on the INTELLIREPEATER:SITE GENERAL screen 
gets set from DISABLED to ENABLED, this field defaults to 2 seconds.  When 
the Voice on Control field gets set from ENABLED to DISABLED, this field 
gets set to 0 and is no longer displayed on the INTELLIREPEATER:SITE GENERAL 
screen.

The valid range for this field is 1 - 15 seconds in 1 second increments.

*max_cc_range_help,A
MAXIMUM CONTROL CHANNEL RANGE HELP

The Maximum Control Channel Range field is NOT intended to be used to
increase overall system coverage.  The purpose of this field is to extend
the control channel range by increasing the ISW window size ONLY IF
sufficient RF power exists. Increasing the ISW window size by means of 
changes to this parameter will also increase the probability of false
ISW decodes.

The default value '<75 mi/125 km' is acceptable for 99% of trunking systems.
Only systems operating under special conditions will require a change to
this field value.

The distances given in the choice list are to be considered approximate,
since actual range depends on many different atmospheric and terrain
conditions.

*pend_emrg_req_help,A
PENDED EMERGENCY REQUEST TIME HELP

This field sets the maximum amount of time the station will wait before 
allowing subscriber units to send in any pending requests.  Before this  
timer expires, only pended affiliations, alarms, emergency call requests, 
and interconnect reject requests are sent.

When the Voice on Control field on the INTELLIREPEATER:SITE GENERAL screen 
gets set from DISABLED to ENABLED, this field defaults to 0.5 seconds.  When 
the Voice on Control field gets set from ENABLED to DISABLED, this field 
gets set to 0 and is no longer displayed on the INTELLIREPEATER:SITE GENERAL 
screen.

The valid range for this field is 0.5 - 5.0 seconds in .1 second increments.

*sl_deb_tot,A
SITE LINK DEBOUNCE TIMER


This field defines the period of time between attempts to bring the
site link back up


Legal range is 2 to 120 seconds.
Default is 2 seconds.


*simul_tx_filter_help,A
ASTRO SIMULCAST TX FILTER HELP

This field is only applicable for ASTRO Simulcast systems.

WIDE PULSE is used for 25 kHz channels;
NARROW PULSE is normally used for 12.5 kHz channels.

At the system designer's discretion, NARROW PULSE could be used on 25 kHz
channels.

Select the appropriate Simulcast Tx Filter for the system.

*simul_rev_burst_help,A
ANALOG SIMULCAST REVERSE BURST HELP

This field is only applicable for Conventional Simulcast systems.

Field choices are INTERNAL and EXTERNAL.

Select the appropriate Simulcast Reverse Burst for the system. 

CHOICE = INTERNAL
When EXT_PTT is removed, the station routes the external PL input 
through a phase shift network and after 180 milliseconds dekeys 
the station.  Thus the station generates a transmit signal with 
reverse bursts.

CHOICE = EXTERNAL
When EXT_PTT is removed, the station immediately dekeys.  The 
external equipment is responsible for generating  the phase 
shift for PL and also handles the 180 millisecond timing controls 
needed to generate reverse burst.


*uhso_align_help,A
INTERNAL UHSO ALIGNMENT HELP

The HSO/UHSO reference modules frequency stability performance is governed
by both long term (i.e. aging) and short term variations (i.e.
temperature).  Therefore, the proper procedure for aligning a stations
reference requires that both types of variations are taken into account.

If a station is configured with an INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY module, then
upon powerup of the station, both the receiver and exciter will stay in an
OUT OF LOCK state for 7.5 minutes.  If desired, the technician can override
this timer by pressing UHSO ENABLE (F5) .  The ovenized element requires
7.5 minutes before it is guaranteed to operate with +/- 0.1ppm of the
desired frequency.  However, it is recommended that the station be turned
on for at least 60 minutes in order to guarantee an oven retrace of 10 ppb
for the UHSO and 20 ppb for the HSO.

Although the units are aligned at the factory, for optimal performance they
should be aligned in the field after 14 days of operation.  The long term
aging process of the ovenized element is most severe during the first 14
days of operation.

The reference alignment procedure for the INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY can be
broken down into two main components.  The first component is the
adjustment of the INTERNAL - STANDARD.  This is necessary to ensure optimal
station performance over time.  The second is the alignment of the
INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY  (HSO/UHSO).

NOTE:  The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.

Station output power is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150W.  For
higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W.  This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.

Procedure:

Step 1
To adjust the INTERNAL - STANDARD, the technician should select either
Auto-Net 5 MHz (F3 ) or Manual Net (F4).

A)  Auto-Net 5 MHz  (F3):

The station will automatically align the INTERNAL STANDARD to the INTERNAL
HIGH STABILITY.

NOTE:  The time required to successfully Auto-net depends upon the
frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high stability
reference.   This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the
highest accuracy possible.  Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD
is from the high stability source,  the time required for netting could be
significantly greater than this minimum period.

During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON LED will flash and the
receiver and exciter will indicate an OUT OF LOCK condition.  When
Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an appropriate
message.  The technician should proceed to step 2.

B)  Manual Net
The RSS will  display  the Reference Oscillator screen and the technician
will be capable of adjusting the INTERNAL STD via the Page Up/Dn keys and
the arrow keys.  The technician should refer to the help text on the
Reference Oscillator screen , or the RSS Manual for further instructions.


Step 2:

Once the INTERNAL STANDARD has been adjusted, the technician should proceed
to align the INTERNAL HIGH STABILITY  (HSO/UHSO).  The technician should
keyup the station and measure the transmit frequency.  To fine adjust the
frequency, press the Up or Down Arrows to move the oscillator in individual
steps.  To coarse adjust the frequency, press the Page Up or Down keys to
move the oscillator in 10 step jumps.   Each step corresponds to
approximately 0.25ppb for the UHSO or approximately 1ppb for the HSO.  The
frequency error should be made as small as possible.  Dekey the station
(F9), then press F8 to store the desired reference oscillator frequency.

*meter_uhso,A
UHSO METERING HELP

The HSO/UHSO Metering screen displays various measured parameters
relevant to the operation of this module.  A block diagram and the basic
theory of operation of this module is included in the stations
installation manual.

If this module is not present in the station, then all metering points
will display 'N/A'.

14.2V
This point indicates the currently measured voltage of the A+ signal
from the station's power supply to the UHSO module.

10V REGULATOR
This point indicates the currently measured voltage of the 10 Volt
regulator on the HSO/UHSO module.

5V SUPPLY IN
This point indicates the currently measured voltage of the 5 Volt source
from the power supply.

8 VOLT OSC REFERENCE
This point indicates the functionality of the HSO or UHSO ovenized
element by displaying the measured value of its internal 8 Volt regulator.

OSC STR LINE (0-8V)
This point indicates the steering line voltage input to the ovenized
HSO/UHSO crystal element.

OSC FREQUENCY
This point indicates whether the 5MHz signal is being properly generated
and distributed from the HSO/UHSO module.

VTEMP RT200
This point indicates  the ambient temperature in the HSO/UHSO module.

5 MHz REFERENCE
This point indicates if the 5 MHz signal has been received by the station
control board.

*uhso_diag_help,A
UHSO DIAGNOSTICS TESTS HELP

The UHSO Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the UHSO
module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the UHSO Module is within specified operational limits.

The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now).

Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.

Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Main:Service:Diagnostic Menu.

Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.

The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.

Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.

To run the Run Now Tests selected, press F8. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or 
planned for implementation.  If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.

To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.

*uhso_14pt2,A
UHSO 14.2 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks for proper distribution of the A+ signal from the
station's power supply to the UHSO module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_10v,A
UHSO 10 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks for proper operation of the 10 Volt regulator on the
HSO/UHSO module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_5v,A
UHSO 5 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks for proper distribution of the 5 Volt source from the
power supply.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_8v,A
UHSO 8 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks the steering line voltage input to the ovenized
HSO/UHSO crystal element.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_osc_str,A
UHSO OSC STR DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks the steering line voltage input to the ovenized
HSO/UHSO crystal element.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_osc_freq,A
UHSO OSC FREQ DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test verifies that the 5MHz signal is being properly generated and
distributed from the HSO/UHSO module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_vtemp1,A
UHSO VTEMP1 DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks the ambient temperature in the module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_vtemp2,A
UHSO VTEMP2 DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test checks the ambient temperature in the module.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*uhso_5mhz_act,A
UHSO 5 MHZ ACTIVE DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This test verifies that the 5MHz signal has been received by the station
control board.

Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.

*partition_screen_help,A
FULL/SUB BAND PARTITIONING HELP

IR RSS must be setup to allow SUB BAND Restricted users to function
correctly in IR site trunking.

Some radios cannot operate in a FULL BAND but only in a portion of the 
band which is available to the system.  These radios are referred to as
SUB BAND restricted.  For example early 800 MHz radios are capable of 
operating in the 806 to 821 MHz range only (these are referred to as 806 
radios and should be considered restricted SUB BAND), later radios were
expanded to operate in the 806 to 824 MHz range (these are referred to as 
821 radios and can be considered FULL BAND).

Subscriber units using individual or talkgroup IDs designated as belonging 
to a restricted SUB BAND will only use channels that are designated as 
SUB BAND capable.

Subscriber units using individual or talkgroup IDs designated as belonging 
to a non-restricted SUB BAND will only use channels that are either 
SUB BAND capable or FULL BAND capable, respectively.

The IntelliRepeater needs to know the band in which the radio is capable 
of working so that it can be assigned to a channel within that band when 
it is involved in a call either as the receiver or the initiator.

The RSS provides the user with a table where he can specify which radios
are FULL BAND and which are SUB BAND.  A user may enter up to 32 ranges 
in this table.  Each range (and each number in the range) represents BOTH
an Individual Radio ID and a Talkgroup ID.  

NOTE:  All 4 Hexadecimal places represent the Radio ID, but only the 3 most 
significant hexadecimal places represent a Talkgroup ID (the right most 
digit is dropped for Talkgroup representation).  An example of an entry in
the table may be:
                0010 - 002F   SUB BAND

This represents 32 Hex Radio IDs (0010 - 002F) and 2 Talkgroup IDs (001 
and 002) that are SUB BAND/Capable.

Since Range Table IDs specify both Radios and Talkgroups with one range, 
the following rules will help in definition of the range table.


1) Up to 32 ranges may be specified
2) The smallest range defined needs to include 16 Range Table IDs or one 
   full talkgroup. Ranges must be defined in 16 Range Table ID increments 
   (since one Talkgroup is represented by 16 Table range IDs).
3) The total number of radio IDs specified = total number of Range Table    
   IDs specified
4) The total number of Talkgroup IDs specified = total number of Range
   Table IDs specified + 16
5) The ID is the Hexadecimal equivalent of the individual ID - 700000.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this Help screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - ADD RANGE - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter a
	   new range of IDs.  This range will be added with a default band 
	   and modulation.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - DELETE RANGE - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter
           the range of IDs to delete.  This range will then be folded
           into the next higher band unless only the beginning of the
           range is deleted.  In this case it will be folded into the
           previous band.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Previous Menu.

*add_new_range,A
ADD NEW RANGE / DELETE RANGE HELP TEXT

Use this screen to enter the Low Id and High ID of a range to be added
or deleted.

The Low ID must end in a 0 and the High ID must end in an F so that there
are no talkgroups split into different ranges.

The ID is the Hexadecimal equivalent of the individual ID - 700000.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this Help screen.

     F2  - ACCEPT - if valid, accept the ranges that have been entered to
           be added or deleted.

     F3  - Not used.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - CANCEL - do not add or delete any range.


*fade_tolerance_help,A
ASTRO FADE TOLERANCE HELP

Under weak signal or fading conditions, the message that terminates a
received ASTRO voice call may be missed by the station.  In case the
terminator is missed, a secondary mechanism has been put in place to end
the voice call.  This mechanism looks at the frame sync in front of every
ASTRO voice frame to see how many are missed in a row.  The number of
missed frames is a parameter set by the user to optimize his system's
operation.  This parameter allows the user to set the number of missed
frame syncs in a row which will terminate the call.  The number
can be set to 1, 2, or 3.  The normal setting for this parameter is 3.

For simulcast or wide area ASTRO System 1.7 and earlier applications, the 
number is lowered to 1. For all other applications is it normally set to 
3. For all ASTRO CAI System 3.0 applications it is normally set to 3.



Choices are: 1 FRAME
             2 FRAMES
             3 FRAMES

Initial default value is 3 FRAMES.

*mcs_field_help,A
MULTI-CODED SQUELCH HELP

Multi-Coded Squelch (MCS) will only operate in Conventional Analog
stations, and Simulcast Operation must be disabled.

This field should be set to MULTI-PL ONLY when the Station is used in a
Multi-Coded Squelch system.

The MCS Option is used in a multitude of system applications, and was
designed specifically for community repeater systems.

LIMITATIONS
For Conventional Multi-Coded Squelch (non-ASTRO) systems, make certain
that the following fields are set properly if MCS is enabled:

Channel Information: Rx Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = SC or C
Channel Information: Noise Canceller = DISABLED

Only one channel is allowed if MCS is set to MULTI-PL ONLY.

The Multi-Coded Squelch Option is a tiered option. The initial release
of the option is the low tier option which provides the user with the
choice of 12 unique PLs and one DPL for Rx Code. This choice is affected 
by selecting MULTI-PL ONLY as the choice for the Multi-Coded Squelch 
option on the MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.  A subsequent 
release is planned to allow the user the choice of 37 PLs and 24 DPLs.  
This higher tier option will be enabled by selecting MULTI-PL/MULTI-DPL 
as a choice for Multi-Coded Squelch. This higher tier option is not 
currently available.

*failsoft_mod_help,A
FAILSOFT MODULATION TYPE HELP

Valid choices are: ASTRO, ANALOG

During failsoft operation, the station must have predefined which mode it
will transmit in.  The subscribers will detect this mode and only allow
the subscribers to reply in the received mode.  If the selection is set
to ASTRO, the station reverts to transmitting ASTRO failsoft LC data
messages.  If the selection is set to ANALOG, the station reverts to
transmitting analog failsoft low speed data.  Analog mode also allows
Securenet operation provided the site is set up for Securenet operation.

NOTE: The system administrator must make sure that the failsoft settings
      for each channel match up with the settings in the subscriber
      radios.

*site_number_help,A
SITE NUMBER HELP

For simulcast stations or voting receivers, the station needs to know its
"sub-site" number.  This number is used to identify the station for
diagnostic reporting as well as for certain infrastructure messages.  The
system installer must be careful that this number matches the sub-site
number known.  (For the 6809 determined by placement of the remote site to
prime site cabling on the 6809 ACB board.)  This field is used for 
Conventional and 6809 trunking systems, and will only be editable for 
voting systems, i.e., Wireline Configuration:Comparator not set to NONE.

For ASTRO systems this field assigns to the station an address by which 
other infrastructure devices may identify it. In a wide area ASTRO system
a dispatcher may "site-steer" transmissions to a particular base station
by selecting that station on the console prior to transmitting. The 
comparator then routes traffic to that station utilizing that station's 
site number value.

NOTE: Release 7 expanded the use of Site ID in the Wireline communications
protocol between the Station and the Comparator.  The proper setting of 
Site Number between Release 6 and 7/8 and 9 is different.  See chart 
below for the proper site number ranges.

Station Release    |  -> REL6+     |REL7.x and 8.x |     REL 9 ->  | 
===================================================================|
   6809 Smart Net  |  Must Be 0    |   Must Be 1   |   Must Be 0   |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
   6809 Smart Zone |  Must Be 0    |   Must Be 1   |   Must Be 0   |
   Single Site     |               |               |               |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
   6809 Simulcast  |      1-16     |      1-16     |      1-16     |
      Voting       |               |               |               |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
   Conventional    |      0-63     |      0-63     |      0-63     |
--------------------------------------------------------------------






*csc_log_chan_help,A
CSC LOGICAL CHANNEL HELP

For ASTRO stations, the standard interface cable between the 6809
controller and the base station does not carry enough information for an
ASTRO station to operate properly.  Another cable is needed to tap into
the Zone Controller's RSC-CSC interface to provide call grants to the
stations.  Since all stations are hooked to the same cable, a mechanism
is needed to identify what messages go with what station.  The logical
channel number is the answer, which is stored in the station's codeplug.
This field is only for 6809 trunking systems.

The value range for the field is 1 to 32 (decimal).  The default value
is 29.

*mcs_help,A
MULTI-CODED SQUELCH HELP

Multi-Coded Squelch will only operate in Conventional Analog stations,
and Simulcast Operation must be disabled.

The Multi-Coded Squelch field on the Hardware Configuration screen
should be ENABLED when the Station is used in a Multi-Coded Squelch
system.

NOTE: The MCS option is used in a multitude of system applications,
      and was designed specifically for community repeater systems.

LIMITATIONS
For Conventional Multi-Coded Squelch (non-ASTRO) systems,  make certain
that the following fields are set properly if MCS is enabled:

Channel Information: Rx Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = SC or C
Channel Information: Noise Canceller = DISABLED

Only one channel is allowed if MCS is set to MULTI-PL ONLY.

The MCS Accounting Information, which includes the Total Time and
Number of Calls for each User entry, is backed up to Non-Volatile
Memory on the Station once every day at 2:00am.

The Multi-Coded Squelch Option is a tiered option. The initial release
of the option is the low tier option which provides the user with the
choice of 12 unique PLs and one DPL for Rx Code. This choice is affected 
by selecting MULTI-PL ONLY as the choice for the Multi-Coded Squelch 
option on the MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.  A subsequent 
release is planned to allow the user the choice of 37 PLs and 24 DPLs.  
This higher tier option will be enabled by selecting MULTI-PL/MULTI-DPL 
as a choice for Multi-Coded Squelch. This higher tier option is not 
currently available.

INCOMPATIBLE PL CODES:

ZB is not compatible with ZA or 1Z
8Z is not compatible with M1 or M2
9Z is not compatible with M4 or M5

*mcs_entry_help,A
MULTI-CODED SQUELCH ENTRY HELP

The user may highlight a Multi-Coded Squelch entry number by using the
Up/Dn Arrow keys to move to the desired entry number.  The entries on
the screen are scrollable, meaning that if there are more entries in
memory than are visible on the screen,  the user may use the Up/Dn,
Pg Up/Dn, Home, and End keys to scroll through the complete list of
entries.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F3  - Save the MCS Table to a file.

     F5  - Modify the current MCS User Number.

     F8  - Clear the MCS Accounting Information on the Station.

     F10 - Exit to the Service Menu.

F3 - Save the MCS Table to a file.

  The Save MCS Report window will be displayed.  The user will be able
  to enter a directory and filename where the MCS Data will be stored
  as it appears on the MCS screen.

F5 - Modify the current MCS User Number.

  Once the cursor is placed on an entry number, the user may press
  function key F5 to modify that particular entry.  If the cursor was 
  placed on a blank entry number,  the user may add a new entry to the 
  MCS table by pressing F5 and accepting the modifications.  For this
  release, the MCS table can contain up to 12 unique PL values and one 
  DPL value for the Rx Code.

  In order to delete an entry,  the user must choose DELETE from the 
  User Access field.  When the codeplug is sent to the station,  the 
  RSS will delete the tagged user entry just before sending the 
  codeplug to the station.

  RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE: In order to maintain the integrity of the MCS 
  Accounting data, we suggest that when an MCS entry is to be changed,
  first mark the current entry DISABLED and then add a new entry to
  the MCS Table.  Then, when it is time to do the periodical clearing
  of the MCS Accounting Information (F8), the old entry can be set to
  DELETE.

F8 - Clear the MCS Accounting Information on the Station

  This key should be used when the user wishes to clear (set to zero) 
  the MCS Accounting Information on the Station.  This includes the
  Total Time and Number of Calls for each MCS Entry.  Performing this 
  function should be done on a periodical basis at planned intervals.
  It is also advised that the MCS Report (F3) be saved to disk prior 
  to clearing the MCS Accounting Information.

VALID PL CODES:

 CODE   FREQ (Hz)    CODE   FREQ (Hz)   CODE   FREQ (Hz)

  WA    74.4          WB    79.7         XA    71.9
  XB    77.0          YA    85.4         YB    88.5
  YZ    82.5          ZA    94.8         ZB    97.4
  ZZ    91.5          M1    203.5        M2    210.7
  M3    218.1         M4    225.7        M5    233.6
  M6    241.8         M7    250.3        1A    103.5
  1B    107.2         1Z    100.0        2A    114.8
  2B    118.8         2Z    110.9        3A    127.3
  3B    131.8         3Z    123.0        4A    141.3
  4B    146.2         4Z    136.5        5A    156.7
  5B    162.2         5Z    151.4        6A    173.8
  6B    179.9         6Z    167.9        7A    192.8
  7Z    186.2         8Z    206.5        9Z    229.1

VALID DPL CODES:

   023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 054, 065,
   071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 125, 131, 132,
   134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 165, 172, 174, 205,
   223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 251, 261, 263, 265, 271,
   306, 311, 315, 331, 343, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371,
   411, 412, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466,
   503, 506, 516, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627,
   631, 632, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732,
   734, 743, 754

INCOMPATIBLE PL CODES:

ZB is not compatible with ZA or 1Z
8Z is not compatible with M1 or M2
9Z is not compatible with M4 or M5

UNSUPPORTED DPL CODES:
These are for special applications and are not 
part of the standard Quantar product offering.

053, 122, 212, 225, 246, 252, 266, 325, 425, 446, 
452, 455, 521, 525, 552, 564, 645, 652, 725, 726

*mcs_code_type_help,A
MULTI-CODED SQUELCH CODE TYPE HELP

The user may select either the PL or DPL codetype by using the Up/Dn
Arrow keys.  This selection will determine the valid choices for the
Rx and Tx Code fields.

The Multi-Coded Squelch Option is a tiered option. The initial release
of the option is the low tier option which provides the user with the
choice of 12 unique PLs and one DPL for Rx Code. This choice is affected 
by selecting MULTI-PL ONLY as the choice for the Multi-Coded Squelch 
option on the MAIN:SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.  For this 
initial release, no more than 12 PLs and no more than one DPL can be 
entered for the Rx Code.

*mcs_code_help,A
PL/DPL CODE/FREQUENCY HELP

Enter the desired code or frequency value here. Acceptable values
are defined below. When a PL Code is selected, either the Code or
the Frequency may be entered in the appropriate field. The RSS will
automatically display the corresponding frequency for a given PL Code,
and the corresponding PL Code for a given PL Frequency.

VALID PL CODES:

 CODE   FREQ (Hz)    CODE   FREQ (Hz)   CODE   FREQ (Hz)

  WA    74.4          WB    79.7         XA    71.9
  XB    77.0          YA    85.4         YB    88.5
  YZ    82.5          ZA    94.8         ZB    97.4
  ZZ    91.5          M1    203.5        M2    210.7
  M3    218.1         M4    225.7        M5    233.6
  M6    241.8         M7    250.3        1A    103.5
  1B    107.2         1Z    100.0        2A    114.8
  2B    118.8         2Z    110.9        3A    127.3
  3B    131.8         3Z    123.0        4A    141.3
  4B    146.2         4Z    136.5        5A    156.7
  5B    162.2         5Z    151.4        6A    173.8
  6B    179.9         6Z    167.9        7A    192.8
  7Z    186.2         8Z    206.5        9Z    229.1

VALID DPL CODES:

   023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 054, 065,
   071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 125, 131, 132,
   134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 165, 172, 174, 205,
   223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 251, 261, 263, 265, 271,
   306, 311, 315, 331, 343, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371,
   411, 412, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466,
   503, 506, 516, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627,
   631, 632, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732,
   734, 743, 754

INCOMPATIBLE PL CODES:

ZB is not compatible with ZA or 1Z
8Z is not compatible with M1 or M2
9Z is not compatible with M4 or M5

UNSUPPORTED PL CODES:

PL Codes XZ (67.0 Hz) and WZ (69.3 Hz) are not supported.

UNSUPPORTED DPL CODES:
These are for special applications and are not 
part of the standard Quantar product offering.

053, 122, 212, 225, 246, 252, 266, 325, 425, 446, 
452, 455, 521, 525, 552, 564, 645, 652, 725, 726

*mcs_access_help,A
USER ACCESS HELP

System user groups may be ENABLED,  DISABLED,  or GATED,  depending on
their status.  Calls with PLs or DPLs that are marked ENABLED are repeated,
while the calls with PLs or DPLs that are marked as DISABLED are not
repeated.

If an entry is marked GATED, the incoming calls are either repeated or
not repeated, depending on whether GATING is allowed or not. GATING
is turned ON and OFF by using  commands programmed in the TRC table.
These commands are initiated by a console operator which result in a TRC
sequence received by the station and the proper assignement of the
function tones.  A selected function tone in the table is programmed
with the GATEACC ON keyword; when this function tone is received then
the calls associated with the GATED table entry are repeated.

When another function is received and this function tone is programmed in
the TRC table with the GATEACC OFF keyword,  then the incoming calls
associated with the GATED function will not be allowed.  The association
of the calls to the GATED function is done thru the PL/DPL which is
received.

The GATING function can also be enabled or disabled from the SAM module.
The SAM GATING control feature is enabled or disabled by setting the
ANALOG REPEATER ACCESS field to MDC/TONE; this field is found on the
CHANNEL INFORMATION screen.  The SAM module is then programmed for any
of the signalling formats which it supports, MDC, DTMF, Singletone,
Select B, or other custom tones sequences.

If it is necessary to delete a User Entry,  the User Access field should
be set to DELETE.  The next time the codeplug is downloaded to the
station,  all entries tagged for deletion will be removed from the list,
and the MCS Accounting Information will be cleared.

*save_mcs_file,A
SAVE MCS REPORT DATA TO ARCHIVE DISK FILE HELP

ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view.  Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered.  Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key.  Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.

If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen.  If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.

If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.

Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.

ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).

Press the ENTER key to save the MCS Report to the desired file.

After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the :CHANGE/VIEW:MCS
screen.

*sv_mcs_directory,A
ENTER MCS REPORT DIRECTORY NAME HELP

Enter the directory pathname where the MCS report is to be stored
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed.  Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.

Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.

When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.  Press function key F5 to
recall the default RSS Archive directory.

*sv_mcs_filename,A
ENTER MCS REPORT FILENAME HELP

Enter the desired filename of the MCS Report in this field. Any legal
MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an existing file,
the filename highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).

Press Enter or TAB to select the file.

*mcs_dir_contents_help,A
OVERWRITE MCS REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP

Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select an MCS Report file from
the given list.  The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.

Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.

Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.

Press ESC or F10 to exit the WRITE MCS REPORT FILE screen without
writing the MCS Report to a file.

*pre_emph_help,A
Audio Pre-Emphasis Help

FM modulation requires that the analog audio be pre-emphasized by
passing it through a filter with a positive 6 dB/octave slope 
(Pre-emphasis is ENABLED).  There are applications where this 
characteristic is not desired and the analog audio signal is 
transmitted without being passed through the pre-emphasis filter 
(Pre-emphasis is DISABLED).  

The default for Pre-emphasis is ENABLED.

*de_emph_help,A
Audio De-Emphasis Help

In order to properly recover analog audio received through an FM system, 
the analog signal is de-emphasized by passing it through a filter with
a negative 6 dB/octave slope (De-emphasis is ENABLED). This filter cancels  
out the effects of the pre-emphasis filter used in the transmission
process.  There are applications where this characteristic is not desired
and the analog audio signal is received without being passed through the
de-emphasis filter (De-emphasis is DISABLED).

The default for De-emphasis is ENABLED. 

*hi_pass_help,A
Rx High Pass Filter Help

In systems which utilize low frequency signaling, PL or DPL, there
is the possibility that the low frequency signaling can be heard
in the speaker.  In order to prevent this unwanted effect, a high
pass filter is applied to the receive audio analog path (Hi-Pass
Filter is ENABLED).  This filter will pass only the information
above 300 Hz and will severely attenuate the information below
300 Hz for improved audio quality.  There are applications where
this characteristic is not desired and the analog audio signal
is received without being passed through the high pass filter
(Hi-Pass Filter is DISABLED).  

The default for Hi-Pass Filter is ENABLED.

*csq_delay_time,A
SECURENET WL CSQ Mute Timer Help


The WL CSQ Mute Timer parameter is used to mute the begining of Rx Audio
on the wireline in a station that has been configured for 12 kpbs
SECURENET operation and RX ACTIVATION is set to Carrier Squelch.

When carrier is detected, the station does gate Receive Audio
immediately to the wireline L2, but waits a predetermined amount of
time specified by the WL CSQ Mute Timer parameter.  The reason for the
delay is to give the station's receiver time to detect the presence
of 12 kpbs signaling, should it be present, and properly gate that
signalling to the wireline and prevent the "passing of coded
information thru the clear path".

The default value for the timer is 150 msec.
The range is 0 - 1000 msec.

In systems where PL is used, the WL mute timer is not used since PL
detect time provides the protection of preventing of "passing of coded
information thru the clear path".

If a channel's modulation is set to Analog, this field has no effect.


*modem_config,A
CONFIGURATION:MODEM CONFIGURATION HELP

The modem configuration screen is used to configure the 
RSS for use with a modem instead of a direct link to connect 
to a station. The fields on the screen store a variety of 
strings which are both commands which the RSS sends to 
the modem to establish a connection with a remote modem 
and messages the modem uses to communicate to the PC 
the status of its connection over the phone line. To setup
RSS to be used with a modem the strings must be 
configured to match those for your modem. If a modem is 
not already connected to the station see the either the RSS 
manual or the last section of this help screen for a 
description of how to configure the station modem.

Initialization String: This field stores the string the RSS first 
sends to the modem to initialize it to the correct parameters 
to communicate with the modem connected to the station.
The default is ATE1Q0V1X4&K0S0=0^M

Dial Prefix: This is the modem command string to initiate the 
dialing sequence. The two simplest choices for this field are 
ATDT and ATDP for tone or pulse dialing respectively. The 
default is ATDT

Dial Suffix: This is the dialing command suffix which 
completes the dialing command string The default is ^M 
which represents a carriage return.

Hangup: This is the command string sent to the modem to 
hang it up. The default is +++~~~ATH0^M

Drop DTR to Hangup: This field enables or disables 
dropping of the RS-232 DTR line when hanging up the 
modem. Default is ENABLED

Connect: This field stores some part of the string the modem 
sends whenever it connects to a remote modem. The default
is CONNECT

Busy: This is the response string the modem sends to the
PC when it receives a busy signal when dialing. The default
is BUSY

Failure: These four fields store strings the modem sends to
the PC on a failure condition when trying to connect to a
remote modem. The default four strings are

NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIALTONE
TIMEOUT

Wait for Connect: This is the maximum time the modem will
wait to successfully connect to a remote modem. If after
dialing commences the time in this field expires, the RSS
dialer will recycle and attempt to connect to the remote
modem again. Default is 60 seconds.

Pause between Calls: This is the time in seconds the RSS
pauses between attempts to connect to a remote modem.
Default is 5 seconds.

Function Keys:

F5 : PREVIOUS SETTINGS :     Restores last saved configuration

F8 : SAVE:                   Saves current settings to disk

F9:  RESET DEFAULTS :        Loads RSS default settings


Configuring modems for remote RSS

   This document describes how to set up a station modem (i.e. a modem 
connected to the station with a serial cable) and a PC modem (a modem 
connected to the PC on which RSS is running) for remote RSS. Remote 
RSS allows a station to be configured with RSS remotely via modem. The 
basic method for remote RSS is to connect a common computer modem 
configured to answer incoming calls to the station and to a telephone line, 
and to use a modem connected to the PC on which RSS is running to dial 
and connect to the station. No special firmware is required of the station
for remote RSS, however station password protection which is introduced in 
firmware version 5.0 is preferred for securing the station against 
unauthorized access. RSS version 5.0 or better is required to configure the 
PC modem and to dial to a station.

1.1. Quick setup
   Briefly, to setup both the station and RSS modems used for remote 
RSS the following configuration is required:

The modem connected to the station (the station modem) must be 
configured as follows:
  - Disable character echoing from the modem to the station
  - Disable transmission of result codes from the modem to the station
  - Enable auto-answer
  - Set the modem to ignore DTR
  - Set the modem to allow only 9600 bps connections
  - Disable XON/XOFF (and disable RTS/CTS)
 
The modem connected to the PC should be configured via the RSS 
modem initialization string as follows
  - Disable XON/XOFF (and disable RTS/CTS)

(The PC modem's factory default settings are adequate for parameters other
 then those mentioned above)
 
   Data compression may be used but will not significantly improve 
performance. Error control should be used but is not required. The station 
modem configuration must be stored in NVM so that it is active when the 
modem is powered up, while the RSS modem may be configured via the 
initialization string field under the modem configuration string. Both the 
station and PC modems should be connected to their respective units with a 
standard 9 pin or 25 pin serial cable commonly found at any computer 
supply store. 

   The remainder of the document elaborates on the procedure for 
configuring the modems. Note that many of the commands described in this 
document for configuring the modem are non standard and should be 
referenced in the manual supplied with the modem.


1.2. Detailed Station Modem Configuration
   A communications program such as Windows Terminal must be used 
to configure the station modem. Once performed the configuration 
must be stored in non-volatile memory so that when powered up the 
modem is ready for remote RSS operation.

   Once the station modem is connected to the PC with an appropriate 9 
or 25 pin serial cable and the communications program is running, the 
first thing to be done is to issue the following command followed by 
<ENTER> (or the equivalent command specific to the modem) to set 
the current modem settings to the factory defaults:

AT&F

   Each command described in the following sections must be issued. 
Finally the settings must be stored in the station modem's non-
volatile memory and the modem must be set to fetch the 
configuration upon powerup with the command

AT&W0&Y0

This is the last command to be issued. With exceptional luck the 
following three commands will completely configure the station 
modem (Note that the modem will not respond after the second 
command is issued so no characters or responses are seen while 
typing):

AT&F
ATE0Q1&D0&K0N0S37=9S0=1
AT&W0&Y0

If the modem does not seem to work correctly after issuing these 
three commands, the modem reference booklet supplied with the 
modem must be used to find the appropriate configuration 
commands. If this is the case, reset the modem to its factory defaults 
with the AT&F command,  continue through this document issuing 
each command described or the equivalent thereof for the modem 
being used, and finally store the configuration to the powerup settings 
with the AT&W0&Y0 command. If the three commands listed above 
configure the station modem nothing more needs to be done for the 
station modem.


1.2.1. Disable echoing of characters to station
The modem connected to the station must not echo back to the station 
any characters transmitted by the station. The standard Hayes 
command for disabling character echo is ATE0

1.2.2. Disable transmission of command result strings
The standard Hayes command for disabling result strings is ATQ1

1.2.3. Set modem to ignore RS-232 DTR line
The default settings for most modems require DTR to be high in 
order to answer an incoming call. Because this line is not asserted by 
the station, the modem must be set to ignore it. Most modems can be 
set to ignore DTR with AT&D0

1.2.4. Disable software flow control.
This is usually done with the command AT&K0 but again is vendor 
dependent. It is critical that the station modem is not set to use 
RTS/CTS or hardware flow control. The modem most likely will be 
configured to use RTS/CTS flow control in its factory settings.

1.2.5. Set maximum connection speed
The host modem must be configured to allow connections only at 
9600 baud. It is likely two 14400 bps capable modems or better will 
be used to bridge the station and the RSS which under their default 
settings will attempt to connect at their highest common speed which 
the station cannot not support. To set the modem on the host end to 
accept only 9600 bps connections the common set of commands is 
ATN0 (which sets the modem to limit connections to the speed code 
in register S37) and ATS37=9 which sets the register to 9, the speed 
code for 9600 bps. These commands may vary between modem 
vendors. If the host modem is configured correctly to accept only 
9600 bps connections it will automatically negotiate this speed with 
any calling modem.

1.2.6. Set modem to answer after n rings
The modem must be configured to answer calls. The register S0 holds 
the number of rings the modem should wait for before answering and 
can be set with ATS0=1 or however many rings are preferred. Use of 
the S0 register for this purpose is standard across vendors.

1.2.7.  Error Control and Data Compression
Most modems by default will attempt to connect to one another using 
the most sophisticated error control and data compression protocols 
common between them. The station modem should be configured in 
its factory settings to use any protocols it supports that the calling 
requests, so it should not need to be manually configured. The PC 
modem should be configured (through the initialization string in the 
RSS) to use the most sophisticated protocol the station modem 
supports and nothing greater. If the PC modem attempts to negotiate 
with the station modem a protocol the station modem does not 
support, the characters sent by the PC modem requesting the protocol 
are ignored by the station modem and passed on to the station as 
garbage which while benign may cause the RSS to act erratically 
when it first issues commands to the station.



1.3.  PC modem configuration
The modem attached to the PC running RSS is configured via RSS 
through the Initialization String field on the Modem Configuration 
Screen. The initialization string is the command issued to the modem 
before dialing a remote station and should configure the modem 
settings required of remote RSS. While the default Initialization 
String shipped with the RSS should be adequate, the following 
configuration should be performed through the Initialization String:

Settings likely to be defaults for the modem whose commands are 
standard across vendors:
  - Enable character echoing (E1)
  - Enable command response codes (Q0)
  - Enable verbal command response codes (as opposed to numeric) (V1)
  - Enable full set of command response codes (X4)
  - Disable automatic answer (S0=0)
 
Settings not likely to be defaults whose commands are non-standard 
across vendors:
  - Disable XON/XOFF flow control (and disable CTS/RTS flow control) (&K0)
  - Enable most robust error control which station modem supports
 
 If the PC modem cannot be correctly configured through the 
initialization string, using the same method for configuring the
station modem, issue the AT&F to reset the modem to factory defaults 
and write the configuration to the powerup settings with AT&W0&Y0 



1.4. Troubleshooting

Common problems and solutions:

  1. The modems are connecting at a speed greater than 9600 bps. 
Often this may be detected by examining the status LEDs on either 
of the modems. Check that the modem can be and is configured 
for 9600 connections. Look for Automode Enable in the 
modem's reference booklet.

  2. The station modem answers but does not seem to transmit or 
receive data. It is likely the station modem is expecting the CTS 
line connected to it to be asserted, i.e. the modem is configured for 
RTS/CTS or hardware flow control. Disable anything to do with 
RTS/CTS flow control. 

  3. The station modem will not answer incoming calls. Either register 
S0 is set to 0, or the modem is expecting the DTR line to be 
asserted. The primary symptom of the latter is a modem with the 
AA indicator LED illuminated that won't answer incoming
calls. Check the &D or appropriate setting for the modem and 
ensure DTR monitoring is disabled.

*init_str,A
INITIALIZATION STRING HELP

The Modem Initialization string is the command sent to the
modem by the RSS to set the modem to parameters needed
for using RSS over a telephone link. There is no standard
Hayes compatible modem command to properly initialize the
modem for remote RSS, and you very likely will need to set
the string for the commands your modem provides. The
default initialization string shipped with the RSS is:

ATE1Q0V1X4&K0S0=0^M

See the end of the MODEM CONFIGURATION help text (by 
pressing F1) or the RSS manual for a detailed description 
of how to set up the connected device and PC modems for 
using RSS remotely over a telephone link.

*dial_prefix,A
DIALING PREFIX HELP

The dialing prefix is the command string sent to the modem
by the RSS to initiate the dialing sequence. The default
Dialing Prefix shipped with the RSS is:

ATDT

This command instructs the modem to dial the modem using
touch tone. The most common reason to change the Dialing
Prefix String is for use with lines limited to pulse or rotary
dialing, in which case the string should be set to:

ATDP

You may also change the dialing prefix to set the modem to
your preferences, such as the volume level of the modem
speaker or to dial a code before every number in the dialing
directory. For example to dial out of a PBX system that
requires 9 to be dialed before any phone number, enter
ATDT9W in this field which instructs the modem to dial 9
and wait for a subsequent dialtone before dialing any
number in the dialing directory. Refer to your modem manual
for more information on such settings.

*dial_suffix,A
DIALING SUFFIX HELP

The Dialing Suffix is the string appended to the dialing
command string to terminate the command and instruct the
modem to begin dialing. The default setting shipped with the
RSS is

^M

which is a carriage return, and should be adequate for all
Hayes compatible modems.

*hangup_str,A
HANGUP STRING HELP

The Hangup String is the command sent to the modem to
force it to hangup. The default string shipped with the RSS is

+++~~~ATH0^M

which should be adequate for any Hayes compatible modem. Each 
of the tildes (~) in the string is interpreted by the RSS as a 
half second pause and is not sent to the modem as part of the 
command string.

*drop_dtr,A
DROP DTR TO HANGUP HELP

Use this field to select whether the RS-232 Data Terminal
Ready (DTR) line between the PC and the MODEM should
be dropped when hanging up the modem. Many Modems
either require this line to be low to hang up or will
automatically hangup when the line is low. The default
value is ENABLED which is adequate for most modems.

*connect_str,A
CONNECT STRING HELP

This field stores a fragment of the connect string sent from
the modem to the PC whenever a connection is established.
Most modems send elaborate connect strings containing
information about the speed and protocol of the connection
but always include somewhere in the message the string
CONNECT. The default is

CONNECT

which is adequate for Hayes compatible modems.

*busy_str,A
BUSY STRING HELP

This field stores the string the modem sends to the PC when
it detects a busy signal after dialing. The default string
shipped with the RSS is

BUSY

which is adequate for Hayes compatible modems.

*failure_str,A
FAILURE STRINGS

The four failure string fields store strings the modem sends
to the PC when a command fails, such as when it attempts
to dial and no dialtone is present or when the connection
with a remote modem is lost. When the RSS is attempting to
connect to a remote modem it monitors the responses from
the modem to determine whether the MODEM has successfully 
connected. If when dialing any of the strings entered into 
these fields is encountered in a modem response the RSS 
acknowledges the failed attempt and will reset the modem 
and attempt to connect to the device again. The default 
entries for these four fields are

NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIALTONE
TIMEOUT

which should be adequate for any Hayes compatible modem.

*control_str,A
CONTROL STRING HELP
====================
This field is being provided for user convenience to allow the user to send
commands to a remote device or even the station.

For example:  Electronic switches are being utilized 
at sites to allow a single dial up modem to access several devices. In order
to change the routing of the switch to connect to a pecific device, 
special commands are needed by the switch to establish that connection.
This field allows the user to sends those commands directly to the switch
without exiting and reintering the RSS. 

The field may contain any alphanumeric and control character. Control
characters are represented by alphabetical characters preceded by a 
carat ^. For example, if the wake up character of the switch is a 
control p and the port accessed is port 4, then the string sequence that
is entered to achieve switching the switch to port 4 is ^p4.

To actually send the Control String, press the F2-SEND CONTROL STRING 
key when the modem configuration screen is displayed.

*wait_connect,A
WAIT FOR CONNECT HELP

This field stores the maximum time in seconds the RSS will
wait for a connection when dialing a remote modem. If after 
dialing the RSS has not connected to the remote modem within the
time entered in this field it hangs up and attempts to connect
again. The default value is 60 seconds.

NOTE:  If the RSS is run in anything other than DOS only mode,
the timing of the Wait For Connect may not be accurate.

*wait_btwn_calls,A
PAUSE BETWEEN CALLS HELP

This field stores the time in seconds the RSS will wait
between successive attempts to connect to a remote modem. 
If the RSS fails to connect to a remote modem the RSS will 
pause for the time entered in this field before redialing. 
The default value is 5 seconds.

NOTE:  If the RSS is run in anything other than DOS only mode,
the timing of the Pause Between Calls may not be accurate.

*dial_description,A
DIALING DIRECTORY DESCRIPTION HELP

The dialing directory description field allows the user to
enter a descriptive name to identify the corresponding
phone number.

The RSS remote dial-up facility is designed specifically for
RSS to station/comparator communication, and is not suitable 
for other applications.

The remote dial-up facility is used establish a connection
to a remote device via a modem link.  Before using the
feature configure the RSS for the modem type and COMM port 
used on the PC.  This can be done updating the MODEM
CONFIGURATION and SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION screens on
the SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU.

The user may move to a particular dialing directory entry or
phone number by using the Tab/Shift Tab and Enter keys to move
the cursor to the desired field.  The directory currently
supports up to 11 entries.

The user may add/modify/delete any entry by moving to the field
and entering any printable character.

Once the cursor is on the desired description or phone number
field,  pressing F2 will dial the number and attempt to establish
a connection with the remote modem.  Once the connection is made,
the RSS will operate as if the station were connected locally.

The user may also dial a number without entering it into the dialing
directory.  By pressing F3,  the RSS will prompt the user to enter a
number to dial.  Once the user enters the number,  the RSS will
begin dialing.

When the RSS is dialing and attempting to connect to the remote
modem,  a status window will appear on the screen indicating the
call's current status.

Function Key Descriptions:

F1  - Displays this screen.

F2  - Dials highlighted entry phone number via a Hayes
      compatible modem and establishes a remote connection.

F3  - Prompts user to enter a number to dial.

F5  - Disconnects current remote session.

F8  - Saves dialing directory in memory to disk.  This file is
      loaded into memory when the user enters the Dialing
      Directory screen.

F10 - Exit to the Computer Configuration Menu.

*dial_number,A
PHONE NUMBER FIELD HELP

The phone number field allows the user to enter the phone number 
of a remote modem.

If a dialing prefix is necessary in order to dial outside an 
internal telephone system,  the prefix can be specified in the 
Dialing Prefix field on the Modem Configuration screen.

The phone number field will hold up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

The RSS remote dial-up facility is designed specifically for 
RSS to station/comparator communication, and is not suitable 
for other applications.

The remote dial-up facility is used establish a connection
to a remote device via a modem link.  Before using the
feature configure the RSS for the modem type and COMM port 
used on the PC.  This can be done updating the MODEM
CONFIGURATION and SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION screens on
the SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU.

The user may move to a particular dialing directory entry or
phone number by using the Tab/Shift Tab and Enter keys to move
the cursor to the desired field.  The directory currently
supports up to 11 entries.

The user may add/modify/delete any entry by moving to the field
and entering any printable character.

Once the cursor is on the desired description or phone number
field,  pressing F2 will dial the number and attempt to establish
a connection with the remote modem.  Once the connection is made,
the RSS will operate as if the station were connected locally.

The user may also dial a number without entering it into the dialing
directory.  By pressing F3,  the RSS will prompt the user to enter a
number to dial.  Once the user enters the number,  the RSS will
begin dialing.

When the RSS is dialing and attempting to connect to the remote
modem,  a status window will appear on the screen indicating the
call's current status.

Function Key Descriptions:

F1  - Displays this screen.

F2  - Dials highlighted entry phone number via a Hayes
      compatible modem and establishes a remote connection.

F3  - Prompts user to enter a number to dial.

F5  - Disconnects current remote session.

F8  - Saves dialing directory in memory to disk.  This file is
      loaded into memory when the user enters the Dialing
      Directory screen.

F10 - Exit to the Computer Configuration Menu.

*dial_dir_help,A
CONFIGURATION:REMOTE DIAL-UP HELP

The RSS Remote Dial-up facility is designed specifically for
RSS to station/comparator communication, and is not suitable 
for other applications.

The remote dial-up facility is used establish a connection
to a remote device via a modem link.  Before using the
feature configure the RSS for the modem type and COMM port 
used on the PC.  This can be done updating the MODEM
CONFIGURATION and SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION screens 
on the SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU.

The user may move to a particular dialing directory entry or
phone number by using the Tab/Shift Tab and Enter keys to move
the cursor to the desired field.  The directory currently
supports up to 11 entries.

The user may add/modify/delete any entry by moving to the field
and entering any printable character.

Once the cursor is on the desired description or phone number
field,  pressing F2 will dial the number and attempt to establish
a connection with the remote modem.  Once the connection is made,
the RSS will operate as if the device were connected locally.

The user may also dial a number without entering it into the dialing
directory.  By pressing F3,  the RSS will prompt the user to enter a
number to dial.  Once the user enters the number,  the RSS will
begin dialing.

When the RSS is dialing and attempting to connect to the remote
modem,  a status window will appear on the screen indicating the
call's current status.

Function Key Descriptions:

F1  - Displays this screen.

F2  - Dials highlighted entry phone number via a Hayes
      compatible modem and establishes a remote connection.

F3  - Prompts user to enter a number to dial.

F5  - Disconnects current remote session.

F8  - Saves dialing directory in memory to disk.  This file is
      loaded into memory when the user enters the Dialing
      Directory screen.

F10 - Exit to the Computer Configuration Menu.

*password_form_help,A
PASSWORD PROTECTION

This Device is password protected.  In order to communicate with
this Device,  the user must type in the appropriate password.
When the Password Entry window is on the screen,  the user types 
in the password,  followed by function key F2 to accept.

Asterisk (*) characters are echoed to the screen during password 
input for added security.  The user is allowed 5 incorrect password 
attempts.  After five incorrect password attempts,  the Device 
will time out,  and the RSS will not be able to communicate with 
the Device for approximately 60 seconds.

IF A PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN:

In the event that the password is lost or forgotten,  the password 
can be erased.  When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password, 
the user should type in LOST.  Then while holding down the top two 
buttons on the front panel of the device,  the user should press 
F2 (Accept) to complete the erasing of the current password.  

TEMPORARY BYPASS OF A UNKNOWN PASSWORD:

If a password protected device must be serviced,  and the password 
is not known,  the user may still access the device without 
disabling password protection.  When the RSS prompts the user to 
enter a password,  the user should type in SERVICE.  Then while 
holding down the top two buttons on the front panel of the device,  
the user should press F2 (Accept) to complete the temporary bypass 
of the device password.  Password protection will be bypassed as if 
the correct password had been entered.

*password_field,A
ENTER PASSWORD HELP

When the Password Entry window is on the screen,  the user types in the
password,  followed by function key F2 to accept.  The password must be
at least 5,  but no more than 8 characters in length.

Asterisk (*) characters are echoed to the screen during password input
for added security.

The user is allowed 5 incorrect password attempts.  After five incorrect
password attempts,  the device will time out,  and the RSS will not be
able to communicate with the device for approximately 60 seconds.

IF A STATION PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN:

In the event that the password is lost or forgotten,  the password can
be erased.  When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password, the user
should type in LOST.

Then, while holding down the top two buttons on the front panel of the
device,  the user should press F2 (Accept) to complete the erasing of
the current password.  

TEMPORARY BYPASS OF A UNKNOWN PASSWORD:

If a password protected device must be serviced,  and the password is not
known,  the user may still access the device without disabling password
protection.  When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password, the user
should type in SERVICE.  Then, while holding down the top two buttons on 
the front panel of the device, the user should press F2 (Accept) to 
complete the temporary bypass of the device's password. Password protection
will then be bypassed as if the correct password had been entered.

CHANGING THE STATION PASSWORD:

When the user presses function key F6 from the Computer Configuration 
screen,  the user will be prompted to enter the old password.  Once 
the old password is typed in,  the F2 key accepts the input and sends 
it to the device for verification.  Passwords are case insensitive.

If the old password matches the password stored in the device,  the 
RSS will prompt the user to enter the new password.  Once the user 
types in the new password and presses the F2 key,  the RSS asks the 
user to type in the new password again to make certain it has been 
typed in without error.

Once the new password has been accepted,  the device encrypts and 
stores the new password to NVM.

The words LOST,  SERVICE,  and QUIT are reserved keywords and cannot 
be used as a password.

Password input characters are echoed to the screen as asterisks for 
security.

ERASING PASSWORDS THROUGH THE RSS:

If you know the password and are connected to the device, you may 
erase the current password as follows.

1. From the Main Menu, press F9 to access the Computer Configuration
screen.

2. Press F6 to access the Change Device Password pop-up.

3. Type the current password in the Enter Current Password field.

4. Press F2 to accept the entry.

5. A pop-up will appear prompting you to enter a new password.
   Do not enter a password.  Instead press F2 twice.

6. A pop-up will appear indicating that password protection has
   been disabled.

NOTE:

With the password erased, all future RSS sessions will be allowed
without entering a password.  You may create another password by
repeating the Change password process.

*change_pswd_help,A
CHANGE PASSWORD HELP

The Change Password windows have been provided to allow the user to 
change the password in a password protected device, or to disable
the password protection.  

Password protection is available in Quantar/Quantro software 
releases 5.0 and later, and all AstroTAC 3000 Comparators.

To change the password,  the user must know the old password (if it 
exists),  and determine a new password.

Asterisk (*) characters are echoed to the screen during password 
input for added security.  The user is allowed 5 incorrect password 
attempts.  After five incorrect password attempts,  the device
will time out,  and the RSS will not be able to communicate with 
the device for approximately 60 seconds.

CHANGING THE PASSWORD:

When the user presses function key F6 from the Computer Configuration 
screen,  the user will be prompted to enter the old password.  Once 
the old password is typed in,  the F2 key accepts the input and sends 
it to the device for verification.  Passwords are case insensitive.

If the old password matches the password stored in the device,  the 
RSS will prompt the user to enter the new password.  Once the user 
types in the new password and presses the F2 key,  the RSS asks the 
user to type in the new password again to make certain it has been 
typed in without error.

Once the new password has been accepted,  the device encrypts and 
stores the new password to NVM.

The words LOST,  SERVICE,  and QUIT are reserved keywords and cannot 
be used as a password.

Password input characters are echoed to the screen as asterisks for 
security.

ERASING PASSWORDS THROUGH THE RSS:

If you know the password and are connected to the device
you may erase the current station password as follows.

1. From the Main Menu, press F9 to access the Computer Configuration
screen.

2. Press F6 to access the Change Device Password pop-up.

3. Type the current password in the Enter Current Password field.

4. Press F2 to accept the entry.

5. A pop-up will appear prompting you to enter a new password.
   Do not enter a password.  Instead press F2 twice.

6. A pop-up will appear indicating that password protection has
   been disabled.

NOTE:

With the password erased, all future RSS sessions will be allowed
without entering a password.  You may create another password by
repeating the Change password process.

IF A PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN:

In the event that the password is lost or forgotten,  the password 
can be erased.  When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password, 
the user should type in LOST.  Then while holding down the top two 
buttons on the front panel of the device,  the user should press 
F2 (Accept) to complete the erasing of the current password.  

TEMPORARY BYPASS OF A UNKNOWN PASSWORD:

If a password protected device must be serviced,  and the password 
is not known,  the user may still access the device without 
disabling password protection.  When the RSS prompts the user to 
enter a password,  the user should type in SERVICE.  Then while 
holding down the top two buttons on the front panel of the device,  
the user should press F2 (Accept) to complete the temporary bypass 
of the device password.  Password protection will be bypassed as if 
the correct password had been entered.

*mradid_help,A
RADIO ID PARTITIONING MENU HELP

This menu lists the types of radio ID partitioning supported in the RSS.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Full/Sub Band Partitioning - Modify or view band partitioning.

     F3  - Modulation ID Partitioning - Modify or view modulation
					partitioning.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Change/View Menu.

*modid_partition_help,A
MODULATION PARTITIONING HELP

The RSS provides the user with a table where he can specify which radios
support ASTRO modulation and which support ANALOG modulation.  A user
may enter up to 32 ranges in this table.  Each range (and each number in
the range) represents BOTH an Individual Radio ID and a Talkgroup ID.

NOTE:  All 4 Hexadecimal places represent the Radio ID, but only the 3 most
significant hexadecimal places represent a Talkgroup ID (the right most
digit is dropped for Talkgroup representation).  An example of an entry in
the table may be:
                0010 - 002F   ASTRO

This represents 32 Hex Radio IDs (0010 - 002F) and 2 Talkgroup IDs (001
and 002) that are ASTRO Capable.

Since Range Table IDs specify both Radios and Talkgroups with one range, 
the following rules will help in definition of the range table.


1) Up to 32 ranges may be specified
2) The smallest range defined needs to include 16 Range Table IDs or one
   full talkgroup. Ranges must be defined in 16 Range Table ID increments
   (since one Talkgroup is represented by 16 Table range IDs).
3) The total number of radio IDs specified = total number of Range Table
   IDs specified
4) The total number of Talkgroup IDs specified = total number of Range
   Table IDs specified + 16
5) The ID is the Hexadecimal equivalent of the individual ID - 700000.

NOTE:  In a SmartZone system, the zone manager will overwrite the
       modulation partitioning data from its own database.  The user-
       specified data is used only if the station is not communicating
       with the zone manager after being reset or powered up.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this Help screen.

     F2  - Not used.

     F3  - ADD RANGE - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter a
           new range of IDs.  This range will be added with a default
           modulation.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - DELETE RANGE - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter
           the range of IDs to delete.  This range will then be folded
           into the next higher modulation unless only the beginning of
           the range is deleted.  In this case it will be folded into
           the previous band.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Previous Menu.


*alm_help,A
ANALOG IDLE LINK CHECK MAINTENANCE HELP

Analog Idle Link Check is used to make sure links between analog
stations are operational during idle periods.  Messages are passed
between wireline modules, and if messages are missed, the link will
be reported as failed.

If the Wireline Interface field is set to V.24 HYBRID and the Comparator
field is not ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC, then Analog Idle Link Check
should be ENABLED otherwise it should be DISABLED.

Valid choices for this field are ENABLED and DISABLED.

Default value is DISABLED.


*dlm_help,A
DIGITAL IDLE LINK CHECK HELP

Digital Idle Link Check is used to make sure links between ASTRO
stations are operational during idle periods.  Messages are passed
between wireline modules, and if the messages are missed, the link
will be reported as failed.

Valid choices for this field are ENABLED and DISABLED.

Default value is ENABLED for all ASTRO CAI stations or Trunked ASTRO stations
otherwise the default value is DISABLED.

*dcondee_help,A

Memory EEPROM IC (51-84293T01/T02/T03/T04) used in Quantar/Quantro/Data Base
Stations shipped before April, 1997, has been found susceptible to memory
corruption in unused portions of its memory. (The EEPROM IC is used to
store codeplug data, alignment info, and other operation parameters for
the station.)

When EEPROM memory is corrupted and the station experiences a reset, the 
overall memory IC checksum no longer is its expected value.  This will 
result in the station "Control Fail" red LED lighting, and the station 
will not be operational.  Only RSS communications will be possible. 

The RSS attempts to correct this problem by conditioning the EEPROM.
Conditioning writes a specific pattern to the unused portion of the
EEPROM IC to prevent the memory corruption from occurring.

Whenever the user attempts to read or write codeplug data to or from the
station, the RSS checks the EEPROM to see if the EEPROM has been 
conditioned. If it has NOT been conditioned, the RSS will present the user
with a screen explaining that the EEPROM needs conditioning. 
The user should attempt to condition the EEPROM at this point.

In most cases, conditioning of the EEPROM will take less than 10 minutes.  
The station will be access disabled during that time.

     NOTE: It is important that there is a current archive of the station's
	   codeplug before continuing with the conditioning procedure!
	   Not having an archive of the codeplug would result in the user
	   having to manually re-enter all the customer codeplug data in the
	   event of a problem occurring while performing the conditioning.

The EEPROM conditioning only needs to be done once. After the EEPROM has
been conditioned, the RSS will no longer present the conditioning screen
to the user.

     NOTE:  When upgrading a station to newer version firmware and codeplug,
            the RSS may inform the user that the codeplug needs to be 
            conditioned again, even though it had been previously 
            conditioned.  This is normal and is required to condition any 
            new codeplug data sections added during the upgrade.

The station EEPROM may only be conditioned when the RSS is connected to the
RS-232 port on the front of the station.  If the RSS is connected to the 
rear port of the station, conditioning will not be attempted.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended that conditioning NOT be done via modem
connection. Phone lines can be unreliable and could cause a failure in
the conditioning process. If the conditioning process is interrupted, 
it will fail and could result in a non-functional station! (See "IF 
CONDITIONING FAILS", below.)



SPECIAL NOTE FOR INTELLIREPEATER STATIONS:
=========================================
Conditioning MUST be done at the site and for each individual station!

Conditioning is only done to the EEPROM of the station connected to the
RSS PC. Conditioning is not crossloaded to other Ethernet connected
stations in the system. Care must be taken to condition the EEPROMs of 
each of the stations in the system.


IntelliRepeater stations must be put into "RSS_only" mode while the EEPROM
is being conditioned. "RSS_only" mode means that the station will only
communicate with the RSS. No normal station operations are allowed.

To place the IntelliRepeater into "RSS_only" mode:
     1. Reset the Station by pressing the Volume UP, Volume Down and
        Intercom buttons (the top two and the bottom buttons) on the 
	front panel simultaneously.

     2. At the point in the reset sequence when the bottom two Station
        Control LEDs are the only ones lit, press and hold the Volume
        Down and CSQ-PL-OFF buttons (the middle two buttons) on the front 
        panel of the station simultaneously.

     3. Continue to hold these down until 15 seconds after the "Control 
        Fail" and the "PA Fail" red LEDs are both lit.

     4. If these LEDs do not remain lit, repeat steps 1-3.

     5. When these LEDs remain lit, you are ready to condition the 
	EEPROM.

     6. After successfully conditioning the EEPROM, you must reset the 
        station again to exit "RSS_only" mode and return to normal 
        operation.





IF CONDITIONING FAILS (the RSS will inform the user if a failure occurs):
=========================================================================

Reset the station.

If the station comes up "green", the failure occurred during the reading
of the EEPROM and the only step needed is to retry the conditioning when
the RSS requests it.

If the station does not come up "green" after a reset, the user will have
to do all the steps needed for installing a new station: write the archived
codeplug out to the station, attempt conditioning again and, if successful,
re-align the station.

If unable to restore the station to normal operation by repeating these 
steps, contact the Motorola Support Center at 1-800-221-7144,
(International) 1-847-576-7300, FAX 1-847-576-2172.

*mwldcd,A
WILDCARD CONFIGURATION MENU HELP

These functions are used to configure the WildCard tables for
the Station's Codeplug.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.
     F2  - Not used.
     F3  - Input Configuration - Change/View The WildCard Inputs.
     F4  - Not used.
     F5  - Output Configuration - Change/View The WildCard Outputs.
     F6  - Not used.
     F7  - State Condition/Action Tables - Change/View The WildCard
           State Condition/Action Tables
     F8  - Not used.
     F9  - Not used.
     F10 - Exit to Change/View Menu.


*wildcard_oper,A

WildCard Operation Help

The WildCard option is only available if a Wireline module is present.
The WildCard option is for advanced users of the QUANTAR/QUANTRO station.

WildCard Operation provides a utility whereby a user can affect
station's functions by asserting external inputs to the station by
monitoring station states.   The user can ascertain station status by
programming the station's outputs to reflect the station states.
The QUANTAR station has dedicated a set of external individual inputs and
outputs to provide this function. The inputs and outputs are
accessible via the 50 pin Telco connector.

The WildCard feature is provided in two tiers, BASIC and ENHANCED.
The difference between the two tiers is the number of inputs/outputs,
commands and states that are available.  The ENHANCED option requires
the 8 Wire Wireline module and has the full command set available from
the RSS. The BASIC option requires the 4 Wire Wireline module and has 
a reduced command set available from the RSS.

The functions defined in the station's manual will no longer work
once WildCard is enabled.  To restore the functions as defined in the
station's manual the user may set the WildCard tables to their
defaults or disable WildCard.

If a 4 Wire Wireline module is present, the choices for WildCard are 
DISABLED and BASIC.  BASIC WildCard allows the user to control station 
operations based on inputs to the station and/or station states.
The BASIC WildCard has 8 inputs, 7 of which are transistors and 1 that
is optocoupled, and 4 outputs, 3 of which are transistor closure to
ground and 1 is a relay closure.

If an 8 Wire Wireline module is present, the choices also include
the ENHANCED choice.  The ENHANCED WildCard in addition to more complex
station control also has audio routing capabilities.  The 8 Wire ENHANCED
WildCard has 12 inputs, 4 of which are optocoupled and 8 are transistors,
and 10 outputs, 4 of which are relay closures and 6 of which are
transistor closure to ground.

In either case the choice of DISABLED keeps the station in it's
normal operation.


*wc_input_screen_help,A
WILDCARD INPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN HELP

This screen defines how the inputs will be used to control the station.  
The inputs can be used individually or they can be grouped in a binary
group.  Binary groups are selected by using the arrow keys to scroll
through the choices in the group fields.  The active level is set for
the whole binary group by selecting the active level for that group,
again using the arrow keys to scroll through the choices.

The binary groups are used to control the current channel number
or access code table being used by the station.  The group's least
significant to most significant bit goes from the lowest bit number
to the highest.

The Input types and possible behaviors are listed below.  When an input
is assigned to a binary group, the assignment to that group is displayed.

     ENHANCED
     Input   HW Input Type   Active Level    Behavior
     1       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 0
     2       Transistor input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 1
     3       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 2
     4       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 3
     5       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 4
     6       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 5
     7       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 6
     8       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 7
     9       Optocoupler Input       HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 0
     10      Optocoupler Input       HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 1
     11      Optocoupler Input       HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 2
     12      Optocoupler Input       HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 3

     BASIC
     Input   HW Input Type   Active Level    Behavior
     1       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 0
     2       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 1
     3       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 2
     4       Transistor Input        HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 3
     5       Transistor Input        HI/LO   
     6       Transistor Input        HI/LO  
     7       Transistor Input        HI/LO 
     9       Optocoupler Input       HI/LO  

F4 - Resets the screen to the default settings which are no binary
groups selected, Transistor active levels set to LO, and
Optocoupler active levels set to HI.



*wc_input_group,A
WILDCARD INPUT BINARY GROUP HELP

This field allows the user to control a Channel / Access Code Table.
The choices are as follows:

     ENHANCED Choices                  BASIC Choices
     Group 1  Inputs 1-4               Group 1 Inputs 1-4
     Group 2  Inputs 1-8               NONE
     Group 3  Inputs 9-10
     Group 4  Inputs 9-12
     NONE

BASIC WildCard allows only 1 binary group to be selected.

NOTE:  Group 2 has been designed for future use.

For ENHANCED WildCard, when multiple groups of outputs are designated they
cannot overlap.  Selecting Group 1 and Group 3 is OK but Group 1 and
Group 2 overlap and cannot be selected simultaneously.


*wc_output_screen_help,A
WILDCARD OUTPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN HELP

This screen defines how the outputs will be used to control the station.
The outputs can be used individually or they can be grouped in a binary
group.  Binary groups are selected by using the arrow keys to scroll
through the choices in the group fields.  The active level is set for
the whole binary group by selecting the active level for that group,
again using the arrow keys to scroll through the choices.

The binary groups are used to reflect the station's current channel number
or Access Code Table or MCS user.   The group's least significant to most
significant bit goes from the lowest bit number to the highest.

The Output types and possible behaviors are listed below.  When an output
is assigned to a binary group, the assignment to that group is displayed.

     ENHANCED
     Output  HW Output Type  Active Level    Behavior
     1       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 0
     2       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 1
     3       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 2
     4       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 3
     5       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 4
     6       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 5
     7       Relay           HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 0
     8       Relay           HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 1
     9       Relay           HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 2
     10      Relay           HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 3

     BASIC
     Output  HW Output Type  Active Level    Behavior
     1       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 0
     2       Transistor      HI/LO   BINARY- BIT 1
     3       Transistor      HI/LO
     7       Relay           HI/LO


F4 - Resets the screen to the default settings which are no binary
groups selected and all active levels set to LO.

NOTE:  In order for the console interface to function properly when
       WILDCARD is enabled,  WILDCARD OUTPUT 2 must be programmed LO,
       and any WILDCARD table which configures OUTPUT 2 to drive
       RX CD DETECT must be changed.

       OUTPUT 2 is used to drive the hardware gate that switches the
       console line between analog and Securenet.  Thus when RX CD
       DETECT is active,  the line is switched to Securenet.  Other-
       wise, the console line is switched to analog.

*wc_out_grp_help,A
WILDCARD OUTPUT BINARY GROUP HELP

This field allows you to define what information to reflect on the
output lines for a Channel Number/ MCS User/ Access Code Table.

Your choices are as follows:

     ENHANCED Choices                  BASIC Choices
     Group 1  Outputs 1-2              Group 1 Outputs 1-2
     Group 2  Outputs 1-4              NONE
     Group 3  Outputs 5-6
     Group 4  Outputs 1-6
     Group 5  Outputs 7-8
     Group 6  Outputs 7-10
     NONE

BASIC WildCard Only allows 1 group to be selected.

For ENHANCED WildCard, when multiple groups of outputs are designated
they cannot overlap.  Selecting Group 1 and Group 3 is OK but Group 1
and Group 2 overlap and cannot be selected simultaneously.


*wc_grp_act_level_help,A
GROUP ACTIVE LEVEL HELP

The Active Level field defines at which level the input/output is to be
considered active.  When selecting the active level for a group, that
level will be true for all inputs/outputs within that group.

The choices for Active Level are HI and LO and blank.  Active Level will
be blank if no group is selected, and must NOT be blank when there is
a group selected.  Below is a table describing the HI and LO settings.

          Active
          Level | Transistor |Relay/Optocoupler
          ======|============|=================
          HI    |    +5V     |      OPEN
          ------|------------|-----------------
          LO    |   GROUND   |     CLOSED

When you lose power to the station, the relays and the transistors
will be open regardless of the WildCard Settings.


*wc_act_level_help,A
WILDCARD ACTIVE LEVEL HELP

The Active Level field defines at which level the input/output is to be
considered active.  

The choices for Active Level are HI and LO.

Below is a table describing the HI and LO settings.

          Active
          Level | Transistor |Relay/Optocoupler
          ======|============|=================
          HI    |    +5V     |      OPEN
          ------|------------|-----------------
          LO    |   GROUND   |     CLOSED

When you lose power to the station, the relays and the transistors
will be open regardless of the WildCard Settings

The default setting for the Active Level is LO.


*wc_state_cond_act_tbl_help,A
WILDCARD STATE CONDITION/ACTION TABLE SCREEN HELP

The WILDCARD feature provides for the entry of external inputs or
station states into a State Condition table. Each State Condition
will allow three entries that can be logically AND'ed, OR'ed,
AND NOT'ed, or OR NOT'ed with each other.  These states and conditions
will be evaluated simply from left to right, no parenthesis.

The result of this logical combination will result in the execution of
the commands in the ACTION or INACTION table. The commands in the
ACTION table will be executed sequentially whenever the result of the
State Condition table becomes TRUE, the INACTION table commands will
be executed sequentially whenever the result becomes FALSE.

All commands will be executed even if the condition that initiated them
is no longer true.

F2 - Brings up a scrollable choice list for the commands and states.
	     You may then type the first letter of the command to
	     advance the cursor to the first command with that letter.
	     Each successive key press of the same letter will
	     advance to the next command in the list that begins
	     with that letter.
F3 - Adds a State Condition/Action table to the end of the list and
	     brings up the screen for it.
F4 - Resets all of the State Conditions/Action Tables to the default
	     settings.  The default settings are determined by the
	     system configuration.
F5 - Displays the State Condition/Action Table previous to the one
	     currently displayed.
F6 - Displays the State Condition/Action Table after the one currently
	     displayed.
F7 - Deletes the State Condition/Action Table currently displayed.
F8 - Displays the WildCard Programming Rules (Not available on the
	     condition fields)
F9 - Allows additional commands for a table when NEXT TABLE is the 8th
	     command in the list.  It brings up a new screen with the
	     same table number and State Conditions.

NOTE:  In order for the console interface to function properly when
       WILDCARD is enabled,  WILDCARD OUTPUT 2 must be programmed LO,
       and any WILDCARD table which configures OUTPUT 2 to drive
       RX CD DETECT must be changed.

       OUTPUT 2 is used to drive the hardware gate that switches the
       console line between analog and Securenet.  Thus when RX CD
       DETECT is active,  the line is switched to Securenet.  Other-
       wise, the console line is switched to analog.

*wc_jump_to_help,A
WILDCARD JUMP TO ___ HELP

Use this field to enter the table number that you wish displayed on the
screen then press tab or enter and that table (if it exists) will be
displayed.  It is merely a quick way to display a particular table.


*wc_state_description_help,A
WILDCARD STATE CONDITION DESCRIPTION HELP

The Description field will accept 14 alphanumeric characters. These are
entered by the user and are for comments only and are stored in the
codeplug as well.

*wc_state_help,A
WILDCARD STATE HELP

The States specify:

     - discrete inputs
     - discrete outputs
     - station states listed below

Select one of the States that are in the list.

This table lists the WildCard states, the system types they were intended
for and whether they are included in the BASIC or ENHANCED state set.
Every state marked BASIC is also included in the ENHANCED list of states.

NOTE: There is a column for Intellirepeater (IR) stations, however 
WildCard will not be implemented for IR stations until a later date.
ASTRO denotes ASTRO/ANALOG (mixed mode) systems, not ASTRO only systems. 

WILDCARD STATES               |ASTRO|| CONV| 6809| IR  ||BASIC| ENH |
==============================|=====||=====|=====|=====||=====|=====|
ACC CODE TBL                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
ACC DISABLED                  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
ASTRO LINE PTT                |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
ASTRO RPTR PTT                |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
BATTERY REVERT                |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
BTRY OVR ALARM                |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
CLR LINE PTT                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
CLR RPTR PTT                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
COLD RESET                    |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
CONTROL CHN                   |  X  ||     |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
CUR CHN                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
DATA PTT                      |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
EVENT FLAG 1-16               |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
EXCITER ALARM                 |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
FAILSOFT                      |     ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
FWD PWR ALARM                 |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
HLGT DETECT                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 1                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 2                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 3                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 4                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 5                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 6                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 7                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 8                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
INPUT 9                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
INPUT 10                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
INPUT 11                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
INPUT 12                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
INTERCOM                      |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
LINE PTT                      |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
LLGT DETECT                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
LOCAL PTT                     |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
MAIN                          |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
MCS USER                      |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
MRTI PTT                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |     ||     |  X  |
OUTPUT 1                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
OUTPUT 2                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
OUTPUT 3                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
OUTPUT 4                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
OUTPUT 5                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
OUTPUT 6                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
OUTPUT 7                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
OUTPUT 8                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
OUTPUT 9                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
OUTPUT 10                     |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
PA ALARM                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
PIB ALARM                     |     ||     |     |  X  ||     |  X  |
PWR SPLY ALARM                |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
REFL PWR ALARM                |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
RPTR PTT                      |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RPTR QUAL MET                 |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RPTR SET UP                   |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RX ANALOG                     |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
RX1 ALARM                     |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
RX ASTRO ID                   |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
RX CAR DETECT                 |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
RX CD DETECT                  |     ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
RX INHIBITED                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX1 LOCK                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
RX PL DETECT                  |     ||  X  |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX PL DISABLED                |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX QUAL MET                   |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SAM ALARM                     |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
SAM COMMAND                   |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
SCAN SUSPENDED                |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SCANNING RX                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SECUR LINE PTT                |     ||  X  |  X  |     ||     |  X  |
SECUR RPTR PTT                |     ||  X  |  X  |     ||     |  X  |
STN ALARM                     |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
STN KEYED                     |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
TIMER DONE 1-10               |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
TRC TONE                      |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
TX INHIBITED                  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
TX LOCK                       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
TX PL DISABLED                |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
TX WL1 CD DET                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
UHSO ALARM                    |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
WARM RESET                    |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
WL ALARM                      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |


Below is a brief description of each state.

ACC CODE TBL XX (1-16)
     This state indicates the currently active ACC TABLE command.

ACC DISABLED
     When this state is active, remote controlled station keyups are
     halted.  Local control of the station is operational via the front
     panel while in this mode.  External requests are ignored.

ASTRO LINE PTT
     The station is keyed and is gating ASTRO from the wireline to
     the transmitter.

ASTRO RPTR PTT
     The station is keyed and is gating ASTRO from the receive ASTRO
     audio to the transmitter.

BATTERY REVERT
     The station has lost AC power and is now operating exclusively from
     the battery.

BTRY OVR ALARM
     The power supply has detected that the battery is charged above the
     normal setting.

CLR LINE PTT
     The station is keyed and is gating analog audio from the wireline to
     the transmitter.

CLR RPTR PTT
     The station is keyed and is gating analog audio from the receiver
     to the transmitter.

COLD RESET
     Station has just been powered up and completed the reset sequence.
     The status report is cleared.

CONTROL CHN
     Station is operating as a trunked control channel.

CUR CHN XX (1-16)
     This is the current channel of the station.

DATA PTT
     The station is keyed and is transmitting data.

EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)
     Used to coordinate activities.  Set and Cleared from SET EVENT FLAG 
     and CLR EVENT FLAG XX commands.  This state is evaluated as TRUE 
     when the EVENT FLAG is set; FALSE when the EVENT FLAG is cleared.

EXCITER ALARM
     An eprom checksum or communication failure has occurred on the
     Exciter module.

FAILSOFT
     Trunked Station has lost communication with the 6809 Central and is
     in Failsoft Mode.

FWD PWR ALARM
     The PA has detected a problem with the output power.  This alarm is
     generated if the output power is below 50% of expected power output.
     
     This alarm does not apply to Conventional Quantro Stations.

HLGT DETECT
     Station has detected High Level Guard Tone.

INPUT XX (1-7,9 for BASIC or 1-12 for ENHANCED)
     Specifies one of the available inputs.  This state is evaluated as
     TRUE when the input level matches the corresponding Active Level 
     in the WILDCARD INPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN.

INTERCOM
     When Intercom is active, the station control module treats
     a Local PTT as an Intercom PTT.  Local audio is gated to the
     Wireline when a Local PTT is generated, and the PA is not keyed.

LINE PTT
     The modulated audio source is the inbound TX Wireline port, line 1,
     when Line PTT is active.  The RSS has a field on the Channel
     Information screen to control the maximum amount of time this
     state can be active.

LLGT DETECT
     Station has detected Low Level Guard Tone.

LOCAL PTT
     The PTT type is Local.  The modulated audio source is from the
     local (microphone) input on the front of the station. The RSS
     has a field on the Channel Information screen to control the
     maximum amount of time this state can be active.

MAIN
     When the MAIN state is true the station is operating in Main
     mode.  When the MAIN state is false, the station is operating
     in Standby mode.

MCS USER XX (1-13)
     The currently detected MCS user.

MRTI PTT
     The station is keyed and is gating MRTI audio to the transmitter.


OUTPUT XX (1,2,3,7 for BASIC or 1-10 for ENHANCED)
     Specifies one of the available outputs.  This state is evaluated as
     TRUE when the output level matches the corresponding Active Level 
     in the WILDCARD OUTPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN.

PA ALARM
     A failure has occurred on the PA module.

PIB ALARM
     A failure has occurred on the Phone Interconnect Board.

PWR SPLY ALARM
     A failure has occurred on the Power Supply module.

     This alarm does not apply to Quantro Stations.

REFL PWR ALARM
     The PA has detected a problem with the output power and generates
     this alarm if the reflected power is above 25% of the expected power
     output.

     This alarm does not apply to Conventional Quantro Stations.

RPTR PTT
     The station is keyed and gating Rx audio to the transmitter.

     Repeater PTT is also active during the drop out delay of the
     station.  The RSS has a field on the channel screen to control
     the maximum amount of time this state can be active.

RPTR QUAL MET
     All qualifications have been satisfied to repeat the receive audio.
     These qualifiers can be found on the RSS Channel Information screen.

RPTR SET UP
     When this state is true, the station is capable of repeating.
     When it is false, the repeater is knocked down and will not repeat.

RX ANALOG
     Station is receiving analog audio.

RX1 ALARM
     A failure has occurred on the receiver module.
     The Rx Fail LED blinks once per second.

RX ASTRO ID
     Receiver has detected a valid 12 bit ASTRO network ID on the
     current channel.

RX CAR DETECT
     The receiver module has detected the carrier frequency for the
     current channel.

RX CD DETECT
     The receiver module has detected the presence of SECURENET (12 Kbit)
     data.

RX INHIBITED
     Rx 1 is disabled.

RX1 LOCK
     Indicates that the receiver module's VCO is locked onto the frequency
     programmed for the current channel.

RX PL DETECT
     The receiver has detected the presence of a PL, DPL or Connect tone.

RX PL DISABLED
     The Rx PL qualifier is removed from the list of receive activation
     qualifiers.

RX QUAL MET
     All receiver qualifications have been met to unsquelch and pass
     receiver audio.  The analog receive activation qualifiers can be
     found on the RSS Channel Information screen.

SAM ALARM
     SAM (Station Access Module) has failed.  The Rx fail LED blinks
     twice per second.

SAM COMMAND XX   (0-15)
     Detect bits 4-7 on the SPI bus from the Rx2 slot, the SAM module, and
     provide a decimal equivalent (0-15).  SAM COMMAND 0 is the SAM reset 
     state and should only be used to indicate that SAM has reset.  Bit 7 
     is the most significant bit and bit 4 is the least significant bit in 
     the SAM COMMAND nybble.
   
     SAM Wildcard    SAM Wildcard        Corresponding  
     Output          Output              SAM COMMAND
     ADDRESS         TARG BIT            SPI bus bit
     -----------     ------------        -------------
     004C            4                   4
     004C            5                   5
     004E            3                   6
     004E            4                   7

     This activity needs to be coordinated with programming the SAM module
     using the SAM RSS.

SCAN SUSPENDED
     The scanning process has been suspended in the station.

SCANNING RX
     The scanning process is active in the station.
     
SECUR LINE PTT
     Station is keyed and is gating SECURENET to the transmitter from
     the Wireline Line 1.

SECUR RPTR PTT
     Station is keyed and is gating SECURENET to the Transmitter.

STN ALARM
     If any one of the following alarms is active, then STN ALARM
     will be active.  All of these alarms must be inactive (not have
     occurred) for STN ALARM to be inactive.
     
     The alarms included are:
        EXCITER ALARM, FWD PWR ALARM, PA ALARM, PWR SPLY ALARM,
        REFL PWR ALARM, RX1 ALARM AND WL ALARM.
        
     BTRY OVR ALARM, PIB ALARM, SAM ALARM AND UHSO ALARM are also
     included when those options are installed.

STN KEYED
     The PA is keyed up at full power.  The PA FULL led is on.

TIMER DONE (1-10)
     Timer (1-10) has expired.  Timers are set using the START TIMER (1-10)
     command.

TRC TONE XX (1-15)
     Station has detected one of the 15 available TRC tones.

TX INHIBITED
     Station is inhibited from keying the PA.

TX LOCK
     Indicates that the Exciter module's VCO is locked onto the frequency
     programmed for the current channel.

TX PL DISABLED
     The station transmits analog only without PL or DPL.

TX WL1 CD DET
     Wireline input 1 has detected 12kbit SECURENET.

UHSO ALARM
     A failure has occurred on the UHSO module. The Rx fail LED will
     blink twice per second.

WARM RESET
     Station has just been reset, but power has not been lost.
     The status report is preserved.

WL ALARM
     A failure has occurred on the WL module.

*wc_state_value_help,A
WILDCARD STATE VALUE HELP


Certain states require values. Enter the value desired for the state
in the previous field.

Valid values for states are:

        STATE              RANGE
        ========================
        CUR CHN             1-16
        MCS USER            1-13 
        SAM COMMAND         0-15  
        TRC TONE            1-15  

*wc_condition_help,A
WILDCARD CONDITION HELP

The condition field logically connects station states.  The first two
states are logically evaluated and that result is then logically
evaluated with the third state.

It is a scrollable entry field with the choices of AND, OR, AND NOT, and
OR NOT.  The evaluation of the States and Conditions is done left to right
without parentheses.

NOTE: The WildCard Programming Rules cannot be accessed from this field.

*wc_command_help,A
WILDCARD ACTION/INACTION TABLE HELP

These commands will be queued up for execution in a sequential order by
the station whenever the related state condition changes state.

Commands in ACTION tables are executed sequentially when the state
changes from false to true, commands in INACTION tables are executed
sequentially when the state changes from true to false.

Each table is filled with commands from the COMMANDS List.  Fill the
commands by pressing the F2 key to display a choice list and scroll
through the list to select the command.  You may use the up/down
arrows keys, page up/page down keys to scroll the list. Alternately
you may type the first letter of the command to bring you to the first
command with that letter - subsequent typing of that letter will bring
you to the next command in the list that begins with that letter.  Pressing
enter will select the highlighted command and close the choice list.

Any or all of these command entries may be left blank but they will be
compressed together when stored in the codeplug.

This table lists the WildCard commands, the system types
they were intended for and whether they are included in the BASIC
or ENHANCED command set.  Every command marked BASIC is also included
in the ENHANCED list of commands.

WARNING: Make sure all CHN commands reference valid channel numbers and
	 all ACC TBL commands reference valid Access Code Tables. If an
	 undefined channel number or Access Code Table is referenced from
	 the WildCard Action/Inaction table, inconsistent station
	 operation may result.

NOTE: There is a column for Intellirepeater (IR) stations, however
WildCard will not be implemented for IR stations until a later date.
ASTRO denotes ASTRO/ANALOG (mixed mode) systems, not ASTRO only systems.

WILDCARD COMMANDS             |ASTRO|| CONV| 6809| IR  ||BASIC| ENH |
==============================|=====||=====|=====|=====||=====|=====|
ABORT TIMER 1-10              |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
ACC TABLE 1-16                |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
ACC TBL NORM                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
ALARM NORMAL                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
ALARM OFF                     |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
AUXPL+TX OFF                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
AUXPL+TX ON                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
AUXTX-TX OFF                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
AUXTX-TX ON                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
CHN (1-16)                    |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
CLR EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)      |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
CLR OUTPUT XX (1,2,3,7)       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
CLR OUTPUT XX (1-10)          |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
CLR SAM SPI X (3-5)           |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
DEKEY FROM WB                 |     ||  X  |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
DEKEY FROM WL                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
DEKEY PL                      |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
DPLX DISABLE                  |  X  ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
DPLX ENABLE                   |  X  ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
EXT CD DETECT                 |     ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
EXT CD UNDETEC                |     ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
FAILSOFT NORM                 |     ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
FAILSOFT OFF                  |     ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
FAILSOFT ON                   |     ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
HLGT ON XXXX(1-1000 msec)     |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
KEY FROM WB                   |     ||  X  |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
KEY FROM WL                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
KEY WITH PL                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
LLGT OFF                      |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
LLGT ON                       |     ||     |     |     ||     |  X  |
MAIN                          |     ||     |     |     ||     |  X  |
MRTI DISABLE                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
MRTI ENABLE                   |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
MUTE TX                       |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
NEXT TABLE                    |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
NULL                          |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
RESET                         |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
RF TONE OFF                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RF TONE ON XXXX  (Hz)         |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RPTR KNOCKDOWN                |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RPTR QUAL FORCE               |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RPTR QUAL NORM                |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RPTR SETUP                    |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RSTR SVD CHN                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX ENABLE                     |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RX INHIBIT                    |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RX WL ENABLE                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX WL INHIBIT                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX WL MUTE                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX PL DISABLE                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX PL ENABLE                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX QUAL FORCE                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX QUAL NORM                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
RX1+AUXRX OFF                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RX1+AUXRX ON                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RX1-AUXRX OFF                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RX1-AUXRX ON                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RXDSC-AUXRX OFF               |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
RXDSC-AUXRX ON                |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
SAVE CUR CHN                  |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SCAN OFF                      |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SCAN ON                       |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SCAN RESUME                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SCAN SUSPEND                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SEL ALM DISABL                |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SEL ALM ENABLE                |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
SET EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)      |  X  ||  X  |     |  X  ||     |  X  |
SET OUTPUT xx (1,2,3,7)       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
SET OUTPUT xx (1-10)          |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||     |  X  |
SET SAM SPI X (3-5)           |  X  ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
ST DISABLE                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
ST ENABLE                     |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
STANDBY                       |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
START TIMER 1-10 (1-65535msec)|  X  ||  X  |     |  X  ||     |  X  |
TRC FT XX (1-15)              |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
TRUNK RPT OFF                 |     ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
TRUNK RPT ON                  |     ||     |  X  |     ||  X  |  X  |
TX ENABLE                     |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
TX INHIBIT                    |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
TX PL DISABLE                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
TX PL ENABLE                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||  X  |  X  |
UNMUTE TX                     |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WAIT XXXX (1-1000 msec)       |  X  ||  X  |  X  |  X  ||  X  |  X  |
WL TONE OFF                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL TONE ON (300-3500 Hz)      |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1+AUXRX OFF                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1+AUXRX ON                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1+WL2 OFF                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1+WL2 ON                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1-AUXRX OFF                 |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1-AUXRX ON                  |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1-WL2 OFF                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL1-WL2 ON                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3+TX OFF                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3+TX ON                     |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3+WL2 OFF                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3+WL2 ON                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3-TX OFF                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3-TX ON                     |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3-WL2 OFF                   |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
WL3-WL2 ON                    |     ||  X  |     |     ||     |  X  |
                                                                   
Below is a brief description of each command.

ABORT TIMER XX (1-10)
   The ABORT TIMER command will stop the timer process that was initiated
   by the START TIMER XX command, and any commands in the TIMER DONE XX
   condition table will not be executed.

ACC TABLE XX (1-16)
   This command changes the Access Code Table to xx that the channel
   is using without changing the channel number.  The Access Code Table
   contains the PL/DPL, and the ASTRO Access Codes.

ACC TABLE NORM
   This command changes the Access Code Table to the table that the
   codeplug has defined for the current channel without changing the
   channel number.  The Access Code Table contains the PL/DPL, and the
   ASTRO Access Codes.

ALARM NORMAL
   This command applies to the alarm tones that are generated after an
   alarm condition is declared. These tones are sent out either over the
   RF and/or over the wireline depending on the codeplug configuration.
   The alarm tones are enabled, only if they are enabled in the codeplug,
   and stay enabled until an Alarm Off command is executed. After a
   station resets, the alarms are either enabled or disabled depending
   on the conditions defined in the codeplug.

ALARM OFF
   The alarm tones that are generated by the station when an alarm occurs
   are disabled and stay disabled until an Alarm Enable Command is
   executed. After a station reset, the alarms are either enabled or
   disabled depending on the conditions defined in the codeplug.

AUXPL+TX OFF
   The station stops mixing AUX PL AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port 
   with any other signals currently present at the transmitter.

AUXPL+TX ON
   The station mixes AUX PL AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port with 
   any other signals currently present at the transmitter.  The 
   allowable frequency range for AUX PL AUDIO is 67.0Hz-254.1Hz.  
   The required signal level for AUX PL AUDIO into the AUX TX AUDIO 
   port is -10dbm.

AUXTX-TX OFF     
   The station stops routing AUX TX AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port to
   the transmitter.

AUXTX-TX ON      
   The station routes AUX TX AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port to the
   transmitter.

CHN XX (1-16)
   The station changes the current channel and set it to the number
   described by xx. The RSS will allow channel numbers 1-16.
   Undefined channel numbers received through ASTRO or WildCard commands
   will be ignored and a channel change will not be executed.

CLR EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)
   The station clears the specified one of sixteen event flags.

CLR OUTPUT XX (1,2,3,7 for BASIC or 1-10 for ENHANCED)
   The station clears the requested output line.

CLR SAM SPI X (3-5)
   The station clears the selected bit on the SPI bus for the second
   receiver, usually occupied by the SAM module.  Bits 3-5 correspond
   to SAM Wildcard Inputs 11-13, respectively.

   This activity needs to be coordinated with programming the SAM
   module using the SAM RSS.

DEKEY FROM WB
   Dekey the transmitter and stop the gating of the Wideband Tx audio to
   the transmitter from the WIDEBAND TX PORT.

DEKEY FROM WL
   Dekey the transmitter and stop the gating of the Tx wireline audio
   to the transmitter.

DEKEY PL
   Dekey the transmitter and stop the gating of only PL to the transmitter.

DPLX DISABLE
   This command is used to terminate the duplex mode established with
   the Duplex Enable command. After this command is executed, default
   repeat routing is performed.

   This command is valid for 6809 Trunked systems without a comparator.

DPLX ENABLE
   When this command is executed, qualified receive audio is not gated
   to the transmitter.  WL Tx audio becomes gated instead to the
   transmitter.   All other trunking functions are not affected. Out of
   reset, the station allows gating of qualified receive audio to the
   transmitter.

   This command is valid for 6809 Trunked systems without a comparator.

EXT CD DETECT
   The station immediately assumes incoming signal is SECURENET.
   Without using this command, the station waits for the code detect
   algorithm and relies on the output of the algorithm to drive its
   internal SECURENET functions.

EXT CD UNDETEC
   The station immediately assumes incoming signal is not SECURENET.
   After this command is received,  the station's wireline code detect
   algorithm, which normally declares whether or not the Tx wireline
   port has 12 kbps on it, is reactivated.

FAILSOFT NORM
   The station goes into Failsoft mode if communication from the
   central is lost and the station has failsoft enabled.

FAILSOFT OFF
   The station will not go into Failsoft mode if the trunked station
   loses communication with the central.

FAILSOFT ON
   The station is forced into Failsoft mode even if the station has
   failsoft disabled.

HLGT ON xxxx (msec) (1 - 1000)
   The station generates HLGT for the number of milliseconds requested.
   Minimum resolution is 10 msec.

   All times will be rounded to the NEXT 10 millisecond interval.  The
   frequency of HLGT is specified in the Wireline Configuration Screen
   in the RSS.

KEY FROM WB
   The station keys up the transmitter and route GEN TX DATA to the
   transmitter, as long as the station is not access disabled.

   The user must provide an external splatter filter and level/deviation
   control for this input.

   The station will expect -10 dBm and provide 60% of max deviation.
   
   This command is only valid for Simulcast systems.

KEY FROM WL
   The station keys up the transmitter if not access disabled, and
   gates the audio from the Tx Wireline port to the transmitter.

   Audio is gated from the wireline to the transmitter and it is passed
   through the same filters which is are used for normal station operation.

KEY WITH PL
   Key only with PL and only gate PL to the transmitter, audio is muted.

LLGT OFF
   The station terminates the generation of LLGT to WL 2.

LLGT ON
   The station generates LLGT to WL 2.

MAIN
   In a Main/Standby configuration, the station becomes the MAIN station.
   Upon reset, in a Main/Standby configuration, the station checks the
   WildCard tables to see if it's supposed to startup in the MAIN or
   STANDBY mode.

MRTI DISABLE
   Disables the phone patch.

MRTI ENABLE
   Enables the phone patch.

MUTE TX
   The station mutes the analog audio being transmitted.  This command
   does not mute PL.

NEXT TABLE
   This command extends the command lists. A table view is limited to
   eight commands. If the user wishes to program more than eight commands
   from a single input, the NEXT TABLE command is used.  Execution of
   commands is then transferred from the current table to the next table.

NULL
   This command, as the name describes, does nothing.  It is used to fill
   out unused table entries where necessary.

RESET
   An unconditional station reset is initiated.

RF TONE OFF
   The station ceases generating a tone to the Exciter at the level
   specified for average voice.  Alarm tones are then unmuted if the
   alarm tones have been enabled.  This command also dekeys the station.

RF TONE ON XXXX    (Hz) 
   The station generates a xxxx Hz tone to the Exciter at the level 
   specified for average voice. Alarm tones are muted under this condition.  
   This command also keys the station.

   Range to use for RF TONE ON is 300 - 3000.
   
   Note:  The RF TONE ON command is generated with PL, if enabled in the 
   Access Code Table. To disable PL use the TX PL DISABLE command.

RPTR KNOCKDOWN
   When this command is received, the repeat function is not allowed to
   occur.  If station type is set to BASE, this command is ignored.

RPTR QUAL FORCE
   The station assumes that all repeater qualifiers have been met.
   NOTE: In an ASTRO Station with Wild Card Enabled, this command will
   not enable repeat for analog calls.

RPTR QUAL NORM
   The station reverts to the codeplug specified qualifiers for
   repeater activity.

RPTR SETUP
   When this command is received the repeat function is allowed to occur
   only if station type is not set to BASE. The repeat function occurs
   when the conditions attached to the parameters specified in the
   Repeater Activation Field are met. When the parameters are met, the
   transmitter is keyed up and processed receive audio is gated to the
   transmitter.  The station starts out of reset with repeater set
   up when the station is defined as a REPEATER in the RSS Station
   Configuration Screen.

RSTR SVD CHN
   The station changes channels to the channel saved by the SAVE CUR CHN
   command.  This command must be preceded by a SAVE CUR CHN command.

RX ENABLE
   The station's receiver function is enabled. This command normally
   follows an RX INHIBIT command since after a reset, the station 
   enables the receiver.

RX INHIBIT
   The station's receiver is turned off and will not generate any
   qualified receive or repeat activity.  After a reset, the station
   sets the receiver to enable.

RX WL ENABLE
   The station's receive audio is enabled to be sent to the wireline.
   This is the normal state of the station when it comes out of reset 
   provided that there is a wireline module present.

RX WL INHIBIT
   The station's receive audio is inhibited from being sent to the
   wireline. In the typical case, the Rx wireline would just be muted.
   If the station has status tone enabled, then the Rx wireline would have 
   status tone on it.

RX WL MUTE
   The station's receive wireline is totally muted.  If the station has
   status tone enabled, then status tone is also muted.  Alarms are also
   muted under this condition. Any possible audio that could be sent down
   the wireline is muted.

RX1 PL DISABLE
   This command disables the station from using the qualifiers specified
   by the RSS to qualify receive audio. After this command is received,
   the station  will only use carrier squelch as the qualifier for receive
   audio.  PL in this command is the same as DPL.

RX1 PL ENABLE
   Provided that a valid PL or DPL or connect tone has been defined for
   the currently active channel, this command will enable the station to
   use the qualifiers specified in the RSS Channel Screen RX Activation
   field to initiate station tasks driven by the reception of the received
   audio signal.

RX1 QUAL FORCE
   The station assumes that all receiver qualifiers have been met.

RX1 QUAL NORM
   The station reverts to the receiver qualifiers as they are programmed
   in the Channel Info Screen.

RX1+AUXRX OFF     
   The station stops mixing filtered receive audio with any other 
   signals present at the AUX RX AUDIO port.

RX1+AUXRX ON     
   The station mixes filtered receive with any other signals present at 
   the AUX RX AUDIO port.

RX1-AUXRX OFF 
   The station stops routing filtered receive audio to the AUX RX AUDIO
   port.

RX1-AUXRX ON       
   The station routes filtered receive audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.

RXDSC-AUXRX OFF    
   The station stops routing discriminator audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.

RXDSC-AUXRX ON     
   The station routes discriminator audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.

SAVE CUR CHN
   The current channel number is stored in the station's memory.
   Station operation on this channel can be restored by using
   the RSTR SVD CHN command.

SCAN OFF    
   Turns the scanning receiver process off and the stations returns 
   to the CURRENT channel.

SCAN ON    
   Turns the scanning receiver process on.

SCAN RESUME  
   If the scanning function has been suspended by the SCAN SUSPEND 
   command and the scanning function is on, the station will restart 
   the scan function on the SCAN channel.  SCAN RESUME restarts the 
   scan timers.

SCAN SUSPEND 
   If the scanning function is on, the station will stop scanning and 
   place the station on the CURRENT channel. If the scanning function 
   is off, the station will ignore this command.
SEL ALM DISABL
   This command applies to the alarm tones that are generated after an
   alarm condition is declared. These tones are sent out either over
   the air or over the wireline. Upon execution of this command, the
   alarm tones are disabled and stay disabled until a different alarm
   occurs.  This command allows a console operator to turn off alarm tones
   because they may be deemed a nuisance since the initial alarm is known.
   However, new alarms will be reported. After a station reset, the alarms
   are either enabled or disabled depending on the conditions defined in
   the codeplug.

SEL ALM ENABLE
   This command applies to the alarm tones that are generated  after an
   alarm condition is declared. These tones are sent out either over the
   RF or over the wireline. Upon execution of this command, alarm tones
   are enabled and stay enabled. After a station reset , the alarms are
   either enabled or disabled depending on the conditions defined in
   the codeplug.

   This command is used to enable alarms which had been previously
   disabled by a Selective Alarm Disable command. The console operator
   may want to periodically check to see if an alarm condition is still
   active. The operator may have previously shut off the alarms and 
   through the use of this command will know, by hearing the tones, if 
   the alarm(s) are still there.

SET EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)
   The station sets the specified event flag.

SET OUTPUT XX
   The station sets the requested output line.

   Below is a table describing the HI and LO settings.

          Active
          Level | Transistor |Relay/Optocoupler
          ======|============|=================
          HI    |    +5V     |      OPEN
          ------|------------|-----------------
          LO    |   GROUND   |     CLOSED

   When you lose power to the station, the relays and the transistors
   will be open regardless of the WildCard Settings.

SET SAM SPI X (3-5)
   The station sets the selected bit on the SPI bus for the second
   receiver, usually occupied by the SAM module.  Bits 3-5 correspond
   to SAM Wildcard Inputs 11-13, respectively.
   
   This activity needs to be coordinated with programming the SAM 
   module using the SAM RSS.

ST DISABLE
   This command disables Status Tone until a ST ENABLE or a WL TONE OFF
   command is executed.
   
   This command is valid when Status Tone is ENABLED in the codeplug 
   via the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION SCREEN.

ST ENABLE
   This command enables Status Tone.
   
   This command is valid when Status Tone is ENABLED in the codeplug 
   via the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION SCREEN.

STANDBY
   In a Main/Standby configuration, the station becomes the STANDBY
   station. Upon reset, in a Main/Standby configuration, the station
   checks the WildCard tables to see if it's supposed to startup in the
   MAIN or STANDBY mode.

START TIMER(1-10) XXXXX (msec)
   This command is used to start a timer for xxxxx milliseconds.  When the
   specified  time has expired the TIMER DONE may be used as a station
   state to execute additional commands.  The ABORT TIMER command will
   stop the timer process and the commands in the TIMER DONE X condition
   table will not be executed.

TRC FT XX (1-15)
   The station generate the requested
   TRC function tone.  Function Tones :
      1  - 2050 Hz               6 - 1550 Hz             11 - 1050 Hz
      2  - 1950 Hz               7 - 1450 Hz             12 -  950 Hz
      3  - 1850 Hz               8 - 1350 Hz             13 -  850 Hz
      4  - 1750 Hz               9 - 1250 Hz             14 -  750 Hz
      5  - 1650 Hz              10 - 1150 Hz             15 -  650 Hz

   If HLGT matches any function tone, that function tone should not be
   used.

TRUNK RPT OFF
   This command complements the Trunking in Cabinet Repeat command
   TRUNK RPT ON.

TRUNK RPT ON
   The station gates qualified receive audio, analog or SECURENET, instead
   of Tx wireline audio to the transmitter.  Out of reset, The station
   normally gates Tx wireline audio to the transmitter for this
   configuration since it is connected to a comparator.

TX ENABLE
   This command enables the station to key the transmitter. It is normally
   used after a Tx Inhibit command since the station normally comes out of
   reset with the ability to key the transmitter enabled.

TX INHIBIT
   This command inhibits the station from keying the transmitter.

TX PL DISABLE
   When this command is executed, The station stops transmitting PL or DPL
   with the Analog audio signal.  It is entirely possible that for a
   current channel, PL or DPL have not been defined, in this case, this
   command does not do anything. But if a channel change occurs and that
   channel has PL or DPL defined, then transmitting that PL/DPL is
   inhibited until a TX PL ON command is received.  This command is
   executed whenever it is received. If the command is received in the
   middle of a transmission, then the transmission switches from a PL
   transmission to a non-PL transmission.

TX PL ENABLE
   Provided that a valid PL or DPL has been defined for the currently
   active channel, this command will enable the station to attach that
   PL or DPL to the analog signal that is to be transmitted.  When the
   station comes out of reset, the station transmits with PL/DPL on
   channels programmed with PL/DPL.

UNMUTE TX
   The station allows analog audio to be transmitted.

WAIT XXXX (msec) (max 1000)
   This command is used to delay the execution of the next command in the
   Action/Inaction table.  The station delay the time specified above
   before executing the next command in the queue.  Minimum time is
   10 msec.  All times will be rounded to the NEXT 10 millisecond interval
   when stored in the codeplug.

        NOTE: If a time period longer than 1000 milliseconds is needed,
              it is recommended that the START TIMER command (1-10) be
              used instead.

WL TONE OFF
   The station turns off the tone currently being generated to the receive
   wireline as a result of a WL TONE ON command.  The receive wireline is
   restored to normal service; that is, the operations for receive audio,
   status tone, if enabled in the codeplug, and alarms, if enabled in the 
   codeplug, are then processed normally to the wireline.  This is the 
   normal state of the station when it comes out of reset provided that
   there is a wireline module present.

WL TONE ON XXXX  (Hz) (300-3500 recommended)
   The station generates a xxxx Hz tone to receive wireline at the
   level specified for average voice.  This is the level specified for
   the receive wireline level  alignment.  If the station has status
   tone enabled, then status tone is disabled.  Alarms are also muted
   under this condition.  This function is typically used to test the
   phone line to the console.

WL1+AUXRX OFF
   The station stops mixing TX WL1 audio with any signal present at
   the AUX RX AUDIO port.

WL1+AUXRX ON  
   The station mixes TX WL1 audio with any signal present at the
   AUX RX AUDIO port.

WL1+WL2 OFF
   The station stops mixing TX WL1audio with any signal present on RX WL2.

WL1+WL2 ON
   The station mixes TX WL1audio with any signal present on RX WL2.

WL1-AUXRX OFF    
   The station stops routing TX WL1 audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.

WL1-AUXRX ON      
   The station routes TX WL1 audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.

WL1-WL2 OFF
   The station stops routing TX WL1 audio to RX WL2.

WL1-WL2 ON
   The station routes TX WL1 audio to RX WL2.

WL3+TX OFF
   This command will stop mixing the audio from WL3 with signal present
   at the transmitter.  The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline
   Configuration Screen must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3+TX ON
   The station mixes the audio from WL3 with signal present at the
   transmitter.  The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline
   Configuration Screen must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3-TX OFF
   The station stops routing the audio from WL3 to the transmitter.
   The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen
   must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3-TX ON
   The station routes the audio from WL3 to the transmitter.  The Wireline 
   Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be set to
   6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3+WL2 OFF
   This command will stop mixing the audio from WL3 with signal present
   on WL2.  The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration
   Screen must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3+WL2 ON
   The station mixes the audio from WL3 with signal present on WL2.  The
   Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be
   set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3-WL2 OFF
   The station stops routing the audio from WL3 to WL2.  The Wireline
   Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be set to
   6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

WL3-WL2 ON
   The station routes the audio from WL3 to WL2.  The Wireline Operation
   field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be set to 6 or 8
   WIRE FULL DUPLEX.

*wc_command_value_help,A
WILDCARD COMMAND VALUE HELP


Certain commands require values. Enter the value desired for the command
in the previous field.

Valid values for commands are:

        COMMAND         BASIC WILDCARD    ENHANCED WILDCARD
        ===================================================
        ACC TABLE          1-16                 1-16
        CHN                1-16                 1-16
        CLR EVENT FLAG                          1-16
        CLR OUTPUT         1,2,3,7              1-10
        CLR SAM SPI                             3-5
        HLGT ON                                 1-1000 msec
        RF TONE ON                              1-65534 Hz(use 300-3000)
        SET EVENT FLAG                          1-16
        SET OUTPUT         1,2,3,7              1-10
        SET SAM SPI                             3-5
        START TIMER 1-10   1-65534 msec         1-65534 msec
        TRC FT                                  1-15
        WAIT               1-1000 msec          1-1000 msec
        WL TONE ON                              1-65534 Hz



*scan_list_help,A
SCAN LIST SCREEN HELP

The SCAN LIST screen allows the user to configure parameters that
will affect the scanning operation by the station.  Please see the
individual field help for more information.

In order to configure a station with MRTI and Scan, 3 timers need to be 
configured:

1) SUBSCRIBER PRETIME - Subscribers have the ability to generate carrier
   for a programmable amount of time before sending a DTMF tone for MRTI 
   access.  As long as this time period is long enough for scanning to 
   detect the carrier and lock on to the channel, they should be able to 
   get in to the MRTI.
 
   The time will vary based upon the time delays set on Scan configuration 
   screen, and the number of channels in the station.

2) RESUME SCAN TIMER - The "Resume Scan Timer" on the scan configuration 
   screen must be long enough to cover the worst case delay between the 
   time a MRTI detects the last phone access request tone, and the time 
   the MRTI returns back with a PTT request. The time has been measured 
   on MRTI to be 2 seconds. Thus the Resume Scan Timer needs to be at 
   least 2 seconds.

3) SUBSCRIBER HANG TIME - Subscribers have the ability to program the 
   length of carrier sent after a MRTI access tone.  Thus the total 
   of this carrier "hold-in" + Resume Scan Timer time is at least 2 
   seconds.  This parameter can be used to lower the Resume Scan Timer.

NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*scan_at_reset_help,A
SCAN ON AT RESET HELP

If this field is set to ENABLED, the station will begin scanning
the receiver(s) for activity as soon as it comes out of reset.

If this field is set to DISABLED, the scan function will begin
whenever a TRC or WildCard command is generated.


NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*priority_chnl_help,A
PRIORITY CHANNEL HELP

The selected priority channel is scanned between all other channels
programmed for scanning.

If this field is set to NONE, then no channels are selected for
priority scan.

If this field is set to a channel number, then that channel is
scanned in between all other scan channels.


NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*float_priority_help,A
FLOATING PRIORITY HELP

If the Priority Channel field is set to FLOAT, the station is
allowed to have a variable priority channel.  The priority channel
is then determined by the Floating Priority field.

If Floating Priority is set to RX, the last active receiver channel
is the floating priority channel.

If Floating Priority is set to TX, the last active transmit channel
is the floating priority channel.

If Floating Priority is set to RX & TX, the last active transmit
channel or the last active receive channel is the priority channel.

If Floating Priority is set to NONE, then scanning priority is turned
off.

NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*channel_marking_help,A
CHANNEL MARKING HELP

Channel Marking allows the station to mark scan channels that have
valid carrier activity but incorrect PL/DPL.  This marked channel is
not scanned until the channel loses carrier.  At that time, the
mark is removed from that channel, and it will be scanned as usual.

The channel marks are removed when scanning stops.

The mark on the priority channel can only be removed when carrier is
lost on the priority channel.


NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*scan_delay_help,A
SCAN DELAY FIELD HELP


This parameter indicates the amount of time that the scan process
waits after losing non-priority channel activity before resuming the
scan.  If activity is detected while the timer is in progress, the
timer is reset.

Timer Range:        0 - 10000 milliseconds
Default             3000 milliseconds
Increment Value     hundred of second


*pri_scan_delay_help,A
PRIORITY SCAN DELAY HELP


This parameter indicates the amount of time that the scan process
waits after losing priority channel activity before resuming the
scan.  If CARRIER is detected while the timer is in progress, the
timer is reset.

Timer Range:        0 - 10000 milliseconds
Default             3000 milliseconds
Increment Value     hundred of second


*scan_sample_time_help,A
SCAN SAMPLE TIME HELP


This parameter specifies the time during which a channel is checked
for carrier.

Timer Range:        20 - 10000 milliseconds
Default             300 milliseconds
Increment Value     hundred of second

NOTE:  When station is Secure, Scan Sample time of at least
90 msec is required.  


*priority_recheck_tm_help,A
PRIORITY RECHECK TIME HELP

This parameter specifies how often a priority channel is checked
while a non-priority channel is active.  The Priority Recheck time
must be greater than the PL/DPL Pre-Detect Time.

Timer Range:        0 - 10000 milliseconds
Default             500 milliseconds
Increment Value     hundred of second



*rx_qualify_tm_help,A
Rx QUALIFY TIMER HELP


This parameter specifies the time allocated to detect PL/DPL, ASTRO
or SECURENET after a carrier is detected.

Timer Range:        210 - 10000 milliseconds
Default             250 milliseconds
Increment Value     hundred of second


*resume_scan_tm_help,A
RESUME SCAN TIMER HELP

This parameter specifies the time that the station must wait after a
RESUME SCAN command is issued until scanning is actually resumed.

Timer Range:        0 - 10000 milliseconds
Default             2000 milliseconds
Increment Value     hundred of second


*scan_help,A
SCAN HELP

Sets the related channel to be scan ENABLED or DISABLED.


NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*tx_slave_help,A
TX SLAVE HELP

TX SLAVE changes the TX channel when the scan function detects
receiver activity.

When ENABLED and the scan function detects activity on a channel,
the station transmits on the SCAN channel where the receive activity
occurred.  When DISABLED and the station transmits, the station
transmits on the current active channel.



NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended 
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.

*outbound_link_timer_help,A
OUTBOUND ANALOG LINK TIMER HELP	

In a mixed mode ASTRO system, during analog sessions infrastructure
devices periodically report to one another that an analog call is in 
progress.

The outbound analog link timer field is used to program the frequency
of these reports when the devices are linked with ASTRO modems. The 
frequency over V.24 Hybrid links is fixed at 500 milliseconds. 

The purpose for sending these reports is to provide a link integrity 
check during analog calls.  If the Analog session ends before the timer
does, the station will check the links in the normal fashion, otherwise
it will specifically check at the timer interval.

Use this field to set the frequency at which the station will report
to its connected device that it is receiving an analog call. The valid
range is 20 to 300 seconds; however, this parameter will be rounded
to the nearest 10 second interval before it is stored in the
codeplug.


*wl_squelch_hlp,A
WIRELINE SQUELCH, THRESHOLD AND HYSTERESIS HELP

Wireline Squelch is a station function which will mute the analog
wireline transmit analog audio path when the input wireline
level drops below a predetermined threshold.  This is needed to
comply with the line regulations for some countries (especially
in Europe).  The intent is to inhibit the transmission of low-
level signals in order to prevent cross-talk.  The default 
setting for Wireline Squelch is DISABLED.

The Squelch Threshold is the level at which wireline transmit 
audio will be muted.  This value is country dependent.  The
Squelch Threshold field is not editable when Wireline squelch is
Disabled.  The default value for Squelch Threshold is -50 dBm.

Squelch Hysteresis is used to keep a station from continuously
toggling between muted and unmuted when the input signal is
hovering around the Squelch Threshold.  The wireline transmit
audio is muted when the input level drops below the Squelch
Threshold.  It is not unmuted until the input level exceeds the
threshold by the Squelch Hysteresis value.

The Squelch Hysteresis value is country dependent.  This field 
is not editable when Wireline Squelch is Disabled.  The default
value for Squelch Hysteresis is 1 dB.


*ref_level_hlp,A
REFERENCE LEVEL HELP

Enter the desired input level in the field shown on the screen.
This value should correspond to the level of the tone that is
input to the station for alignment.  It will yield a 60% transmit
deviation.  This value is also used as a reference for Wireline
Squelch alignment and adjustment.  The legal range is 0 to -35
dBm.  The current level stored in the station is displayed under
"Stored".  You can change this value by entering a new value
under "Current" and then performing the alignment.

*rx_discrim_hlp,A
RX DISCRIMINATOR TYPE HELP

6809 Trunking Systems require that all stations at the same site 
match their Rx Discriminator Audio characteristics.  This is now 
accomplished through the Rx Discriminator Type field setting.

The choices for Rx Discriminator Type are QUANTAR/MICOR or MSF.  The
default is QUANTAR/MICOR.  At 900 MHz, stations are predominantly 
MSF based.

Note: The Micor and MSF stations are incompatible in a 6809 Trunking
configuration as Control Channels.  Voice channels do not have this
restriction.

The Rx Discriminator Type field affects the setting of the internal 
switched capacitor filter that controls the bandwidth of the Rx Audio
signal that goes to the Input Recovery Board discriminator input.
The bandwidth of the discriminator signal varies depending upon the 
RF band, IF bandwidth, and type of station.  The Rx Discriminator
Type field should be set according to the following guidelines.

Band        Adding a New Quantar or
(MHz)       Quantro to a 6809 site with:    Rx Discriminator Type
-------     ---------------------           ---------------------
800 MHz     MSF Control Channel             MSF
            Micor Control Channel           QUANTAR/MICOR

900 MHz     MSF Control Channel             MSF

Note: For Release 6 and earlier, Rx Discriminator Type cannot be 
changed.  Release 7 RSS and later will allow the selection to occur, 
but Pre-Release 7 Station Firmware will ignore it.

*rx_sel_menu,A
RECEIVER SELECTION MENU

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Displays this screen.

     F2  - Select Receiver 1 measurements.

     F3  - Select Receiver 2 measurements.

     F10 - Exit to the previous menu.



*wc_rules,A

WILDCARD PROGRAMMING RULES

NOTE:  Since the Programming Rules use the HELP system; in order to 
get to the help for this field you must exit the field and come back 
and then press the F1 key.

AUDIO ROUTING COMMAND RULES
---------------------------
There are two types of WildCard Audio Routing Commands:  Audio Mixing
(adding) and Audio Routing.

Audio Mixing commands are displayed as <source>+<destination>.  For
example, WL1+WL2 mixes (or adds) the audio signal input at WL1 with
the signal currently being sent to WL2.

Audio Routing commands are displayed as <source>-<destination>.  For 
example, RX1-WL4 routes (connects) the signal from RX1 (Receiver 
Module 1)to WL4 (Wireline Module Line 4).

The Audio Mixing and Audio Routing commands are provided in ON/OFF
pairs.  For example, WL1+WL2 ON and WL1+WL2 OFF comprise the WL1+WL2
ON/OFF pair.

In order to insure proper audio command functionality, the following
rules should be applied when using WildCard audio commands:

- Simultaneous routing and mixing to the same audio destination is 
  not supported.  For example, WL1+WL22 ON and RX1-WL2 ON may not be
  active simultaneously, since the "destination" in each command is 
  WL2.  In this example, before you use the RX1-WL2 ON command, you
  must first terminate the WL1_WL2 ON command by using the WL1+WL2 OFF
  command.

- Simultaneous WL1 and WL3 audio commands are not supported 

- Simultaneous AUXPL+TX ON and AUXTX-TX ON commands are not 
  supported.


MAIN/STANDBY RULES
------------------
The first 10 default WildCard tables for stations configured with
Main/Standby as MAIN or STANDBY on the Hardware Configuration Screen
are the Main/Standby WildCard Tables and should not be altered.

These tables will be changed or deleted automatically based on the
Hardware Configuration Screen.

Also, if a station is set as MAIN or STANDBY it is a good idea NOT
to use the following event flags in user-configured tables
as they are used by the MAIN/STANDBY tables:

		  EVENT FLAG 1,2,3,4,5,6,7


When the Main/Standby stations have MRTI, MRTI should be DISABLED when
the station is Standby and then ENABLED when it becomes the Main Station.
The is automatically handled in the default tables for Main/Standby, but
if the tables are altered, the MRTI ENABLE command should appear before
the MAIN command and the MRTI DISABLE command should appear after the
STANDBY command.



METHODS OF KEYING FROM THE CONSOLE:  
-----------------------------------
The station provides for three methods of keying up from the console, 
TRC, DC or EXT PTT.  In all cases the console audio is connected to 
Line 1. The three methods are exclusive and cannot be used at the same 
time. To key up from the console use either TRC or DC or EXT PTT. Only 
one method should be used.



SAM MODULE RULES
----------------
In order for the audio to be routed to the SAM module, a special table 
must exist in the WildCard tables when both WildCard and SAM are enabled.

If the Analog Rptr Access field on ANY channel is not set to NONE, the 
RTE AUDIO - SAM table must be added to the WildCard  State/Condition 
tables.  

If the above condition is true, this is automatically added when the 
SET TO DEFAULT key is pressed,  however if you make any changes to this 
field after your WildCard tables are set, you must add this table
by hand or reset your WildCard tables to Default (and lose any tables
you may have created).

To add this table by hand, press F3-ADD TABLE key, then set the new 
table to look like this:

Description:  RTE AUDIO - SAM

                          STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS
State                 Cond   State                 Cond   State
WARM RESET            OR     COLD RESET
======================================================================
ACTION:                           INACTION:
       RXDSC-AUXRX ON                      NULL


SCANNING RECEIVER RULES
-----------------------
There are two commands that were designed to handle changes in station 
operation while maintaining proper control of a station which is scanning. 
These commands are SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME. If an external input 
causes the station to change any of its operating modes, then the TRC, 
DC or WildCard action table that contains these commands must also include 
the SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME. Scan operation must be stopped, the 
change invoked in the station and then SCAN can commence. An example 
WILD CARD ACTION is displayed below.

Description: CHANNEL 2        TABLE ? OF ?             Jump to Table   
                                                                            
                         STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS                      
State                Cond    State                Cond    State            
TRC TONE 3                                                                 
======================================================================
     ACTION:                             INACTION:                         
            - SCAN SUSPEND                        -                       
            - CHN 3                               -                      
            - SCAN RESUME                         -                      
            -                                     -                      
            -                                     -                      


A TRC or DC table would contain the same three commands for a channel 
change.


STATUS TONE RULES
-----------------
If Status Tone is used, TRC ENCODE and Wireline Tones cannot be used.


WIRELINE TONE GENERATION RULES
------------------------------
If Wild Card tables, containing commands which generate wireline 
tones, are set up in stations configured for 2-wire wireline 
connections, then these tables must also take into account that 
the tones must be muted BEFORE an incoming console call. The muting 
must be handled in the wild card tables. The WildCard feature will 
not automatically mute the WildCard generated tones thus an incoming
call CANNOT be detected.



*motac_hlp,A
CHANGE/VIEW CODEPLUG MENU HELP

   This section allows the user to view and change the comparator's 
   operating parameters.  Some screens may be disabled based on the 
   current hardware configuration.


Function Key Description:

   F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

   F2  - Change and view configuration parameters which are specific 
         to a conventional system configuration.  This screen is 
         disabled if the system type field in the Hardware 
         Configuration screen is not set to CONVENTIONAL.

   F3  - Change and view configuration parameters which are specific 
         to a SmartZone system configuration.  This screen is 
         disabled if the system type field in the Hardware 
         Configuration screen is not set to SMARTZONE.

   F4  - Change and view configuration parameters which are applied 
         to the voting algorithm for analog signals.

   F5  - Change and view configuration parameters that are port 
         specific.  The link type, link delay, and output levels 
         are among the parameters which are present in this section. 

   F6  - Not used.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Not used. 
 
   F9  - Not used. 
        
   F10 - Exit to Main Menu.  

*otac_dgen_hlp,A
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP

This screen is used to view and modify comparator parameters which are 
only applicable to conventional system configurations.  Access to this 
screen is denied if the system type field in the Hardware Configuration 
screen is not set to CONVENTIONAL.


Function Key Descriptions:

   F1  - Recall help screen.

   F2  - Not used.

   F3  - Not used.

   F4  - Not used.

   F5  - Not used.

   F6  - Not used.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Not used.

   F9  - Not used.

   F10 - Exit to Change/View Codeplug Menu.

*otac_voice_rpt_hlp,A
VOICE REPEAT OPERATION HELP

The voice repeat setting controls the routing of subscriber voice signals
by the comparator.  When voice repeat is set to enabled, received 
subscriber voice signals will be rebroadcast over the air.  This allows 
all other subscriber users to receive the signal.

When voice repeat is set to disabled, received subscriber voice signals are
sent only to consoles which are connected to the comparator.  Hence, 
subscriber users will be unable to speak to one another in systems with the 
voice repeat feature disabled.

The parameter applies to both analog voice calls and digital voice calls.

The default setting for this field is ENABLED.

*otac_vote_prior_hlp,A
VOTE PRIORITY HELP

This parameter is used to control which type of incoming voted signal has
higher priority.  Note that this parameter only affects voted signals. 
Voted signals are voice/data signals which enter the comparator from a 
base station.  The user may select one of three configurations. 

In the explanation below, an analog signal is the equivalent of an analog
voice call.  Digital signals may be either digital voice calls or digital 
data calls in the following explanation.

   FIRST IN - In this configuration, voted analog signals and voted 
              digital signals have equal priority.  In this case, the 
              voted signal which arrives at the comparator first will 
              have the highest priority of any voted signals.  It will 
              retain the highest voted signal priority until the call ends.  
              For example, a user makes a digital call on subscriber A.  
              While subscriber A is keyed, a second user makes an analog 
              call on subscriber B.  The best (voted) signal from 
              subscriber A will have priority over the best signal for 
              subscriber B.  Now suppose subscriber A's call ends and a 
              new subscriber, C, is keyed up in digital mode.  Subscriber 
              B's voted signal has the highest priority of the voted 
              signals because out of the two signals, B and C, it was the 
              first to arrive at the comparator.  

   ANALOG>DIGITAL - In this configuration, voted analog signals will take 
                    priority over voted digital signals.  A digital call 
                    from a subscriber will be preempted by an analog call 
                    from a subscriber in this configuration.

   DIGITAL>ANALOG -  In this configuration, voted digital signals will take
                     priority over voted analog signals.  A call from an 
                     analog subscriber will be preempted by a call from a 
                     digital subscriber in this configuration.

The default configuration is FIRST IN.

*otac_src_base_hlp,A
SOURCE-BASED PRIORITY HELP

This parameter determines signal priority based on the device that 
sourced the signal arriving at a wireline port.  This parameter 
applies to both voted and non-voted signals.  The user may select 
one of two configurations.

   CONSOLE - Signals arriving from a console will have higher priority 
             than the signals received from a station.  In this 
             configuration, a call from a console will preempt a call 
             from a subscriber.

   REPEAT  - Signals arriving from a station will have higher priority 
             than the signals received from a console.  In this 
             configuration, a call from a subscriber will preempt a 
             call from a console.

Please note that this field applies to voice and data sessions.  Control 
information from a console such as the "channel change" command will 
always take priority over signals sourced from a station.
 
The default configuration is CONSOLE.

*otac_an_rep_hng_hlp,A
ANALOG VOICE REPEAT HANGTIME HELP

This parameter specifies the amount of time that base stations connected 
to a comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the 
conclusion of an analog voice call sourced by a subscriber. The period of 
silence may preempted by any incoming signal.  

This field is ignored if the Voice Repeat Operation field is set to 
DISABLED.

The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds.  Resolution is in tenths of seconds. 

The default is 2.0 seconds.

*otac_an_con_hng_hlp,A
ANALOG VOICE CONSOLE HANGTIME HELP

This parameter specifies the amount of time that base stations connected 
to the comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the 
conclusion of an analog voice call sourced by a console (DIU port).  The 
period of silence may preempted by any incoming signal.  

The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds.  Resolution is in tenths of seconds. 

The default is 0.0 seconds.

*otac_dig_rep_hng_hlp,A
DIGITAL VOICE REPEAT HANGTIME HELP

This parameter specifies the amount of time a base station connected to a
comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the conclusion
of a digital voice call sourced by a subscriber unit. The period of silence
may preempted by any incoming signal.  

This parameter is ignored by the comparator if the Voice Repeat Operation
field is set to DISABLED.

The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds.  Resolution is in tenths of seconds. 

The default is 5.0 seconds.

*otac_dig_con_hng_hlp,A
DIGITAL VOICE CONSOLE HANGTIME HELP

This parameter specifies the amount of time a base station connected to the
comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the conclusion
of a digital voice call sourced by a console.  The period of silence may
be preempted by any incoming signal.  

The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds.  Resolution is in tenths of seconds. 

The default is 0.0 seconds.

*otac_dig_datcon_hng_hlp,A
DIGITAL DATA CONSOLE HANGTIME HELP

This parameter specifies the amount of time a base station connected to the
comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the conclusion
of a digital data call sourced by a console (DIU port).  The period of 
silence may be preempted by any incoming signal.  

The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds.  Resolution is in tenths of seconds.

The default is 0.0 seconds.

*otac_ht_hdlc_help,A
HANGTIME HDLC ADDRESS HELP

This parameter specifies which station(s) will transmit hangtime
generated by the Comparator.  The field can be configured such  
that hangtime is transmitted by all connected stations or 
steered to a single connected station.  

For system configurations in which simulcast is enabled and
data capability is used, this field should be set to steer hangtime
to the transmitting station associated with the largest number of 
data users.  The configuration steps for this situation are
as follows:

   1.  Determine which transmitting station connected to the 
       Comparator communicates with the largest number of data
       users during normal system use.   

   2.  Determine the HDLC address for the station selected in 
       step 1.  The HDLC address can be obtained from the 
       status panel screen in the Comparator RSS.  The station
       HDLC address can also be determined by executing the 
       station RSS, reading in the station's codeplug, and 
       examining the site number field in the hardware config
       screen.

   3.  Enter the station's HDLC in the Hangtime HDLC Address field.
              
   4.  Save the codeplug to the Comparator.

For non-simulcast systems or voice-only systems, this field should be
set to 3F.    

The field value of 3F indicates that all transmit capable stations
will transmit hangtime generated by the comparator.

The range for this parameter is 0 to 3F (hex).

The default value for this parameter is 3F (hex).

*otac_def_tx_help,A
DEFAULT TRANSMITTER STEERING ADDRESS HELP

This parameter specifies the address that the comparator
uses when there is no unique address specified in the source
message which the comparator is sending to base stations.
This field will not affect the address used when the signal
destination is a DIU or AEB.

Generally, this field is set to 3F unless signals are to be
steered to an individual transmitter by default.  The
comparator will use the default transmitter steering address
in the codeplug unless the console operator selects a new
transmit address.  The comparator will revert to the default
transmitter steering address upon power up.

A value of 0 for this field will result in all connected
stations ignoring the signal sent by the comparator

Values ranging from 1 to 3E are used to select an individual
transmitter to be used as the default case.  The address for
an individual station can be obtained from the RSS Status Panel
screen.  The address may also be obtained by reading the
codeplug from the desired stations and recofding the address
displayed on the hardware configuration screen.

A value of 3F for this field corresponds to a broadcast
address.  In this case, all stations connected to the
comparator will transmit the signal sent from the comparator.

The range for this parameter is 0 to 3F (hex).

The default value for this parameter is 3F (hex).

*otac_dtrkotac_hlp,A
SMARTZONE SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP

This screen is used to view and modify comparator parameters which are
applicable to SmartZone system configurations.  Access to this screen
is denied if the system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen 
is not set to SMARTZONE.


Function Key Descriptions:

   F1  - Recall help screen.

   F2  - Not used.

   F3  - Not used.

   F4  - Not used.

   F5  - Not used.

   F6  - Not used.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Not used.

   F9  - Not used.

   F10 - Exit to Change/View Codeplug Menu.

*otac_failsoft_hlp,A
FAILSOFT HELP

This field enables/disables the failsoft mechanism.  If the Comparator
cannot detect any OSW's on the CSC link for more than 300 ms, it forces
the radios to switch to pre-assigned channels for Failsoft operation. The
failsoft feature is a fall-back mechanism which allows the channel to 
operate in a stand-alone state should the system be unable to support
site trunking operation.

Setting this field to DISABLE will cause the Comparator to ignore gaps
in OSW's, and in effect disable the Failsoft function.  With failsoft 
disabled, a call will not be supported by the comparator when a CSC link
activity failure (lack OSW's for 300 ms) is detected.

With the failsoft field set to ENABLE, calls can be made between radios
programmed to the same failsoft channel when a CSC link activity failure 
is detected by the comparator.  In addition, the comparator will order 
the radios assigned to its channel to emit a short tone every ten seconds 
when the channel is in the failsoft state.  During failsoft, a radio user 
will have limited access to the system and will be notified that the system 
is in failsoft by a short tone emitted by the radio every ten seconds. 

The failsoft feature is only valid for comparators configured for a 
trunked (SmartZone) system.  The field will be ignored for comparators 
configured for conventional systems.  The comparator's configuration 
is determined by the system type field in the hardware configuration 
screen which is selected from the service menu.

The default setting for this field is DISABLED.

*otac_fs_mode_hlp,A
FAILSOFT MODE HELP

This parameter indicates which mode will be used when Failsoft is enabled
(see Failsoft Enable parameter). There are two valid settings: ANALOG and
DIGITAL. The default is DIGITAL.

When the Comparator enters failsoft, and the Failsoft Mode parameter
indicates ANALOG, the Comparator will start a silent analog call for the
duration of the Failsoft.  Radio users can still access the system and 
make a call to radios which revert to this channel during failsoft.  To 
the radio user, this silent failsoft call should appear and be treated 
as infinite hangtime.

If the Failsoft Mode parameter indicates DIGITAL, the Comparator will 
periodically transmit signaling information to the radio which indicates 
the system is in failsoft.  The signaling information will command the 
radio to emit a short tone every 10 seconds.  The user may still make 
a call, but this call is limited to radios which revert to this 
comparator's channel during failsoft. 

This field setting should coincide with the signal type field of the 
failsoft talk group selected in the trunking personality section of 
the Astro Portable or Astro Mobile RSS codeplug for a given radio for 
the failsoft feature to operate correctly.

*otac_chan_no_hlp,A
CHANNEL NUMBER HELP

This field must be set to the trunked channel identification number.  
This number ranges from 1 to 28.

The default is NONE which is an invalid channel identification number.
This is done to prevent multiple comparators from defaulting to the 
same valid ID, and responding to commands from the CSC that are not 
intended for them.

The channel number field should agree with the labeled channel number 
on the front of the comparator (if present). The comparator is connected 
to the Central Site Controller (CSC) via a serial link.  The CSC serial 
connector on the comparator is J20 on the backplane.  The serial link 
leaving the comparator is connected to a data broadcast box.  The data 
broadcast box is connected to the CSC-TSC link of the CSC.  The channel 
number field should agree with the channel port on the data broadcast 
box to which the comparator is connected. 
 

Note: This field was handled differently in the AstroTAC. The valid 
      range for the AstroTAC was 0 - 27, and 28 for invalid/default 
      Channel Number. AstroTAC's channel 0 corresponds to AstroTAC
      3000's channel 1, AstroTAC's channel 1 corresponds to AstroTAC
      3000's channel 2, etc.

*otac_dvoice_hlp,A
ANALOG VOTING PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP

This screen allows reading and modification of parameters
which determine the characteristics of the analog voting algorithm.
The algorithm is used when a call is received by the comparator from 
a station/receiver or group of stations/receivers.
 
Function Key Descriptions:

   F1  - Recall help screen.

   F2  - Not used.

   F3  - Not used.

   F4  - Not used.

   F5  - Not used.

   F6  - Not used.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Not used.

   F9  - Not used.

   F10 - Exit to Change/View Codeplug Menu.


*otac_vote_samp_hlp,A
ANALOG VOTING SAMPLE PERIOD HELP

This parameter is used to allow for greater accuracy in 
determining the noise content of a signal by increasing the 
interval of time over which the analog signal quality is averaged.  
It may be used to solve more difficult voting anomalies in particular 
systems.  Higher values allow for better accuracy in computing the 
noise content of a signal, but may significantly delay the voting 
decision between ports.  This parameter is rarely altered.

This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.

The default value for this parameter is 50 milliseconds.

*otac_fvote_set_hlp,A
ANALOG FIRST VOTE SETTLE TIME HELP

This parameter is used to prevent infrastructure induced transients 
at the beginning of a call from degrading the initial voting decisions 
for each PTT, and allows the analog voter to obtain a significant audio 
sample before making a first vote decision.  This is more important in
non-voiced analog signaling systems where the first vote decision is 
critical. This value should not exceed the period of time between the 
removal of the modem signal input to the comparator and the beginning 
of actual analog information (voice or signaling).

This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.

The default value for this parameter is 40 milliseconds.

*ot_voicehold_op_help,A
ANALOG VOTE AND HOLD OPERATION HELP

This parameter specifies the state of the analog vote and hold 
feature.  This feature applies only to analog voice calls.

If the feature is enabled, a single vote will be performed at the 
beginning of an analog call and result of this vote will be routed 
for the remainder of the analog call.  The voting algorithm will 
effectively use an infinite value for the analog first vote hold 
time for this case.  Hence, the analog first vote hold time field 
is ignored when the analog vote and hold operation is enabled.   

If analog vote and hold operation is disabled,  the signal will be 
periodically voted throughout the analog call. 

When this parameter is switched from ENABLED to DISABLED, the Analog 
First Vote Hold Time parameter is set to its default value. 

This parameter may be set to ENABLED or DISABLED.

The default value for this parameter is DISABLED.

*otac_fvote_hold_hlp,A
ANALOG FIRST VOTE HOLD TIME HELP

This parameter is used to ensure the voted port does not switch for a 
fixed amount of time after it is chosen as voted port for the
first time.  This parameter is usually set to a value larger than
(length of the MDC preamble + MDC Pretime) - System Truncation. 
This will prevent the preamble from being corrupted due to the 
analog voter switching to a new audio source.  This field applies only 
to the initial vote decision of an analog call unlike the analog vote 
hold time field which applies to all voting decisions following the 
initial vote. 

This field is cannot be edited if the analog vote and hold operation 
is enabled.  Analog vote and hold operation is equivalent to setting 
this field to an infinite value so that the signal will be voted only 
once during the entire analog call.

This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.

The default value for this parameter is 250 milliseconds.

*otac_vote_hold_hlp,A
ANALOG VOTING HOLD TIME HELP

This parameter is used to ensure the voted port does not switch for a 
fixed amount of time after it is chosen as the voted port.  If the 
parameter is set too low, the signal may incur frequent interruption 
or "popping" noises during the call due to the analog voter switching 
input signals too often.  Conversely, if this parameter is set too high, 
a less than optimum signal may be routed as output frequently because 
the hold time will prevent the comparator from switching to the best 
signal for a long period of time.  This parameter differs from the 
analog first vote hold time in that the analog first vote hold time 
applies only to the initial voting decision of an analog call whereas 
the analog voting hold time applies to all vote decisions after the 
initial vote.

This parameter is rarely adjusted in the field.

This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.

The default value for this parameter is 250 milliseconds.

*otac_vote_swtch_hlp,A
ANALOG SIGNAL QUALITY DEBOUNCE TIME HELP

This field dictates the amount of time a signal must be of higher 
quality than the current voted port before it is eligible to be 
routed as the voted port.  Debouncing the signal quality prevents 
spikes of strong signaling on a port from inducing a change in 
the voted port.  This condition typically occurs during transitions 
on a modem link.
  
This parameter is used to ensure that a port with infrastructure-
induced silence is not chosen over a port which continues to carry 
valid analog audio.  This infrastructure-induced silence is usually 
present when a subscriber signal fades from a receiver but is still 
being heard by another receiver in the system.  The time between the 
squelch in the faded receiver and the transition of the infrastructure 
link from analog to digital is the amount of silence this parameter 
will typically be chosen to compensate for.  Higher values will 
prevent ports with greater amounts of infrastucture-induced silence 
from being chosen as the voted port, but at the same time will delay 
the changing of voted ports when the actual signal quality is better.  
Therefore, care should be taken in choosing a value no higher than 
is necessary to prevent the voted port from changing on the 
infrastructure-induced silence.

This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.

The default value for this parameter is 150 milliseconds.

*otac_line_trans_hlp,A
ANALOG LINE TRANSIENT SETTLE HELP

This parameter is used to ensure that any transient on a port during 
the initial portion of an analog call is excluded from the signal 
quality measurement.  The line transient settle time should be set to 
the time period from when carrier detect is lost (falsed) to when the 
transient settles on a modem link.  Signal quality measurements may 
be taken after the line transient settle time has expired.  This is 
the highest priority timer in the analog voting process.  It specifies 
the amount of time to wait after transitioning to analog before 
beginning the voting process. 

This parameter applies to modem links only.   

This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.

The default value for this parameter is 20 milliseconds.

*otac_vote_hyst_hlp,A
ANALOG VOTING HYSTERESIS HELP

This parameter is used to ensure that ports with signals of 
imperceptible difference in noise content are not alternately 
being chosen as the voted port.  Higher values will require 
that the noise content of a port with a receive analog signal 
that is not currently the voted port be significantly less 
than that of the voted port before that port becomes the voted 
port. 

This value should be set so the voted port only switches on 
signals which have a perceptible difference in noise content.  
If the difference in noise content between signals is not 
perceptible, then there is no need to change voted ports.

The analog voting hysteresis field works in conjunction with 
the analog voting hold time for determining when the analog 
voter may switch the audio source.  The previous voted port 
must have been output for the prescribed hold time and the 
competing audio source must have a noise content which passes 
the voting hysteresis threshold before a change in the voted 
port can occur. 

This parameter is specified in units of decibels with a 
granularity of 0.1 dB.

The default value for this parameter is 1.1 dB.

*otac_dportctl_hlp,A
PORT CONTROL PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP

This screen allows the user to read and modify parameters
which define the operation of individual infrastructure ports.  
The screen dislays the entire parameter list for a single port.
The port is identified by its assigned port number which is presented
as a field on the screen. 

The user may scroll through the ports by using the F5 and F6 keys.  
If the screen is displaying the configuration for port number X and
the user presses F5, the screen will then display the configuration
for port number (X - 1).  If the screen is displaying the configuration
for port number X and the user presses F6, the screen will display 
the configuration for (X + 1).

The user may also modify the Port Number field on the screen to view
the configuration for a desired port.   
 
Function Key Descriptions:

   F1  - Recall help screen.

   F2  - Not used.

   F3  - Not used.

   F4  - Not used.

   F5  - Display the port configuration for the previous port.

   F6  - Display the port configuration for the next port.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Not used.

   F9  - Not used.

   F10 - Exit to Change/View Codeplug Menu.


*otac_port_no_hlp,A
PORT NUMBER HELP

The port number field is a read-only field which identifies the physical 
connection in the comparator which is being viewed or modified.  The screen
will display all relevant attributes associated with a specific connection 
in addition to the port number field.  The user may opt to view or edit a 
different port number by pressing the F5 (previous port) or F6 (next port) 
keys.

A port number is mapped to directly to a wireline port in the chassis in 
the following manner:

                           FRONT VIEW OF COMPARATOR

                 W    W    W                    W    W    W    W    W
                 L    L    L                    L    L    L    L    L
      
                 S    S    S                    S    S    S    S    S
                 L    L    L                    L    L    L    L    L
                 O    O    O                    O    O    O    O    O
                 T    T    T                    T    T    T    T    T
                
                 6    7    8                    1    2    3    4    5

                 |    |    |                    |    |    |    |    |
                 |    |    |                    |    |    |    |    |
                 V    V    V                    V    V    V    V    V
               ---------------------------------------------------------   
               |    |    |    | A  |  P  | C  |    |    |    |    |    | 
               |    |    |    | U  |  O  | O  |    |    |    |    |    |
               |    |    |    | X  |  W  | N  |    |    |    |    |    |
               |    |    |    | I  |  E  | T  |    |    |    |    |    |
               |    |    |    | L  |  R  | R  |    |    |    |    |    |
               |    |    |    | I  |     | O  |    |    |    |    |    |
               |    |    |    | A  |  S  | L  |    |    |    |    |    |
               |    |    |    | R  |  U  |    |    |    |    |    |    |
           --- |    |    |    | Y  |  P  | C  |    |    |    |    |    |
          /    | 12 | 14 | 16 |    |  P  | A  |  2 |  4 |  6 |  8 | 10 |
 Port  ---     |    |    |    | P  |  L  | R  |    |    |    |    |    |
Number    \    | 11 | 13 | 15 | S  |  Y  | D  |  1 |  3 |  5 |  7 |  9 |
           --- |    |    |    |    |     |    |    |    |    |    |    |
               ---------------------------------------------------------


The type of link connected to a port may require a link interface using 
an orange 8-wire connector installed on the comparator backplane.  Each 
orange connector is capable of supporting two ports.  The connectors 
each have a unique numerical ID.  Note that the orientation of the 
connector on the backplane will vary depending on the port numbers 
which it supports.

The table below maps each orange 8-wire connector to
the two ports it supports.

          Connector ID             Supported
        on the Backplane             Ports  
        ----------------           ---------
               61                     1,2
               62                     3,4
               63                     5,6
               64                     7,8
               65                     9,10
               66                    11,12
               67                    13,14
               68                    15,16


                PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION OF 8-WIRE CONNECTOR 

                         connection screws                          
                      ___________|____________                     
                      |  |  |  |    |  |  |  | 
                      V  V  V  V    V  V  V  V
                     ---------------------------
                     |                         |
                     |-------------------------|
                     |[] [] [] [] | [] [] [] []|
                     ---------------------------
                       A  A  A A     A  A  A A
                     | |  |  | | | | |  |  | | | 
                     | o  o  i i | | o  o  i i | 
                     | u  u  n n | | u  u  n n |
                     | t  t      | | t  t      | 
                      -----------   -----------    
                           |             |
                       4-wire set    4-wire set
                        for the       for the
                       upper port    lower port

*otac_port_type_hlp,A
PORT TYPE HELP

This field specifies the physical device, if any,  to which this 
infrastructure port is connected.  This following entries may be selected:

  DISABLED -  This setting applies to two situations.  First, the port
              is physically inoperable (i.e. no infrastructure link for
              this port).  The second situation is when the necessary
              hardware is present but the user wishes to disable all
              communication on this port.  Link status alarms are not
              generated for disabled ports.  Only the port alias field
              may be edited when a port is configured to be disabled.  

              This is the proper setting for ports which are not supported
              by the comparator.  For example, if a wireline card is not
              present in the eighth wireline slot, the port type field for
              ports fifteen and sixteen should be set to DISABLED.

              In the event that a user wishes to "ignore" a device which
              is present, the field should be set to DISABLED.  For
              example, if the infrastructure supports five station inputs
              to the comparator but the user only wishes to utilize four
              station inputs, the user only needs to set one of the ports
              to DISABLED rather than physically disconnecting the link.
              The comparator will disregard all information which is
              received on a disabled link and will not transmit
              information on a disabled link.  The link establishment
              process is not performed on a link which is disabled.  

       DIU -  This is the proper port type when the port is connected to
              a Digital Interface Unit (DIU).  The comparator can only be
              connected to a DIU when configured as a conventional
              comparator using the system type field in the hardware
              configuration screen.   

STATION/RECEIVER -  This is the correct port type when the port is 
              connected to a base station or remote receiver.  
                         
       AEB -  This is the correct port type when the port is connected 
              an Ambassador Electronics Bank (AEB) interface.  This 
              interface is typically a connection to a T1/E1 channel bank.  
              The port type is valid only when the comparator system type 
              is set to SMARTZONE.      

The default setting for this parameter is DISABLED.

*otac_port_alias_hlp,A
PORT ALIAS HELP

This parameter is an alpha-numeric string that may be used to
identify a device connected the comparator by a specific name or location.
For example, a user might assign the alias of "BS1" or "BIGMTNBS" to a 
station for identification purposes.

The port alias which is assigned to a specific device on the port 
configuration screen will also be displayed on the Status Panel screen. 

The default value for this field is the string "NONE".

  

*otac_link_type_hlp,A
LINK TYPE HELP

This parameter specifies the physical interface for the link for the
respective wireline port.  Each link can be configured for one of the
following 6 types:

MODEM -28 dBm - Astro modem link where the input level into the modem
                should be within the range of -28 dBm to 0 dBm.  This
                link type supports analog and digital calls.  Note that
                the modem board is a daughterboard on the wireline card
                and is located inside the comparator chassis.

MODEM -37 dBm - Astro modem link where the input level into the modem
                should be within the range of -37 dBm to -9 dBm.
                This link type supports analog and digital calls.  Note
                that the modem board is a daughterboard on the wireline
                card and is located inside the comparator chassis.

V.24 EXT Tx CLK - V.24 digital link with Tx clock sourced by device
                  at the other end of the link.  This link type supports
                  digital calls only.  This is the typical clock setting
                  for a link interface to a channel bank (i.e. remote
                  station or AEB link).

V.24 INT Tx CLK - V.24 digital link with Tx clock sourced by the
                  Comparator.  This link type supports digital calls 
                  only. This is the typical clock setting for a colocated 
                  comparator or direct link to a station or DIU.

HYBRID EXT Tx CLK - V.24/4-wire link with Tx clock for the V.24 board 
                    sourced by device at the other end of the link.  
                    Hybrid links support analog and digital calls.  The 
                    V.24 portion of the hybrid link supports digital 
                    calls.  The 4-wire portion of the link is used to 
                    carry the analog voice during an analog call.  The 
                    V.24 portion of the link is, however, required for 
                    proper link operation during an analog call.  This 
                    is the typical clock setting for a link interface 
                    to a channel bank (i.e. remote station or AEB link).


HYBRID INT Tx CLK - V.24/4-wire link with Tx clock for the V.24 board 
                    sourced by the Comparator.  Hybrid links support 
                    analog and digital calls.  The V.24 portion of the 
                    hybrid link supports digital calls.  The 4-wire 
                    portion of the link is used to carry the analog voice  
                    during an analog call.  The V.24 portion of the link  
                    is, however, required for proper link operation during 
                    an analog call.   This is the typical clock setting 
                    for a colocated comparator or direct link to a station 
                    or DIU.


External connections will indicate the type of link (hybrid, modem, 
or V.24) that a port has been physically configured to operate on.  
Specifically, the external connections involved are the RJ-45 
connectors on the comparator front panel and the orange 8-wire 
connectors on the backplane.  Note that each orange connector supports 
two 4-wire ports. 

A port is configured for a modem link if the port's 4-wire connection 
on the backplane is being used, but the port's RJ-45 connection on the 
front panel is not being used or is not present.  One modem daughter 
board supports one port. 

A V.24 link uses only the port's RJ-45 connection on the front panel.  
One V.24 daughter board will support both wireline ports.

A hybrid link uses both the port's 4-wire connection on the backplane 
and the port's RJ-45 connection on the front panel.

The V.24 daughterboard is populated with two DIP switch sets. Each set 
corresponds to a physical port.  DIP switch package S101 provides 
configuration settings for the lower numbered physical port.  DIP switch
package S102 provides configuration settings for the higher numbered 
physical port on the wireline card.  For a port which is internally 
clocked, such as a colocated base station, switch S2 should be ON and 
S1, S3, and S4 should be set to OFF.  For a port which is externally 
clocked, such as a remote site or the AEB link, switch S1 should be 
ON and S2, S3, and S4 should be set to OFF.   

For further information on link configuration and setup, please 
reference the 3.0 System Release Notes.  
 
*otac_in_level_diff_help
INPUT LEVEL DIFFERENTIAL HELP

This parameter specifies the numerical difference between the
the port's modem or idle tone input signal level and the 
port's analog voice input signal level.  The input level 
differential is computed using the following equation:

 Input Level Differential =
  (Comparator Modem/Idle Tone Input Level) - (Comparator Analog Voice Input Level)

Since the input level differential is the difference between 
the two signals coming into the comparator, the difference 
between the two signals leaving the station or DIU will be 
the same.  Therefore, input levels at the comparator can be 
substituted with output levels at the Station or DIU.

For the Station:

 Input Level Differential =
  (Station Modem/Idle Tone Output Level) - (Station Analog Voice Output Level)


For the DIU:

 Input Level Differential =
  (DIU Modem/Idle Tone Output Level) - (DIU Analog Voice Output Level)


This parameter must be set correctly for proper operation of 
analog voting.  The comparator performs gain adjustment when the 
link is either in the digital mode or, in the case of hybrid 
links, receiving idle tone.  The gain adjustment process 
amplifies or attenuates the incoming signal so that the 
incoming signal is at an optimal level for signal quality 
analysis and will be comparable in amplitude to other incoming 
signals.  Since the gain adjustment is done during the digital 
mode, the comparator must know what the analog signal level 
will be relative to the digital level for each input port.

This parameter is ignored for ports using V.24 links.

The parameter value has a range of -20 dB to +3 dB.

The default value for this parameter is +0 dB.

*otac_rem_analog_hlp,A
ANALOG REMOTE TX LEVEL HELP

This field is the Analog Remote Tx Level.  The valid range is -20
to +3 dB.  The default is -10 dB.

*otac_rem_idltone_hlp,A
IDLE TONE REMOTE TX LEVEL HELP

This field is the Idle Tone Remote Tx Level.  The valid range is -20
to +3 dB.  The default is -10 dB.

*otac_rem_modem_hlp,A
MODEM REMOTE TX LEVEL HELP

This field is the Modem Remote Tx Level.  The valid range is -20
to +3 dB.  The default is -10 dB.

*otac_out_analog_hlp,A
ANALOG OUTPUT LEVEL HELP

The analog output level is output signal level that used when
transmitting an analog signal.  This is the signal level
on the 2-wire output of the comparator port for a modem link or 
hybrid link during an analog call.
 
Please consult the 3.0 System Release Notes for further information 
on obtaining the correct value for this parameter.

The range of values is from 0 dBm to -20 dBm. The analog output 
level is adjustable in 1 dB increments.  

The default value for this field is -14 dBm.

*otac_out_idltone_hlp,A
IDLE TONE OUTPUT LEVEL HELP

This is the output level of the idle tone which is the tone sent
by the Comparator to the Station on the analog portion of
the hybrid link when the analog side of the link is idle. This
tone is used for analog link management in a hybrid link. This 
field applies only to hybrid link types and is ignored for all 
other link types.  

Please consult the 3.0 System Release Notes for further information 
on obtaining the correct value for this parameter.

The range of values is from 0 dBm to -20 dBm. The idle tone output
level is adjustable in 1 dB increments.

The default value for this field is -10 dBm.

*otac_out_modem_hlp,A
MODEM OUTPUT LEVEL HELP

This parameter is the output level for a modem link which is operating 
in the digital mode.  This is the signal level which should be seen 
leaving the comparator on the port's 2-wire output when a modem link 
is either idle or supporting a digital call.   

Incorrect setting of this field will be characterized by a large number
of CRC alarms being generated by the receiving device and the comparator's
inability to initialize the link despite successful modem hardware
initialization.

Please consult the 3.0 System Release Notes for further information 
on obtaining the correct value for this parameter.

This cannot be accessed when the Link Type field is not set to a modem
link type.

The range of values is from +3 dBm to -20 dBm. The output level is
adjustable in 1 dB increments.  This parameter applies only to modem
link types and is ignored for all other link types.

The default value for this field is -14 dBm.

*otac_in_digital_hlp,A
DIGITAL INPUT DELAY HELP

Digital Input Delay is the absolute amount of time, in milliseconds, that 
is required for a digital signal on this port to travel through the input 
portion of the infrastructure and arrive at the comparator. It is the 
difference in time from when a signal is transmitted by the station's 
wireline port to when the comparator receives the signal on its wireline 
port.

This field is a critical factor for digital voting. For the comparator to
perform digital voting properly, the time difference between the port which
incurs the largest delay (the slowest port) and the port which incurs the 
least delay (the fastest port) must not exceed 100 milliseconds.   
Increasing or over estimating input delay will increase the signal delay 
through the comparator, particularly if the slowest port delay is over-
estimated.  Underestimating the digital input delay may decrease the audio 
quality because the number of signals arriving within the voting window 
will be reduced.  
  
The valid range is 0 to 999 milliseconds. The default value is 0 
milliseconds.

*otac_in_analog_hlp,A
ANALOG INPUT DELAY HELP

The Analog Input Delay is the delay, in milliseconds, applied
at the port when a message is received by the comparator on a
analog link.

The valid range is between 0 and 500 milliseconds.  The default
is 0 milliseconds.

*otac_diu_rank_hlp,A
DIU RANK HELP

The DIU Rank specifies the rank of the console if a console is
connected to the current port.

The valid range is from 0 to 15.  Zero is the lowest priority
and 15 is the highest priority.  The default is zero.

*otac_link_timr_hlp,A
OUTPUT ANALOG LINK TIMER HELP

Devices using modem links must be able to detect link failures during
an analog call.  Modem signals during an analog call are identical to 
those during a link failure.  The preferred solution to this problem 
is to periodically transition the link to a digital state and send a 
message indicating the link is still active and functional.  This field 
determines how often the digital message is sent.  
 
This is the timeout value which the comparator uses to periodically 
generate a continue analog message (during an analog call) to signal 
the station/DIU that the link is still functional. If the connected 
device does receive the continue analog message within its timeout 
value, it will stop the analog call.  If this field is configured for 
x seconds, the connected device will expect a continue message at least 
every (x + 5) seconds.  For example, by default the comparator's ports 
are configured for a 120 second output analog link timeout value, the 
station will determine during link initialization that it should expect 
to receive an analog continue message from the comparator at least
every 125 seconds.

The timeout value must be set to provide a satisfactory link recovery 
speed in addition to acceptable analog audio quality.  Link recovery 
speed is improved by decreasing the value of this timer; however, this 
will increase the frequency of continue messages over the link which 
briefly interrupt the call.  Audio holes caused by the continue messages 
are decreased by increasing the value of this timer, but this is done at 
a cost of increasing the link recovery time.  The usual value for this 
field is 120 seconds. 

This field only applies to modem links.

The default value for this field 120 seconds.

*otac_alt_data_hlp,A
DATA SITE STEERING PORT HELP

The Data Site Steering Port is the port number of the transmitting base 
station that is closest to this port's receiver.  If this port is a base
station (not just a receiver), the Data Site Steering Port should 
simply be set to this port's own port number.  Only ports of type 
"Station/Receiver" will be accepted in this field.  This parameter will be
used in Data Site Steering.

Data Site Steering is used to transmit data in voted system configurations.
For systems in which two or more transmitters have an overlap area, the data
must be transmitted by only one of the stations to prevent signal 
interference.  For proper transmission of data, each station or receiver 
must have this field set to the physical port number of a base station.     

For example, site A has satellite receivers SR1, SR2, and SR3 along with two 
transmitting base stations, TR1 and TR2, which cover the area of the site.
Assume a radio user keys a radio and the signal is received only by SR1. 
Assume also that TR1's outbound signal is stronger than that of TR2's near 
SR1. The comparator will route this data to the DIU.  Along with the data 
the comparator will also send identification information which states that 
TR1 should be used if an outbound response is desired.  The Data Central
Controller (DCC) will use the identification information provided by the
comparator in the event of a response. 

The Data Site Steering Port field is the mechanism by which the comparator
is able to associate TR1 to SR1 in the above example.  The Data Site 
Steering Port for SR1 is set to the physical port number of TR1.  
 
This parameter applies to data signals only.

NOTE: The RSS will verify that this field is set correctly.  Each
Station/Receiver Port must have this field set to the port number of
a Station/Receiver Port.  The codeplug cannot be saved to the comparator
unless this field is valid.  For systems wich are not data-capable, 
simply set this field to this port's physical port number.

The valid range is 1 to 16.

The default value is the port's physical port number.

*hardware_config_help,A
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN HELP

This screen contains parameters which generally require the purchase
of optional hardware external to the comparator chassis.  For example,
the simulcast feature functions correctly only when the comparator is
connected to simulcast-capable stations and a GPS receiver.

The Comparator Name field does not require additional hardware.   

Function Key Descriptions:

   F1  - Recall help screen.

   F2  - Not used.

   F3  - Not used.

   F4  - Not used.

   F5  - Not used.

   F6  - Not used.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Validate the comparator configuration.  The RSS will interrogate
         the comparator and verify the comparator configuration is identical
         to the configuration specified by current codeplug which is being
         viewed on the RSS.  The RSS will display a warning message if a 
         configuration conflict is detected.  

   F9  - Not used.

   F10 - Exit to Change/View Codeplug Menu.

*ot_system_type_help,A
SYSTEM TYPE HELP

This field defines the type of the system the Comparator operates in.
Valid settings are SMARTZONE for trunked SmartZone system, and 
CONVENTIONAL, for all non-trunking systems.

Depending on setting of this field, some menus and fields may be hidden or
restricted from viewing.  For example, if the user configures the system 
type field for SmartZone, the user will be denied access to the Conventional
Parameters menu.

The default value for this field is CONVENTIONAL.

*ot_serial_number_help,A
SERIAL NUMBER HELP

No help available.

*comparator_name_help,A
COMPARATOR NAME HELP

This is a ten character alpha-numeric string to allow the user to assign an
alias to a comparator.  The comparator name field is provided for customer
reference and is not used by the comparator.

*ot_battery_help,A
BATTERY TYPE HELP

This parameter identifies the battery charging algorithm provided, if any.  
This field allows the battery charging circuitry to select the best 
recharging rate for the type of battery the comparator is using.  If 
battery charging is being performed by a device external to the comparator, 
set this field to NONE.

This field may be toggled between:

  NONE          - If there is no backup battery, battery charging is not
                  desired, or battery is charged using an external device.
  NICAD         - For NICAD Battery.
  LEAD_ACID_NON - For Vented Lead-Calcium Acid Battery.
  LEAD_ACID_LIN - For Sealed Lead-Calcium Acid Battery.


*ot_simulcast_help,A
SIMULCAST FUNCTION HELP

Simulcast is the system configuration in which multiple transmitters
transmit the same signal on the same frequency at the same time such that
their coverage areas overlap without destructive interference.  In this 
way, Simulcast extends the coverage area of a single frequency and 
minimizes transmit frequencies required for the radio system. 

A GPS receiver has to be connected to the Comparator to allow
simulcast to operate properly.  Specifically, the GPS receiver supplies 
the 1 pulse per second (1 PPS) input to the comparator.  The 1 PPS 
connector on the comparator is labeled J21 on the backplane.  The GPS 
link allows the comparator to very accurately control when signal 
information is transmitted over the air from each of the stations to 
which it is connected.  Each simulcast station will also require a GPS 
link because the GPS is the medium used to synchronize the station with 
the comparator.    

To enable this feature, the Comparator should have this field set to 
ENABLED.

Also, other devices (Base Stations) must have this function enabled.  
The station is configured for simulcast by enabling the simulcast field 
in the codeplug.  The field is accessed from the hardware configuration 
screen in the base station RSS.
  
The default value for this parameter is DISABLED.

*simul_lt_delay_help,A
SIMULCAST LAUNCH TIME OFFSET HELP

Signals in a simulcast system are subject to delays.  The launch time 
offset is the worst-case delay incurred from the point when the
comparator  begins its output process to the point when the station
transmits the frame  over the air.  The launch time offset delay is
comprised of the following  factors:

   - The comparator processing delay
   - The infrastructure link delay from the comparator to the station
   - The base station processing delay
   - The signal buffering performed within the base station
   - The key-up delay in the base station

Decreasing the value of this field may decrease the overall delay of the
system and increase throughput.  However, if this parameter is set to a
value lower than the actual delay, the launch times will become invalid,
and the system will not function properly.  If the value of this parameter
is set too high, the station will not be capable of buffering the signal
correctly which will result in buffer overflow errors at the base station.

To determine the launch time offset refer to the GPS Simulcast
Installation Manual.

WARNING: The worst case infrastructure link delay from the comparator to 
	 the station is dependent on the whether the system is a voice
	 only system or a voice/data system. If the system supports data a
	 larger simulcast launch time offset must be used to take into
	 account the longer infrastructure delay. Recommended times for
	 voice only and voice/data systems are given in the GPS Simulcast
	 Installation Manual.

The possible values for the Simulcast Launch Time Offset are from 0 to 
999 ms.

The default value for this parameter is 180 milliseconds.

*ethernet_params_help,A
ETHERNET PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP

No help available.

*master_ip_addr_help,A
MASTER IP ADDRESS HELP

No help available.

*network_mask_help,A
NETWORK MASK HELP

No help available.

*slave_mode_help,A
SLAVE MODE HELP

No help available.

*dswv01_screen_help,A
QUANTAR SOFTWARE VERSION SCREEN HELP

The Quantar Software Version Screen indicates the versions of Firmware 
present in the station as well as the current codeplug version. This 
information could be important for possible analysis of the Status 
Messages.  

When connected to older version stations, some of the firmware version
fields may be blank.  This will also occur if the station does not have
the hardware installed, i.e., no Wireline module is present.

*dswv02_screen_help,A
ASTROTAC 3000 COMPARATOR SOFTWARE VERSION SCREEN HELP 

AC CONTROL CARD
---------------

This field specifies the control card which has been queried for the 
version information displayed on the screen. This is a read-only field 
which will always display "AC 1."

CP VERSION
----------

This field contains the version of the RSS codeplug currently being used 
by the control card which is being interrogated.  For the RSS to operate 
correctly, the RSS program must interface with a compatible version of the 
comparator codeplug.  This field, in conjunction with the RSS system help 
information, can be used to determine if the RSS/codeplug interface is 
correct or if an upgrade is necessary.  This RSS system help information
can be accessed by selecting the help option (F1) from any menu or field 
and then selecting system help (F9) from this menu/field help screen.  If 
the codeplug version is not listed in the RSS system help, a more recent 
version of the RSS program is required.  If the codeplug version is 
compatible with an earlier version of the RSS, the upgrade utility should 
be executed to convert the codeplug to the required version.    

AC SW PART NO
-------------

This field contains the Motorola part number(s) assigned to the programmed
EPROM ICs which contain the software on each card in the chassis.  This is a
read-only field and may not be modified by the user.  The default value for
this field is "NOT_INSTALLED."  If "NOT_INSTALLED" appears on the screen after
the version information has been received from the control card, verify the
that a wireline card is present in the slot for which the default string
appears.

NOTE: The algorithm for obtaining part number information from an AstroTAC 3000
      differs from the method used to obtain AstroTAC part number information.
      Do not attempt to use AstroTAC 3000 RSS to obtain part numbers from an
      AstroTAC comparator.

AC SW VERSION
-------------

This is the Motorola software version number assigned to the software on the
cards of the chassis which is being interrogated.  This is a read-only
field which cannot be configured by the user.  The default string for this
field is "NOT_INSTALLED."   If "NOT_INSTALLED" appears on the screen after the
version information has been received from the control card, verify
that a wireline card is present in the slot for which the default string
appears.

NOTE: The algorithm for obtaining software version information from an AstroTAC 
      3000 differs from the method used to obtain AstroTAC software version
      information.  Do not attempt to use the AstroTAC 3000 RSS to obtain 
      software version information from an AstroTAC comparator.

WL SW VERSION
-------------

This field contains the Motorola software version number for the software
executing on the corresponding wireline card.  The default string for this
field is "NOT_INSTALLED."  The default string for this field will be displayed
in the following instances:

   - The wireline card failed to initialize properly.

   - The ports for the corresponding wireline slots are configured as
     PORT_DISABLED in the codeplug in the compartor.

   - The wireline software does not support the software version screen.  The
     wireline card software must be compatible with 3.0 system comparator.

WL SW PART NO
-------------

This field contains the Motorola part number(s) for the ICs which contain
the software executing on the corresponding wireline card.  The default string
for this field is "NOT_INSTALLED."  The default string for this field will be
displayed in the following instances:

   - The wireline card failed to initialize properly.

   - The ports for the corresponding wireline slots are configured as
     PORT_DISABLED in the codeplug in the compartor.

   - The wireline software does not support the software version screen.  The
     wireline card software must be compatible with 3.0 system comparator.

BACKPLANE ID
------------
This field displays the backplane ID assigned to the connected comparator.
This is a read-only field.  If a backplane ID cannot be obtained from the
comparator, this field will display "UNKNOWN".  If "UNKNOWN" appears in 
this field, please verify the AC Card has firmware which supports this
feature.  The product release notes indicate if the comparator software
supports this feature.  AC Card versions OC_R03.00.XXX, OC_R03.01.XXX, and
OC_R03.02.XXX do NOT support this feature.     


*local_status_screen_help,A
STATUS PANEL SCREEN HELP

This screen displays the current state of key comparator parameters.  The
screen will automatically update if a key parameter changes state
in the comparator.  The status panel screen allows the user to monitor the
comparator's activity in a real-time fashion.

NOTE: Entering the Status Panel Help screen will suspend the Status
      Panel screen updating.  The Status Panel screen will resume operation
      including a complete screen update when the user exits this help
      screen.

COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS
-------------------
The screen displays several key parameters which are port dependent.  The
column marked "Port #" lists the individual port numbers vertically.  The
status of each port is displayed on the row which contains the port number
of interest.

The column marked "Alias" lists the customer port aliases.  Each customer
port alias is configured in the Port Control Parameters screen.  If an
alias has not been assigned to a port, the default alias "NONE" will appear
in the Alias column for this port.

The column entitled "State" lists each port's current link state or inbound
activity.  Each port may have one of the following states:

   Analog Voice - The link is established and is currently receiving
                  analog voice information on the infrastructure link.

   Data 12 - The link is established and is currently receiving digital
             data information on the infrastructure link.  Data 12 is a
             specific type of data format.

   Data 18 - The link is established and is currently receiving digital
             data information on the infrastructure link.  Data 18 is a
             specific type of data format.

   Data Control - The link is established and is currently receiving
                  digital data information on the infrastructure link.
                  Control Data is a specific type of data format.

   Digital Data - The link is established and is currently receiving
                  digital data information on the infrastructure link.

   Digital Voice - The link is established and is currently receiving
                   digital voice information on the infrastructure
                   link.

   Disabled - The port's port type field is set to DISABLED in the
              comparator codeplug. All inbound activity is ignored
              on a DISABLED port.  A DISABLED port will not transmit
              information including link initialization information.

   Failed - The comparator has failed the infrastructure link for this
            port and/or is attempting link initialization.  A Failed port
            will not transmit call information.

   Idle - The link is established, but no call activity is being
          received.

   Vote Disabled -  This port has been removed from the list of ports which
                    are included in the voting process via a user interface
                    to the comparator.  For example, a port can be
                    vote enabled or vote disabled dynamically from the
                    remote status panel interface.

   Local Vote Disabled -  This port has been removed from the list of ports
                          which are included in the voting process via a
                          user interface to the comparator.  The port will
                          not be included until it is enabled again through
                          the Local Status interface.



The column entitled "HDLC Address" lists the HDLC address of each
infrastructure device connected to the comparator.  An HDLC address
is simply a numeric ID which is assigned to each box in the system.  The
HDLC addresses which appear on the status panel are not configured from
the comparator.  Base stations and DIUs are examples of infrastructure
devices which connect to the comparator and have HDLC addresses.  A port's
HDLC address field is not displayed if the port is disabled or failed.

The column entitled "Link Delay" displays the digital link delay for each
port where a Base Station/Receiver is connected to the Comparator.  The
digital link delay for a port has nothing to do with the analog link delay
for the port.  See the Get Link Delays Feature help described below for
further details.

The column entitled "Voted Port" indicates which port the comparator
currently considers the highest quality signal or voted port among the
list of incoming station signals.  The screen will display an "X" in the
port number row which corresponds to the voted port.

The column entitled "Force Vote" indicates the port which the 
technician has selected as the single source of signals which 
are included in the voting process.  At most, one port may be
force voted.  See the Local Control Feature help described below
for further details.    
  
 

GET LINK DELAYS FEATURE
-----------------------

To initialize or update the link delay values in the Comparator:
  1. Read the codeplug from the Comparator.
  2. Press F3 to query the Comparator for the port link delays.
  3. Press F8 to update the link delay values in the PC codeplug image.
  4. Save the codeplug to the Comparator.  This updates the link delay
     values in the Comparator.    

Pressing the F3 key will query the comparator for the port 
link delays.  The link delay shown is a value in milliseconds (ms).  It 
represents the time from when a whole frame is sent by either the 
Comparator or Base Station/Receiver to the time that whole frame is 
received by the other infrastructure device.  Note that the connected
Base Station/Receiver must contain software which supports this feature.
If the link delay field for a port remains blank for several seconds
after pressing F3 and the port is idle,  verify the correct software is
installed in the connected Base Station/Receiver. 

The link delay for each port is calculated by the Comparator under two
main assumptions.

ASSUMPTIONS:  The links support a transmission rate of 9600 bps only.
              The link delays are symmetrical in both directions between
              the Base Station/Receiver and the Comparator.

The Comparator has two constraints on its output for port link delays.
CONSTRAINTS:  An upper limit of 999 ms is set on any link delay calculation.
              Therefore, a value of 999 indicates 999 ms or greater.
              Digital link delays are displayed on the Status Panel Screen
              for ports on which a valid link delay has been determined.

If a codeplug has been read in, pressing the F8 key will save these link
delays to the codeplug image on the PC (see the Port Control Screen, Digital
Input Delay field). This operation does NOT update the link delay values in
the comparator.  The link delays will not be saved to the codeplug if
the difference between the smallest and largest link delay is greater
than 100 msec.

LOCAL CONTROL FEATURE
---------------------
General Help:
Local Control allows a technician to force vote and vote disable
ports from the status panel display.  This feature should be used
with caution because when local control mode is enabled, the
remote status panel can not force vote or vote disable any ports.

Specific Help:
Local Control is a feature that allows a technician to force vote
and vote disable ports through the RSS.  The Comparator must
be in local control mode in order for any commands to be
accepted.  When the Comparator is in local control mode, com-
mands from the remote status panel will not be processed.

To enter local control mode, hit F7 on the Status Panel Display
Screen.  The screen will change to show "Local Control Mode is
Enabled," also, the third LED on the front panel will start blinking.
Any port force voted by the remote status will no longer be force
voted.

To force vote a port, use the tab key to highlight the port you
want to force vote.  Then hit F2 to toggle the port's force vote sta-
tus.  Only one port can be force voted at a time and a vote dis-
able/local vote disable port can not be force voted. Ports that are
force voted through local control will not remain force voted if
local control mode is exited.

To vote disable a port or vote enable a vote disabled/ local vote
disabled port use the tab key to highlight the port you want to
affect.  Hit the F9 key to toggle the status.  You may not vote dis-
able a force voted port. Ports that are vote disabled through local
control will remain vote disabled until they are enabled by the
local control or until the comparator's power is cycled.  The
remote status panel may not vote enable these ports.  It will
show them as failed on the panel.

To exit local control mode, hit the F7 key.  The status panel will
now show "Local Control Mode is Disabled" and the third LED on
the comparator will turn off.  Local Control mode must be explic-
itly exited - leaving the Status Panel Screen will not change the
local control mode.

The local control mode and the local vote disabled ports will per-
sist through resets but not through power cycles.


*otac_fan_diag_hlp,A
FAN TEST DIAGNOSTICS HELP

This screen can be used to verify operation of the cooling fan
located on the back of the Comparator.

To verify proper fan operation:
1. Press F2 to turn on the Fan. 
2. Observe that the cooling fan is operating.
3. Press F9 to return the fan automatic mode.

NOTE: As a precautionary measure, the RSS will return the 
      fan to automatic mode when the user exits this screen.

*dsvcp_help,A
PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY TO FILE HELP 

ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view.  Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered.  Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key.  Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.

If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen.  If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.

If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.

Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.

ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).

Press the ENTER key to save the Codeplug Summary to the desired file.

After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY
Menu.

*dsvcp_directory,A
ENTER REPORT DIRECTORY NAME HELP

Enter the directory pathname where the Codeplug Summary is to be stored
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed.  Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.

Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.

When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.  Press function key F5 to
recall the default RSS Archive directory.

*dsvcp_filename,A
ENTER REPORT FILENAME HELP

Enter the desired filename of the Codeplug Summary in this field. Any legal
MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an existing file,
the filename highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).

Press Enter or TAB to select the file.

*dsvcp_dir_contents_help,A
OVERWRITE REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP

Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select an Codeplug Summary file from
the given list.  The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.

Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.

Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.

Press ESC or F10 to exit the PRINT CODEPLUG TO FILE screen without
writing the Codeplug Summary to a file.

*save_alert_help,A
SAVE ALERTS REPORT TO FILE HELP 

ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view.  Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered.  Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key.  Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.

If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen.  If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.

If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.

Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.

ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).

Press the ENTER key to save the Alerts Report to the desired file.

After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the STATUS REPORT
Screen.

*alert_directory,A
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP

Enter the desired directory pathname where the Alert Report is stored 
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.

Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.

When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.

*alert_filename,A
ENTER FILENAME HELP

Enter the desired filename of the Alerts Report in this field. 
Any legal MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an 
existing file, the filename highlighted by the cursor will 
automatically be copied to the 'Enter Filename' field; either 
select this file by pressing Enter or TAB or type over the 
existing filename).

Press Enter or TAB to select the file.

*alert_dir_contents_help,A
OVERWRITE ALERT REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP

Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a Alert Report file from 
the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME 
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.

Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.

Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.

Press ESC or F10 to exit the SAVE ALERT REPORT FILE screen without 
writing the status report to a file.

*flash_screen_help,A
PROGRAM FIRMWARE SCREEN HELP

This screen allows the user to program firmware image files to a
connected station.

Before starting, the firmware image files must be loaded on your hard
drive.  Using the firmware installation diskette, install the
software.  The prompts and menus are similar to installing an RSS
package.  The installation diskette will provide a default directory
pathname, but you have the ability to change it to any desired
pathname.  Whatever is chosen, this same pathname is entered on the
Firmware Directory Name on the screen.

The installation procedure is as follows:
  1) Install the first installation disk into the floppy drive (A:).
  2) Type A:install
  3) Installation banner screen appears.  Press any key.
  4) A list of hard drives in your PC appears.  Select appropriate one.
  5) Directory pathname to store the firmware image files appears.  A
      default pathname is entered for you, but may be changed to a
      name of your choosing.  If the directory does not exist, it will
      be created.
  6) If there is not enough disk space to install the files, an error
      message will appear at this time and the install program will
      terminate.
  7) If enough disk space, the install program will proceed with
      decompressing the firmware image files onto your hard drive.
  8) Once all files are decompressed and copied to your hard drive,
     the install program will notify you of completion and exit.

The Current PC Date and Time fields are protected fields and are used
as reference to filling in the Time and Date fields on the screen,
which are used to put a timestamp on the download operation.  The Date
and Time fields are initially blank to force the user to enter a value.
You cannot program firmware without valid entries in these fields.

The Protocol field is a read-only field.  The only one supported in
the station is SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol).

Enter a Baud Rate that is supported by the station.  If you select a
faster Baud Rate than the station can handle, an error will be
reported and a recommended baud rate will be displayed.

If the Port Type selected is SERIAL, you may use the same port and
cable that is used for programming codeplugs.  If ETHERNET is
selected, connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the
computer to the Ethernet port in the back of the station.

The Firmware Directory Name field is initially blank, and a valid
pathname must be entered before continuing with the download.

If all fields are filled in and valid, press F8 to continue with the
download.  The RSS will put the station in download mode, and
send the image files to the station.  The status of the downloads
will be displayed on the screen.  After downloading is complete,
press any key to leave the status screen and return to the
Read/Save menu.

If performing an ethernet download and you continually get
communication errors (FTP timeout messages) while connected to
the station, the ethernet drivers between the PC and the station may
not be working properly.  This is caused by making ethernet
connections after the PC and station are powered up.  To correct the
problem, make sure the PCMCIA Ethernet card is seated properly
into the slot, reboot the PC, and retry the firmware download.  For
future downloads, it is recommended that the ethernet connections
be made prior to powering up the PC.

If performing a serial download and the station is already in download
mode before entering this screen, the download mode command sent to
the station is ignored.  In this case, the selected baud rate may
not be the same as the current baud rate setting in the station and
will time out.  The user will have to select a different baud rate
until the proper one is found.

Function Key Descriptions:

   F1  - Recall help screen.

   F2  - Not used.

   F3  - Display a list of valid firmware download directories under
	 the C:\MRSS\QUANTAR path.  After selecting a directory from
	 the list and pressing ENTER, the selection is copied to the
	 Firmware Download Directory field on the screen.  Pressing
	 F10 or ESC will close the directory window, but not update
	 the field.

   F4  - Aborts the current download operation.  Terminating the
	 process will not be instantaneous, because the RSS may
	 be waiting for a response from the connected device when
	 the key is pressed.

   F5  - Puts the device in normal operating mode if it was in
	 download mode.  The RSS will send the normal mode command
	 based on the settings on the screen.  If Port Type is set
	 to ETHERNET, the IP Address field must be correctly
	 entered and a valid Firmware Download Directory Name
	 specified.  If Port Type is set to SERIAL, the Baud Rate
	 that was used to put the device into download mode must
	 be entered and a valid Firmware Download Directory Name
	 specified.

   F6  - Retrieves the device's status report.  The RSS will
	 retrieve the report based on the settings on the screen.
	 If Port Type is set to ETHERNET, the IP Address field
	 must be correctly entered and a valid Firmware Download
	 Directory Name specified.  If Port Type is set to SERIAL,
	 the Baud Rate that was used to put the device into
	 download mode must be entered and a valid Firmware
	 Download Directory Name specified.

   F7  - Not used.

   F8  - Programs firmware into the connected device based on
	 settings on the screen.

   F9  - Not used.

   F10 - Exit to the Read/Save Codeplug Menu.

*flash_time_help,A
TIME FIELD

This field is the time portion of the timestamp field for
downloading firmware in a station network.

The field is initially blank and must contain a valid time
before continuing with firmware download.

For Intellirepeater stations, it is very important to enter
the correct time.  The value is compared to time values in
other Intellirepeaters, and firmware may not be downloaded
if the value is not accurate.

*flash_date_help,A
DATE FIELD

This field is the date portion of the timestamp field for
downloading firmware in a station network.

The field is initially blank and must contain a valid date
before continuing with firmware download.

For Intellirepeater stations, it is very important to enter
the correct date.  The value is compared to date values in
other Intellirepeaters, and firmware may not be downloaded
if the value is not accurate.

*protocol_help,A
PROTOCOL FIELD

This field determines the transfer protocol for the firmware
download.  The only choice is SLIP (Serial Line Internet
Protocol) and this field is read-only.

*baud_rate_help,A
BAUD RATE FIELD

This field determines the rate of transfer in bits per second (bps)
of the firmware download.  Valid choices are 4800, 9600, 19200,
and 38400 bps.  The default is 9600 bps.

If you select a higher baud rate than the station can support, an
error message will be returned when attempting to download the
firmware and a recommended baud rate will be displayed in the
error message.

If a modem is connected between the PC and station, make sure to
select the speed of the modem when filling in this field.

*crossload_time_help,A
CROSSLOAD TIME FIELD

This field is the time portion of the timestamp field for
crossloading codeplugs in a station network.

The field is initially blank and must contain a valid time
before continuing with the crossload function.

It is very important to enter the correct time.  The value is
compared to time values in other Intellirepeaters, and codeplugs
may not be crossloaded if the value is not accurate.

*crossload_date_help,A
CROSSLOAD DATE FIELD

This field is the date portion of the timestamp field for
crossloading codeplugs in a station network.

The field is initially blank and must contain a valid date
before continuing with the crossload function.

It is very important to enter the correct date.  The value is
compared to date values in other Intellirepeaters, and codeplugs
may not be crossloaded if the value is not accurate.

*ip_addr_help,A
STATION IP ADDRESS FIELD

Any numeric character is valid input for the field.  There must be
4 sub-components to the address with each sub-component separated
by a dot ('.').  Anything else will cause the address to be invalid.

There are a set of IP addresses that are reserved for special uses
and can not be entered for the device's address.  They are:

   0.0.0.0
   127.0.0.0       through  127.255.255.255
   128.0.0.0       through  128.0.255.255
   191.255.0.0     through  191.255.255.255
   192.0.0.0       through  192.0.0.255
   223.255.255.0   through  223.255.255.255
   224.0.0.0       through  255.255.255.255
   xxx.xxx.xxx.250 through  xxx.xxx.xxx.255

Attempting to enter one of the above addresses will cause an
out of range error message to be displayed.

IMPORTANT: After changing the IP Address, you must reset the
station in order for the new address to take effect.

*physical_addr_help,A
PHYSICAL ADDRESS FIELD

The Physical Address is a 48-bit value that uniquely identifies
the Ethernet interface hardware.  When a new hardware interface
is installed or a failed hardware interface is replaced, a new
Physical Address will be assigned.

*ethernet_params_help,A
QUANTAR ETHERNET PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP

The Ethernet Parameters screens allows the user to change or view the
station's IP address and view the station's physical address.

Setting the IP address is necessary for programming the station's
firmware.  It provides a unique identifier when communicating
with the connected device.

*moper_help,A
OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS MENU HELP

This menu contains screens to view or modify station operating parameters.

Function Key Descriptions:

     F1  - Recalls this Help Screen.

     F2  - View and set the Ethernet parameters of the connected station.

     F3  - Not used.

     F4  - Not used.

     F5  - Not used.

     F6  - Not used.

     F7  - Not used.

     F8  - Not used.

     F9  - Not used.

     F10 - Exit to Service Menu.

*fw_dir_name_help,A
FIRMWARE DIRECTORY NAME HELP

This field specifies the directory name of the download files.  Enter
a valid DOS directory pathname using backslash ('\') characters to
delineate different directory levels.  The field is initially blank when
entering the screen.

The RSS will not allow firmware to be downloaded if this field does not
contain a valid directory path.

*port_type_help,A
PORT TYPE FIELD HELP

This field determines the communication port type for programming the
firmware images.  The valid choices are SERIAL and ETHERNET.  The
default value is SERIAL.

If SERIAL is selected, the download COM port is determined by the
setting on the MAIN:SETUP COMPUTER CONFIG:SERIAL PORT CONFIG screen.

If ETHERNET is selected, an ethernet card and software driver for the
card need to be installed on the PC before continuing with the
firmware download.  If not installed, exit the RSS, install the
ethernet card and run the installation software, following the
the manufacturer's instructions.  Then, return to this screen to
program the station's firmware.

*flash_date_help,A
DATE HELP

Enter the current date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY
where: MM   represents the month,
       DD   represents the day of the month,
       YYYY represents the year.

*flash_time_help,A
TIME HELP

Enter the current time in this format: HH:MM:SS
Where HH ranges from 00 through 24 (hours)
      MM ranges from 00 through 59 (minutes)
      SS ranges from 00 through 59 (seconds)


*crossload_screen_help,A
CROSSLOAD CODEPLUG SCREEN HELP

When crossloading codeplugs across Intellirepeaters, a timestamp
consisting of a date and time is required.  The fields are
initially blank to force the user to enter an accurate value.
The PC date and time are displayed to the user as a reference,
but they may be inaccurate due to a change in time zone, daylight
savings time, no battery backup, etc.

You must be connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) before trying
to crossload.  Stations not connected to the network will not
receive your new codeplug parameters.

Only site-related information in the codeplug will get crossloaded
to the other stations.  Station-specific information, such as
Station Type and PA Power Rating, will not get crossloaded.

When satisfied with the values entered for the date and time,
press F8 to continue programming the codeplug to the station.

*fw_dir_list_help,A
FIRMWARE DIRECTORY LIST HELP

This popup window displays all firmware directories located under
C:\MRSS\QUANTAR.  Use the arrow, page up, page down, home and end
keys to navigate through the menu.  Press the ENTER key to select
a directory entry and copy it to the Firmware Directory Name field
on the screen.  Pressing F10, TAB, or ESC will exit the window and
not update the field.
